New Holland Discbine 313 & 316 Disc Mower-Conditioner Service Repair Manual (48049004) -PDF Download

SERVICE MANUAL Discbine® 313 Discbine® 316 Disc Mower-Conditioner

Printed in U.S.A. © 2016 CNH Industrial America LLC. All Rights Reserved.

New Holland is a trademark registered in the United States and many other countries, owned by or licensed to CNH Industrial N.V., its subsidiaries or affiliates.

Part number 48049004 2nd edition English November 2016 Replaces part number 47544204

SERVICE MANUAL Discbine® 313 Discbine® 316

48049004 14/11/2016 EN

Contents INTRODUCTION Power Take-Off (PTO) ................................................................. 31 [31.201] Power Take-Off (PTO) drive shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.1 [31.214] Secondary Power Take-Off (PTO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.2 [31.215] Intermediate Power Take-Off (PTO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.3 [31.220] Gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.4 [31.225] Clutches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.5

Hydraulic systems....................................................................... 35 [35.000] Hydraulic systems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35.1 [35.410] Header or attachment height system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35.2 [35.415] Header or attachment tilting system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35.3 [35.947] Frame positioning swinging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35.4

Wheels ...................................................................................... 44 [44.530] Carrying and transport wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44.1

Electrical systems ....................................................................... 55 [55.000] Electrical system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55.1 [55.100] Harnesses and connectors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55.2 [55.404] External lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55.3

Attachments/Headers.................................................................. 58 [58.110] Attachment/Header cutting mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58.1 [58.130] Attachment/Header frame. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58.2

Product feeding .......................................................................... 60 [60.120] Header drive system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60.1 [60.620] Roll conditioning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60.2 [60.630] Flail conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60.3

48049004 14/11/2016

INTRODUCTION

48049004 14/11/2016

1

Contents INTRODUCTION Foreword - Important notice regarding equipment servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Safety rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Safety rules - Personal safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Safety rules - Ecology and the environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Torque - Nominal tightening torques for normal assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Basic instructions - Shop and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 General specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Product identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Product identification - Machine orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

48049004 14/11/2016

2

INTRODUCTION

Foreword - Important notice regarding equipment servicing All repair and maintenance work listed in this manual must be carried out only by qualified dealership personnel, strictly complying with the instructions given, and using, whenever possible, the special tools.

Anyone who performs repair and maintenance operations without complying with the procedures provided herein shall be responsible for any subsequent damages.

The manufacturer and all the organizations of its distribution chain, including - without limitation - national, regional, or local dealers, reject any responsibility for damages caused by parts and/or components not approved by the manufacturer, including those used for the servicing or repair of the product manufactured or marketed by the manufacturer.

In any case, no warranty is given or attributed on the product manufactured or marketed by the manufacturer in case of damages caused by parts and/or components not approved by the manufacturer.

The manufacturer reserves the right to make improvements in design and changes in specifications at any time without notice and without incurring any obligation to install them on units previously sold. Specifications, descriptions, and illustrative material herein are as accurate as known at time of publication but are subject to change without notice.

In case of questions, refer to your NEW HOLLAND Sales and Service Networks.

48049004 14/11/2016

3

INTRODUCTION

Safety rules Personal safety This is the safety alert symbol. It is used to alert you to potential personal injury hazards. Obey all safety messages that follow this symbol to avoid possible death or injury.

Throughout this manual you will find the signal words DANGER, WARNING, and CAUTION followed by special instructions. These precautions are intended for the personal safety of you and those working with you.

Read and understand all the safety messages in this manual before you operate or service the machine.

DANGER indicates a hazardous situation that, if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury.

WARNING indicates a hazardous situation that, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury.

CAUTION indicates a hazardous situation that, if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury.

FAILURE TO FOLLOW DANGER, WARNING, AND CAUTION MESSAGES COULD RESULT IN DEATH OR SERIOUS INJURY. Machine safety NOTICE: Notice indicates a situation that, if not avoided, could result in machine or property damage.

Throughout this manual you will find the signal word Notice followed by special instructions to prevent machine or property damage. The word Notice is used to address practices not related to personal safety.

Information NOTE: Note indicates additional information that clarifies steps, procedures, or other information in this manual.

Throughout this manual you will find the word Note followed by additional information about a step, procedure, or other information in the manual. The word Note is not intended to address personal safety or property damage.

48049004 14/11/2016

4

INTRODUCTION

Safety rules - Personal safety General safety rules Use caution when you operate the machine on slopes. Raised equipment, full tanks and other loads will change the center of gravity of the machine. The machine can tip or roll over when near ditches and embankments or uneven surfaces.

Never permit anyone other than the operator to ride on the machine.

Never operate the machine under the influence of alcohol or drugs, or while you are otherwise impaired.

Hydraulic oil or diesel fuel leaking under pressure can penetrate the skin, causing serious injury or infection.

• DO NOT use your hand to check for leaks. Use a piece of cardboard or paper.

• Stop the engine, remove the key, and relieve the pressure before you connect or disconnect fluid lines.

• Make sure that all components are in good condition. Tighten all connections before you start the engine or pressurize the system.

• If hydraulic fluid or diesel fuel penetrates the skin, seek medical attention immediately.

• Continuous long term contact with hydraulic fluid may cause skin cancer. Avoid long term contact and wash the skin promptly with soap and water.

Keep clear of moving parts. Loose clothing, jewelry, watches, long hair, and other loose or hanging items can become entangled in moving parts.

Wear protective equipment when appropriate.

DO NOT attempt to remove material from any part of the machine while it is being operated or while components are in motion.

Make sure that all guards and shields are in good condition and properly installed before you operate the machine.

Never operate the machine with shields removed. Always close access doors or panels before you operate the machine.

A person or pet within the operating area of a machine can be struck or crushed by the machine or its equipment. DO NOT allow anyone to enter the work area.

Raised equipment and/or loads can fall unexpectedly and crush persons underneath. Never allow anyone to enter the area underneath raised equipment during operation.

Always keep windows, mirrors, all lighting, and Slow-Moving Vehicle (SMV) emblem clean to provide the best possible visibility while you operate the machine.

Operate controls only when seated in the operator’s seat, except for those controls expressly intended for use from other locations.

48049004 14/11/2016

5

INTRODUCTION

Before you leave the machine: 1. Park the machine on a firm, level surface.

2. Put all controls in neutral or park lock position.

3. Engage the parking brake. Use wheel chocks if required.

4. Lower all hydraulic equipment — Implements, header, etc.

5. Turn off the engine and remove the key.

WARNING Some components may continue to run down after you disengage drive systems.

Make sure all drive systems are fully disengaged.

Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury.

W0113A

When, due to exceptional circumstances, you would decide to keep the engine running after you leave the operator’s station, then you must follow these precautions: 1. Bring the engine to low idle speed.

2. Disengage all drive systems.

3. Shift the transmission into neutral.

4. Apply the parking brake.

General maintenance safety Keep the area used for servicing the machine clean and dry. Clean up spilled fluids.

Service the machine on a firm, level surface.

Install guards and shields after you service the machine.

Close all access doors and install all panels after servicing the machine.

Do not attempt to clean, lubricate, clear obstructions, or make adjustments to the machine while it is in motion or while the engine is running.

Always make sure that working area is clear of tools, parts, other persons and pets before you start operating the machine.

Unsupported hydraulic cylinders can lose pressure and drop the equipment, causing a crushing hazard. Do not leave equipment in a raised position while parked or during service, unless the equipment is securely supported.

Jack or lift the machine only at jack or lift points indicated in this manual.

Incorrect towing procedures can cause accidents. When you tow a disabled machine follow the procedure in this manual. Use only rigid tow bars.

Stop the engine, remove the key, and relieve pressure before you connect or disconnect fluid lines.

Stop the engine and remove the key before you connect or disconnect electrical connections.

Replace damaged or worn tubes, hoses, electrical wiring, etc.

When welding, follow the instructions in the manual. Always disconnect the battery before you weld on the machine.

Always wash your hands after you handle battery components.

48049004 14/11/2016

6

INTRODUCTION

Wheels and tires Make sure that tires are correctly inflated. Do not exceed any recommended load or pressure. Follow the instructions in the manual for proper tire inflation.

Tires are heavy. Handling tires without proper equipment could cause death or serious injury.

Never weld on a wheel with a tire installed. Always remove the tire completely from the wheel prior to welding.

Always have a qualified tire technician service the tires and wheels. If a tire has lost all pressure, take the tire and wheel to a tire shop or your dealer for service. Explosive separation of the tire can cause serious injury.

DO NOT weld to a wheel or rim until the tire is completely removed. Inflated tires can generate a gas mixture with the air that can be ignited by high temperatures from welding procedures performed on the wheel or rim. Removing the air or loosening the tire on the rim (breaking the bead) will NOT eliminate the hazard. This condition can exist whether tires are inflated or deflated. The tire MUST be completely removed from the wheel or rim prior to welding the wheel or rim.

Driving on public roads and general transportation safety Comply with local laws and regulations.

Use appropriate lighting to meet local regulations.

Make sure that the Slow-Moving Vehicle (SMV) emblem (1) is visible.

NHIL13HT00312AA

1

Make sure that the brake pedal latch is engaged. You must lock brake pedals together for road travel.

Use safety chains for trailed equipment when safety chains are provided with machine or equipment.

Lift implements and attachments high enough above ground to prevent accidental contact with road.

When you transport equipment or a machine on a transport trailer, make sure that it is properly secured. the SlowMoving Vehicle (SMV) emblem on the equipment or machine is covered while being transported on a trailer.

Be aware of overhead structures or power lines and make sure that the machine and/or attachments can pass safely under.

Travel speed should be such that you maintain complete control and machine stability at all times.

Slow down and signal before turning.

Pull over to allow faster traffic to pass.

Follow correct towing procedure for equipment with or without brakes.

48049004 14/11/2016

7

INTRODUCTION

Power Take-Off (PTO) Power Take-Off (PTO) driven machinery can cause death or serious injury. Before you work on or near the PTO shaft or service or clear the driven machine, put the PTO lever in the disengage position, stop the engine, and remove the key.

Whenever a PTO is in operation, a guard must be in place to prevent death or injury to the operator or bystanders.

When doing stationary PTO work, keep clear of all moving parts and make sure that appropriate guards are in place.

Never use a spline adaptor: • Match the right tractor PTO spline and speed with the PTO drive shaft provided with an implement. This will assure proper geometry and operating speed.

• Never operate 540 RPM implements at 1000 RPM. • Never operate 1000 RPM implements at 540 RPM. • Use of PTO adaptors will void the warranty of the drive shaft, and the PTO drive train of the machine and implement.

• For correct hitch setup and geometry see the operator’s manual for relevant hitch configuration on the machine: • See “Machine preparation – Two-point swivel hitch with tractor quick-hitch”.

• See “Tractor attachment – Two-point swivel hitch with tractor quick-hitch”.

• See “Tractor attachment – Two-point swivel hitch”.

• See “Machine preparation – Two-point swivel hitch”.

• See “Machine preparation – Drawbar swivel hitch”.

• See “Tractor attachment – Drawbar swivel hitch”.

Reflectors and warning lights You must use flashing amber warning lights (1) when you operate equipment on public roads.

NHIL13HT00312AA

2

Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) Wear Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) such as hard hat, eye protection, heavy gloves, hearing protection, protective clothing, etc.

Do Not Operate tag Before you start servicing the machine, attach a ‘Do Not Operate’ warning tag to the machine in an area that will be visible.

Hazardous chemicals If you are exposed to or come in contact with hazardous chemicals you can be seriously injured. The fluids, lubricants, paints, adhesives, coolant, etc. required for the function of your machine can be hazardous. They may be attractive and harmful to domestic animals as well as humans.

48049004 14/11/2016

8

INTRODUCTION

Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) provide information about the chemical substances within a product, safe handling and storage procedures, first aid measures, and procedures to take in the event of a spill or accidental release.

MSDS are available from your dealer.

Before you service your machine check the MSDS for each lubricant, fluid, etc. used in this machine. This information indicates the associated risks and will help you service the machine safely. Follow the information in the MSDS, and on manufacturer containers, as well as the information in this manual, when you service the machine.

Dispose of all fluids, filters, and containers in an environmentally safe manner according to local laws and regulations.

Check with local environmental and recycling centers or your dealer for correct disposal information.

Store fluids and filters in accordance with local laws and regulations. Use only appropriate containers for the storage of chemicals or petrochemical substances.

Keep out of reach or children or other unauthorized persons.

Applied chemicals require additional precautions. Obtain complete information from the manufacturer or distributor of the chemicals before you use them.

Utility safety Make sure that the machine has sufficient clearance to pass in all directions. Pay special attention to overhead power lines and hanging obstacles. High voltage lines may require significant clearance for safety. Contact local authorities or utilities to obtain safe clearance distances from high voltage power lines.

Retract raised or extended components, if necessary. Remove or lower radio antennas or other accessories. Should a contact between the machine and an electric power source occur, the following precautions must be taken: • Stop the machine movement immediately.

• Apply the parking brake, stop the engine, and remove the key.

• Check if you can safely leave the cab or your actual position without contact with electrical wires. If not, stay in your position and call for help. If you can leave your position without touching lines, jump clear of the machine to make sure that you do not make contact with the ground and the machine at the same time.

• Do not permit anyone to touch the machine until power has been shut off to the power lines.

Electrical storm safety Do not operate machine during an electrical storm.

If you are on the ground during an electrical storm, stay away from machinery and equipment. Seek shelter in a permanent, protected structure.

If an electrical storm should strike during operation, remain in the cab. Do not leave the cab or operator’s platform.

Do not make contact with the ground or objects outside the machine.

48049004 14/11/2016

9

INTRODUCTION

Safety rules - Ecology and the environment Soil, air, and water quality is important for all industries and life in general. When legislation does not yet rule the treatment of some of the substances that advanced technology requires, sound judgment should govern the use and disposal of products of a chemical and petrochemical nature.

Familiarize yourself with the relative legislation applicable to your country, and make sure that you understand this legislation. Where no legislation exists, obtain information from suppliers of oils, filters, batteries, fuels, anti-freeze, cleaning agents, etc., with regard to the effect of these substances on man and nature and how to safely store, use, and dispose of these substances.

Helpful hints • Avoid the use of cans or other inappropriate pressurized fuel delivery systems to fill tanks. Such delivery systems may cause considerable spillage.

• In general, avoid skin contact with all fuels, oils, acids, solvents, etc. Most of these products contain substances that may be harmful to your health.

• Modern oils contain additives. Do not burn contaminated fuels and or waste oils in ordinary heating systems.

• Avoid spillage when you drain fluids such as used engine coolant mixtures, engine oil, hydraulic fluid, brake fluid, etc. Do not mix drained brake fluids or fuels with lubricants. Store all drained fluids safely until you can dispose of the fluids in a proper way that complies with all local legislation and available resources.

• Do not allow coolant mixtures to get into the soil. Collect and dispose of coolant mixtures properly.

• The air-conditioning system contains gases that should not be released into the atmosphere. Consult an air-conditioning specialist or use a special extractor to recharge the system properly.

• Repair any leaks or defects in the engine cooling system or hydraulic system immediately.

• Do not increase the pressure in a pressurized circuit as this may lead to a component failure.

• Protect hoses during welding. Penetrating weld splatter may burn a hole or weaken hoses, allowing the loss of oils, coolant, etc.

Battery recycling Batteries and electric accumulators contain several substances that can have a harmful effect on the environment if the batteries are not properly recycled after use. Improper disposal of batteries can contaminate the soil, groundwater, and waterways. NEW HOLLAND strongly recommends that you return all used batteries to a NEW HOLLAND dealer, who will dispose of the used batteries or recycle the used batteries properly. In some countries, this is a legal requirement.

Mandatory battery recycling NOTE: The following requirements are mandatory in Brazil.

Batteries are made of lead plates and a sulfuric acid solution. Because batteries contain heavy metals such as lead, CONAMA Resolution 401/2008 requires you to return all used batteries to the battery dealer when you replace any batteries. Do not dispose of batteries in your household garbage.

Points of sale are obliged to: • Accept the return of your used batteries • Store the returned batteries in a suitable location • Send the returned batteries to the battery manufacturer for recycling

48049004 14/11/2016

10

INTRODUCTION

Torque - Nominal tightening torques for normal assembly NOTE: In the metric tables, nominal sizes M4 through M8 hardware torque specifications are shown as a Newton meters (pound-inches) numerical value.

Nominal sizes M10 through M24 hardware torque specifications are shown as a Newton meters (pound-feet) numerical value.

Metric hex head (non-flange) hardware Plain (PLN) – an unplated hardware finish with residual manufacturing oils Zinc-dichromate (ZND) – a yellow colored chemical plating formula yellow applied to the hardware

Nominal size

M4 M5 M6 M8 M10 M12 M14 M16 M18 M20 M24

Class (CL) 8.8 bolt and Class (CL) 8 nut PLN and ZND N·m (lb in)

Class (CL) 10.9 bolt and Class (CL) 10 nut PLN and ZND N·m (lb in)

Locknut CL 8 w/CL 8.8 bolt ZND N·m (lb in)

Locknut CL 10 w/CL 10.9 bolt ZND N·m (lb in)

3.5 (31) 7.0 (62) 11.8 (104) 28.8 (255)

5.0 (44) 10 (88) 17 (150) 41.3 (366)

1.4 (13) 2.9 (26) 4.9 (43) 11.9 (105)

2.8 (25) 5.5 (49) 9.4 (83) 23 (204)

N·m (lb ft)

N·m (lb ft)

N·m (lb ft)

N·m (lb ft)

57 (42) 100 (74) 159 (117) 248 (183) 352 (260) 500 (369) 865 (638)

82 (60) 143 (105) 227 (168) 354 (261) 487 (359) 690 (509) 1195 (882)

24 (17) 41 (30) 66 (48) 102 (75) 145 (107) 206 (152) 357 (263)

45 (33) 79 (38) 125 (92) 195 (144) 268 (198) 380 (280) 657 (485)

Metric flange head hardware Plain (PLN) – an unplated hardware finish with residual manufacturing oils Zinc-dichromate (ZND) – a yellow colored chemical plating formula yellow applied to the hardware

Nominal size

M4 M5 M6 M8 M10 M12 M14 M16 M18 M20 M24

Class (CL) 8.8 bolt and Class (CL) 8 nut PLN and ZND N·m (lb in)

Class (CL) 10.9 Flange locknut Flange locknut bolt and Class CL 10 CL 8 (CL) 10 nut w/CL 10.9 bolt w/CL 8.8 bolt PLN and ZND ZND ZND N·m (lb in) N·m (lb in) N·m (lb in)

3.8 (34) 7.7 (68) 13 (115) 31.7 (281)

5.5 (49) 11 (97) 18.7 (166) 45.5 (403)

4.2 (37) 8.5 (75) 14.3 (127) 35 (310)

6.1 (54) 12 (106) 20.6 (182) 50 (443)

N·m (lb ft)

N·m (lb ft)

N·m (lb ft)

N·m (lb ft)

63 (47) 110 (81) 175 (129) 272 (201) 387 (286) 550 (406) 951 (702)

90 (66) 157 (116) 250 (184) 389 (287) 535 (395) 759 (560) 1315 (970)

69 (51) 121 (89) 193 (142) 299 (221) 426 (315) 605 (447) 1046 (772)

48049004 14/11/2016

11

99 173 275 428 589 835 1447

(73) (128) (202) (316) (435) (616) (1067)

INTRODUCTION

Identification markings Metric hex head, flange hex head and carriage bolts, Classes (CL) 5.6 and upward

NHIL14RB00662AA

1

Metric bolt identification markings 1. Manufacturer's identification 2. Property class

Metric hex nuts and locknuts, Classes (CL) 05 and upward

NHIL14RB00663AA

2

Metric hex nut identification markings • (1) – Manufacturer's identification • (3) – Property class • (2) – Clockwise type markings indicate property class and may include manufacturer identification (if applied), Example: property marks 240 ° apart (shown) at the eight o’clock position indicate a Class 8 property, and marks 300 ° apart at the ten o’clock position indicate a Class 10 property.

48049004 14/11/2016

12

INTRODUCTION

NOTE: In the Imperial units tables, the nominal sizes, 1/4 (0.25) in (inch) and 5/16 (0.3125) in (inch) hardware torque specifications are shown as a Newton meters (pound-inches) numerical value.

Nominal sizes 3/8 (0.375) in (inch) through 1 (1.0) in (inch) hardware torque specifications are shown as a Newton meters (pound-feet) numerical value.

Inch hex head (non-flange) hardware Plain (PLN) – an unplated hardware finish with residual manufacturing oils Zinc-dichromate (ZND) – a yellow colored chemical plating formula yellow applied to the hardware

Nominal size

1/4 (0.25) in 5/16 (0.3125) in 3/8 (0.375) in 7/16 (0.4375) in 1/2 (0.50) in 9/16 (0.5625) in 5/8 (0.625) in 3/4 (0.75) in 7/8 (0.875) in 1 (1.0) in

SAE Grade (GR) 5 bolt and nut PLN and ZND N·m (lb in)

SAE Grade (GR) 8 bolt and nut PLN and ZND N·m (lb in)

Locknut GR B w/ GR 5 bolt ZND N·m (lb in)

Locknut GR C w/ GR 8 bolt ZND N·m (lb in)

13 (115) 27 (239)

18 (159) 38 (336)

7.2 (64) 14.9 (132)

10 (89) 21 (186)

N·m (lb ft)

N·m (lb ft)

N·m (lb ft)

N·m (lb ft)

47 (35) 76 (56) 116 (85) 167 (123) 231 (170) 410 (302) 660 (486) 989 (729)

67 (49) 107 (79) 164 (121) 236 (174) 326 (240) 578 (426) 931 (687) 1396 (1030)

26 (19) 42 (31) 64 (47) 92 (68) 127 (94) 226 (166) 363 (267) 544 (401)

37 (27) 59 (44) 90 (67) 130 (96) 179 (132) 318 (234) 512 (378) 768 (567)

Inch flange head hardware Plain (PLN) – an unplated hardware finish with residual manufacturing oils Zinc-dichromate (ZND) – a yellow colored chemical plating formula yellow applied to the hardware

Nominal size

1/4 (0.25) in 5/16 (0.3125) in 3/8 (0.375) in 7/16 (0.4375) in 1/2 (0.50) in 9/16 (0.5625) in 5/8 (0.625) in 3/4 (0.75) in 7/8 (0.875) in 1 (1.0) in

SAE Grade (GR) 5 bolt and nut PLN and ZND N·m (lb in)

SAE Grade (GR) 8 bolt and nut PLN and ZND N·m (lb in)

Flange locknut GR F w/ GR 5 bolt ZND N·m (lb in)

Flange locknut GR G w/ GR 8 bolt ZND N·m (lb in)

14 (124) 29 (257)

20 (177) 42 (372)

15.4 (136) 32 (283)

22 (195) 46 (407)

N·m (lb ft)

N·m (lb ft)

N·m (lb ft)

N·m (lb ft)

52 (38) 84 (62) 127 (94) 184 (136) 254 (187) 450 (332) 725 (535) 1088 (802)

74 (54) 118 (87) 180 (133) 259 (191) 358 (264) 636 (469) 1024 (755) 1536 (1133)

57 (42) 92 (68) 140 (103) 202 (150) 279 (206) 495 (365) 798 (589) 1197 (882)

81 (9) 130 (96) 198 (146) 285 (210) 394 (290) 700 (516) 1126 (831) 1690 (1246)

48049004 14/11/2016

13

INTRODUCTION

Identification marking Grades of inch bolts and free-spinning nuts SAE (J995) bolt head and nut grade identification

Grade

Grade identification marking

Marking description

Grade 2 No line marks

Grade 5 Three line marks

Grade 8 Six line marks

Grade 2 No circumferential line marks

Grade 5 Two circumferential line marks located 120° apart

Grade 2 Two circumferential line marks located 60° apart

Grade 2 No circumferential line marks

Grade 5 Two circumferential line marks located 120° apart

Grade 8 Two circumferential line marks located 60° apart

48049004 14/11/2016

14

INTRODUCTION

Grades of inch prevailing torque locknuts, all metal (three common marking methods) On prevailing torque locknuts, the grade of nut is identified by one of three different sets of markings that denote the strength level and manufacturer.

Common prevailing torque locknut grade identification markings

Grade

Grade identification marking

Marking description

Grade A No marks

Grade B (hex nut) and Grade F (flange nut) Three raised or indented dot marks (Marks do not have to be in corners.)

Grade C (hex nut) and Grade F (flange nut) Six raised or indented dot marks (Marks do not have to be in corners.)

Grade A No letter mark on side flat

Grade B Letter B on side flat

Grade C Letter C on side flat

Grade A No notches

Grade B One circumferential notch on all six corners

Grade C Two circumferential notches on all six corners

48049004 14/11/2016

15

INTRODUCTION

Basic instructions - Shop and assembly Shimming For each adjustment operation, select adjusting shims and measure the adjusting shims individually using a micrometer, then add up the recorded values. Do not rely on measuring the entire shimming set, which may be incorrect, or the rated value shown on each shim.

Rotating shaft seals For correct rotating shaft seal installation, proceed as follows: 1. Before assembly, allow the seal to soak in the oil it will be sealing for at least thirty minutes.

2. Thoroughly clean the shaft and check that the working surface on the shaft is not damaged.

3. Position the sealing lip facing the fluid.

NOTE: With hydrodynamic lips, take into consideration the shaft rotation direction and position the grooves so that they will move the fluid towards the inner side of the seal.

4. Coat the sealing lip with a thin layer of lubricant (use oil rather than grease). Fill the gap between the sealing lip and the dust lip on double lip seals with grease.

5. Insert the seal in its seat and press down using a flat punch or seal installation tool. Do not tap the seal with a hammer or mallet.

6. While you insert the seal, check that the seal is perpendicular to the seat. When the seal settles, make sure that the seal makes contact with the thrust element, if required.

7. To prevent damage to the seal lip on the shaft, position a protective guard during installation operations.

O-ring seals Lubricate the O-ring seals before you insert them in the seats. This will prevent the O-ring seals from overturning and twisting, which would jeopardize sealing efficiency.

Sealing compounds Apply a sealing compound on the mating surfaces when specified by the procedure. Before you apply the sealing compound, prepare the surfaces as directed by the product container.

Spare parts Only use CNH Original Parts or NEW HOLLAND Original Parts.

Only genuine spare parts guarantee the same quality, duration, and safety as original parts, as they are the same parts that are assembled during standard production. Only CNH Original Parts or NEW HOLLAND Original Parts can offer this guarantee.

When ordering spare parts, always provide the following information: • Machine model (commercial name) and Product Identification Number (PIN) • Part number of the ordered part, which can be found in the parts catalog

48049004 14/11/2016

16

INTRODUCTION

Protecting the electronic and/or electrical systems during charging and welding To avoid damage to the electronic and/or electrical systems, always observe the following practices: 1. Never make or break any of the charging circuit connections when the engine is running, including the battery connections.

2. Never short any of the charging components to ground.

3. Always disconnect the ground cable from the battery before arc welding on the machine or on any machine attachment.

• Position the welder ground clamp as close to the welding area as possible.

• If you weld in close proximity to a computer module, then you should remove the module from the machine.

• Never allow welding cables to lie on, near, or across any electrical wiring or electronic component while you weld.

4. Always disconnect the negative cable from the battery when charging the battery in the machine with a battery charger.

NOTICE: If you must weld on the unit, you must disconnect the battery ground cable from the machine battery.

The electronic monitoring system and charging system will be damaged if this is not done.

5. Remove the battery ground cable. Reconnect the cable when you complete welding.

WARNING Battery acid causes burns. Batteries contain sulfuric acid.

Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Antidote (external): Flush with water. Antidote (eyes): flush with water for 15 minutes and seek medical attention immediately. Antidote (internal): Drink large quantities of water or milk. Do not induce vomiting. Seek medical attention immediately.

Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury.

W0111A

Special tools The special tools that NEW HOLLAND suggests and illustrate in this manual have been specifically researched and designed for use with NEW HOLLAND machines. The special tools are essential for reliable repair operations. The special tools are accurately built and rigorously tested to offer efficient and long-lasting operation.

By using these tools, repair personnel will benefit from: • Operating in optimal technical conditions • Obtaining the best results • Saving time and effort • Working in safe conditions

48049004 14/11/2016

17

INTRODUCTION

General specifications Model

Discbine® 313

Discbine® 316

Overall Width Transport position Field position – Two-point hitch Field position – Drawbar

4.04 m (13 ft 4 in) 6.5 m (21 ft 3 in) 6.0 m (19 ft 7 in)

5.05 m (16 ft 7 in) 7.8 m (25 ft 7 in) 7.3 m (23 ft 11 in)

Overall Length Transport position – Two-point hitch Transport position – Drawbar Field position – Two-point hitch Field position – Drawbar

8.4 m 8.1 m 7.0 m 6.7 m

9.7 m 9.4 m 8.1 m 7.8 m

Height Transport position Field position

2.26 m (7 ft 5 in) 2.01 m (6 ft 7 in)

(27 (26 (23 (22

ft ft ft ft

5 in) 5 in) 0 in) 0 in)

Ground clearance Header fully raised Weight Shipping – Without hitch Shipping – Two-point hitch and drawbar Operating

(32 (31 (26 (25

ft ft ft ft

0 in) 0 in) 7 in) 7 in)

2.26 m (7 ft 5 in) 2.01 m (6 ft 7 in)

411 mm (16.2 in)

2912 kg (6420 lb) 2991 kg (6594 lb) 2846 kg (6274 lb)

3104 kg (6843 lb) 3184 kg (7020 lb) 3039 kg (6700 lb)

Tractor requirements Power Hydraulic circuits required Electrical Power Take-Off (PTO) shaft spline and size requirements Input speed Drive line protection Header Flotation Windrow width Swath width – Roll conditioner units Swath width – Flail conditioner units Header lift Cutterbar Type Number of discs Knives per disc Disc cutting diameter Disc drive method Cutterbar shear protection Disc speed at 1000 RPM PTO speed Knife tip speed at 1000 RPM PTO speed Cutting width

67 kW (90 Hp) or greater with 75 kW (100 Hp) or greater with standard Category 2 or Category standard Category 2 or Category 3 ASAE/ASABE hitch and PTO 3 ASAE/ASABE hitch and PTO locations. locations.

Two remote hydraulic circuits capable of 104 bar (1500 psi) 7-pin electrical connector for trailing and road transport lights 21-spline 1-3/8 in 1000 RPM only Overrunning and friction slip clutch assembly at the front of the secondary PTO shaft

Vertical and radial, adjustable springs 0.9 - 2.4 m (3.0 - 8.0 ft) 3 m (10 ft) 3.7 m (12.0 ft) 3.4 m (11.0 ft) 4.0 m (13.0 ft) Hydraulic (master-slave system)

Modular 8 counter rotating, 2 co-rotating 2 618 mm (24.3 in) PTO drive with a friction slip clutch to a bevel gearbox at the left-hand end of header, then to a vertical PTO shaft to the cutterbar Frangible splines in disc drive hub 2250 RPM 8 counter-rotating

261 km/h (162 mph) 4.0 m (13 ft- 0 in) 48049004 14/11/2016

18

4.95 m (16ft-3 in)

INTRODUCTION

Cutterbar Cutting height Cutting height – High stubble shoes Cutting height – Biomass shoes Cutting height – Adjustable shoes Cutterbar angle Conditioner Type – Roll conditioner Type – Flail conditioner Drive – Roll conditioner Drive – Flail conditioner Length Diameter – Roll conditioner Diameter – Flail conditioner Speed – Roll conditioner Speed – Flail conditioner

20 - 69 mm (0.79 - 2.7 in) 79 - 140 mm (3.1 - 5.5 in) 124 - 198 mm (4.9 - 7.8 in) 20 - 147.0 mm (0.79 - 5.8 in) -2 ° to -10 °

Chevron intermeshing molded rubber Chevron intermeshing steel rolls Flail rotor with 120 tapered flails 4HB V-shaped belt and enclosed gears 4HB V-shaped belt 3175 mm (125 in) 2 x 264 mm (10.38 in) rolls 1 x 560 mm (22 in) flail rotor Standard 750 RPM ( 640 RPM optional by swapping sheaves) Standard 1042 RPM, Optional 752 RPM with the low-speed rotor kit (available from your authorized NEW HOLLAND dealer)

Conditioning roll tension adjustment – Roll conditioner Conditioner gap adjustment – Roll conditioner Conditioner gap adjustment – Flail conditioner Miscellaneous specifications Operating speed Transport speed Capacity Tire Tire pressure Jack Tongue shift mechanism

Single crank Draw-bolt stop at each end Single crank adjustment of rotor hood

0 - 14 km/h (0 - 9 mph) 32 km/h (20 mph) maximum 3.1 Ha/hr (7.6 Ac/hr) at 10 km/h (6 mph) and 80 % field efficiency.

12.5L x 15 8PR, Tubeless agricultural rib implement tire 248 kPa (36 psi) 2000 lb capacity side-wind Hydraulic

48049004 14/11/2016

19

INTRODUCTION

Capacities Consumable product Material specification Grease lubricant NEW HOLLAND AMBRA HI TEMP EP GREASE

CNH Industrial: MAT3550 Performance: NLGI 2, GC-LB

Use All grease fittings Wheel bearings – Repack

Capacity As specified per the operator’s manual maintenance section.

Not specified; amount as required

Lubricating oils

TUTELA HYPOIDE EP GEAR LUBE SAE 80W-90 OR TUTELA HYPOIDE SSL SYNTHETIC GEAR LUBE SAE 75W-90 (synthetic) OR CNH HYPOIDE SSL SYNTHETIC GEAR LUBE 75W-90 (synthetic)

CNH Industrial: MAT3511 Performance: API GL-5, SAE J2360, MIL-PRF-2105E

TUTELA MOLY GREASE GR-75

Not Applicable (NA)

Front lower-half swivel hitch 2200 mL (74 US fl oz) gearbox Front upper-half swivel 1200 mL (41 US fl oz) hitch gearbox Rear lower-half reversing 2200 mL (74 US fl oz) swivel gearbox Rear upper-half reversing 1200 mL (41 US fl oz) swivel gearbox Conditioner drive gearbox 200 mL (7 US fl oz) Bevel gearbox 800 mL (27 US fl oz) 310 mL (10 US fl oz) each Cutterbar modules Internal O-rings of the Amount as required to coat driven cutterbar module the O-rings pinion shaft – Quantity 2 Internal neck extension Amount as required to coat the O-ring O-ring • Cutterbar coupler shaft splines

TUTELA SYNTHETIC GREASE MT-55 GR-1000 SSL

Amount as required to coat the splines

Sealants Swivel gearboxes • Neck assembly upper and lower mating surfaces

LOCTITE® SI 598™ BLACK OR DOW CORNING® 7091 ADHESIVE SEALANT BLACK

• Between the cover and housing mating surfaces Cutterbar module Not Applicable (NA)

• Top cap sealing flange • Top cap bolts Conditioner drive gearbox • Oil drain plug Bevel gearbox • Between the cover and housing mating surfaces Cutterbar module

LOCTITE® 592™ PST

Not specified; amount as required

Not Applicable (NA)

• Oil drain plug threads

Not specified; amount as required Not specified; amount as required Not specified; amount as required Not specified; amount as required

• Oil dip stick threads Swivel gearboxes LOCTITE® 263™

Not Applicable (NA)

• Neck assembly hex socket screw threads • Locknut threads of the neck bearing assembly Bevel gearbox

LOCTITE® 270

Not Applicable (NA)

• Bevel shaft locknut threads

48049004 14/11/2016

20

Not specified; amount as required

Not specified; amount as required

INTRODUCTION

48049004 14/11/2016

21

INTRODUCTION

Product identification Product Identification Number (PIN) The location of the disc mower-conditioner Product Identification Number (PIN) plate (1) is on the right-hand side of the trail frame.

NHIL13HT00487AA

1

NHIL14HT00590AA

2

(1) – Model (2) – PIN number (3) – Weight (4) – Model year (5) – Year of construction

48049004 14/11/2016

22

INTRODUCTION

Product identification - Machine orientation NOTE: On this equipment, left-hand and right-hand are determined by standing behind the unit, looking in the direction of travel.

NHIL13HT00287AA

1

Left-hand side view

NHIL13HT00289AA

2

Right-hand side view

NHIL13HT00288AA

3

Rear view

48049004 14/11/2016

23

INTRODUCTION

48049004 14/11/2016

24

SERVICE MANUAL Power Take-Off (PTO) Discbine® 313 Discbine® 316

48049004 14/11/2016

31

Contents Power Take-Off (PTO) - 31

[31.201] Power Take-Off (PTO) drive shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.1 [31.214] Secondary Power Take-Off (PTO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.2 [31.215] Intermediate Power Take-Off (PTO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.3 [31.220] Gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.4 [31.225] Clutches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.5

48049004 14/11/2016

31

Power Take-Off (PTO) - 31 Power Take-Off (PTO) drive shaft - 201

Discbine® 313 Discbine® 316

48049004 14/11/2016

31.1 [31.201] / 1

Contents Power Take-Off (PTO) - 31 Power Take-Off (PTO) drive shaft - 201

FUNCTIONAL DATA Power Take-Off (PTO) drive shaft Static description Auto-Lok slide lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Static description - Primary Power Take-Off (PTO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

SERVICE Front half drive shaft Remove . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Disassemble . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Assemble . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Install . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Remove - Guard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Install - Guard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

Yoke assembly Remove - Auto-Lok slide lock collar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Install - Auto-Lok slide lock collar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

Rear drive shaft Remove . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Service instruction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Install . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Service instruction - Guard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

Universal joint Service instruction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

48049004 14/11/2016

31.1 [31.201] / 2

Power Take-Off (PTO) - Power Take-Off (PTO) drive shaft

Power Take-Off (PTO) drive shaft - Static description Auto-Lok slide lock The disc mower-conditioner is equipped with an Auto-Lok slide lock, (1), which automatically latches in the rearward position when pulled back. The primary Power Take-Off shaft may then be held with both hands to guide it onto the tractor shaft; as the yoke slides onto the tractor shaft, the slide lock collar springs forward to latch the PTO shaft to the tractor shaft.

1431-3-18N

1

1431-3-19N

2

The Auto-Lok slide lock works as follows; as the collar is slid rearward, it tends to twist slightly sideways, allowing a shoulder in the collar, (1), to catch on a ridge on the yoke, (2). As the yoke is slid onto the tractor shaft, and the pawls, (3), line up with the groove on the tractor shaft, four balls, (4), in the yoke are pushed outward by the end of the shaft. These four balls center the collar, causing the shoulder to disengage from the ridge, and the collar springs forward to lock the pawls in the tractor PTO shaft groove.

48049004 14/11/2016

31.1 [31.201] / 3

Power Take-Off (PTO) - Power Take-Off (PTO) drive shaft

Power Take-Off (PTO) drive shaft - Static description - Primary Power Take-Off (PTO) The primary Power Take-Off (PTO) shaft uses a pair of Universal joints (U-joints) to transfer power from the tractor to the lower swivel hitch gearbox via the primary PTO shaft (1). The U-joints, one each at the tractor end (2) of the primary PTO shaft and the lower gearbox end (3) of the shaft allow the tractor to turn the driveline during PTO operation.

19985235N

48049004 14/11/2016

31.1 [31.201] / 4

1

Power Take-Off (PTO) - Power Take-Off (PTO) drive shaft

Front half drive shaft - Remove 1. Pull back on the locking collar (1) and detach the Power Take-Off (PTO) shaft assembly from the towing tractor.

97-1539RN

1

NHIL16HT00055AA

2

2. Slide the front Power Take-Off (PTO) shaft (1) off of the rear PTO shaft (2).

48049004 14/11/2016

31.1 [31.201] / 5

Power Take-Off (PTO) - Power Take-Off (PTO) drive shaft

Front half drive shaft - Disassemble 1. Remove the Power Take-Off (PTO) shaft guards (1). See Front half drive shaft - Remove - Guard (31.201).

NHIL16HT00415AA

1

NHIL16HT00417AA

2

NHIL16HT00423AA

3

NHIL16HT00424AA

4

2. If service to the quick-coupler assembly is required: A. Slide the collar (1) toward the yoke (2).

B. Remove the retaining ring (3).

C. Remove the collar and the spring from the yoke.

D. Remove the spline retainers from the yoke.

E. Remove the Universal joint (U-joint) and separate the yokes for service.

3. Remove the grease fittings (1) from the universal joint (3).

4. Remove the inner retaining rings (2) from the U-joint.

5. Position the U-joint on the top of a loose vise and strike the top of the arm of the unsupported yoke to drive the top bearing cup up.

6. Repeat Step 5 on the opposite side.

7. Grip the loosened bearing cup (1) in the vise and strike the yoke arm to drive the yoke off of the bearing cup.

8. Repeat Step 7 on the opposite bearing cup.

48049004 14/11/2016

31.1 [31.201] / 6

Power Take-Off (PTO) - Power Take-Off (PTO) drive shaft

9. Support the U-joint (1) in a loose vise and strike the yoke arm (2) to loosen the bearing caps (3).

10. Repeat Step 4 and Step 5 to remove the bearing caps.

11. After you remove all of the bearing caps, remove the U-joint cross from the yoke.

NHIL16HT00425AA

48049004 14/11/2016

31.1 [31.201] / 7

5

Power Take-Off (PTO) - Power Take-Off (PTO) drive shaft

Front half drive shaft - Assemble NOTICE: Before assembly, make sure that all of the needle bearings (2) inside of the bearing caps are present and vertical. If any of the needle bearings are missing, the shaft will vibrate and the U-joint will prematurely fail.

1. Apply NEW HOLLAND AMBRA HI TEMP EP GREASE to the inside of all of the bearing caps (1).

NHIL16HT00426AA

1

NHIL16HT00428AA

2

NHIL16HT00427AA

3

2. Install the Universal joint (U-joint) cross (1) into the yoke.

3. Install one of the bearing cups (2). Position a spacer that is smaller than the diameter of the bearing cap to drive the bearing cap into the yoke.

4. When the bearing cap is fully seated into the yoke, install the inner retaining ring (3).

5. Install the opposite bearing cap (4) into the yoke. Center the cross to the bearing cap to keep from knocking the needle bearings over inside of the bearing cap.

• Use a spacer to fully press the bearing cap into the yoke.

6. When the opposite bearing cap is fully seated in the yoke, install the inner retaining ring (5).

7. To loosen the U-joint, strike the yoke arm (1) and check for free rotation in the bearing caps.

48049004 14/11/2016

31.1 [31.201] / 8

Power Take-Off (PTO) - Power Take-Off (PTO) drive shaft

8. Position the second yoke on the U-joint (1) and repeat Step 3 through Step 7 to install the bearing caps (2) and (3).

9. Install the 1/4–28 inch grease fittings into the bearing caps and grease the U-joint per the maintenance schedule for the machine.

NHIL16HT00429AA

4

NHIL16HT00417AA

5

NHIL16HT00415AA

6

10. If you removed the quick-coupler assembly: A. Install the spline retainers into the yoke.

B. Install the spring and the collar onto the yoke.

C. Slide the collar (1) toward the yoke (2).

D. Install the retaining ring (3).

11. Install the Power Take-Off (PTO) shaft guards (1). See Front half drive shaft - Install - Guard (31.201).

48049004 14/11/2016

31.1 [31.201] / 9

Power Take-Off (PTO) - Power Take-Off (PTO) drive shaft

Front half drive shaft - Install 1. Apply NEW HOLLAND AMBRA HI TEMP EP GREASE to the splines of the front Power Take-Off (PTO).

2. Align the marked splines of the front PTO shaft with the wide spline (1) on the rear PTO shaft.

NHIL16HT00400AA

1

NHIL16HT00398AA

2

3. Slide the front PTO shaft (1) into the rear PTO shaft (2).

48049004 14/11/2016

31.1 [31.201] / 10

Power Take-Off (PTO) - Power Take-Off (PTO) drive shaft

Front half drive shaft - Remove - Guard 1. Remove the front Power Take-Off (PTO) shaft from the machine. See Front half drive shaft - Remove (31.201).

2. Use a screwdriver to release the Easy Lock clip (1).

3. Turn the guard counterclockwise to disengage the nylon bearing (2).

4. Slide the guard off of the front PTO shaft.

NHIL16HT00397AA

1

NHIL16HT00401AA

2

5. If necessary for replacement, remove the nylon bearing (1) from the groove on the yoke.

6. Clean all of the dirt and grease from the groove.

48049004 14/11/2016

31.1 [31.201] / 11

Power Take-Off (PTO) - Power Take-Off (PTO) drive shaft

Front half drive shaft - Install - Guard 1. Apply NEW HOLLAND AMBRA HI TEMP EP GREASE to the nylon bearing (1) and groove (2) on the yoke.

NHIL16HT00402AA

1

NHIL16HT00403AA

2

NHIL16HT00404AA

3

NHIL16HT00405AA

4

2. Install the nylon bearing (1) into the groove on the yoke, as shown.

3. Slide the guard (1) onto the front Power Take-Off (PTO) shaft (2).

• Make sure that you align the four holes (3) in the guard with the four tabs (4) on the nylon bearing.

4. Rotate the nylon bearing until the tabs (1) engage the guard (2).

48049004 14/11/2016

31.1 [31.201] / 12

Power Take-Off (PTO) - Power Take-Off (PTO) drive shaft

5. Push the Easy Lock clip (1) into position to secure the guard.

6. Check for proper guard operation.

• You must make sure that the guard rotates freely on the yoke.

NHIL16HT00397AA

48049004 14/11/2016

31.1 [31.201] / 13

5

Power Take-Off (PTO) - Power Take-Off (PTO) drive shaft

Yoke assembly - Remove - Auto-Lok slide lock collar 1. Pull the Auto-Lok slide lock collar rearward until it latches in place. Use a screwdriver or spring pick to remove the retaining ring (1) from the end of the yoke.

1431-3-18N

1

1431-3-19N

2

1431-3-20N

3

2. Slide the collar (1) off the yoke and remove the spring (2) from the yoke barrel.

NOTE: The spring is an interference fit, and will have to be worked off the yoke barrel.

3. Remove the pawls (3) by reaching into the yoke bore and pushing the pawls outwards, so that they can be grabbed and removed. Remove the four centering balls (4) from the yoke using the same process.

4. Thoroughly clean all slide lock components. Clean the yoke bore and pawl holes. Replace the yoke if damage or excessive wear is found.

48049004 14/11/2016

31.1 [31.201] / 14

Power Take-Off (PTO) - Power Take-Off (PTO) drive shaft

Yoke assembly - Install - Auto-Lok slide lock collar 1. Coat the outer surface of the yoke barrel (1) with NEW HOLLAND AMBRA HI TEMP EP GREASE. 2. Push the grease into the centering ball bores and the pawl holes in the yoke.

3. Apply grease to the four centering balls (2) and insert them into their bores; the grease will hold them in place.

4. Apply grease to the sides of the pawls (3) and insert them into the square holes, positioning them so that the lip of the pawl faces into the groove in the yoke barrel.

NOTE: The pawls must slide freely up and down, and must be flush with the top of the yoke barrel.

1431-3-19N

1

1431-3-18N

2

5. Push a new spring over the yoke barrel up to the shoulder.

NOTE: One end of the spring has a smaller diameter than the other. Be sure the small diameter of spring is up against the shoulder on the yoke barrel.

6. Fill the inside of the collar cavity with grease.

7. Slide the collar (1) over the yoke barrel, ensuring the large diameter end of the spring stays inside the collar against the front lip.

8. Pull the collar rearward past the retaining ring groove until it latches in place.

9. Install the retaining ring (2) in the groove.

10. Grab the collar and manually center it on the yoke so that it springs forward; the collar must slide freely and the pawls must move up and down after assembly.

48049004 14/11/2016

31.1 [31.201] / 15

Power Take-Off (PTO) - Power Take-Off (PTO) drive shaft

Rear drive shaft - Remove The primary Power Take-Off (PTO) shaft (1) may be serviced by sliding it off of the input shaft of the swivel hitch gearbox (3).

Remove the rear half of the primary PTO shaft as follows: 1. Remove the rear shield; squeeze the shield (2) and slide it forward on the PTO shaft.

2. Pull back on the collar and slide the primary PTO shaft off of the input shaft of the swivel hitch gearbox.

NHIL13HT00494AA

1

NHIL16HT00398AA

2

3. Slide the rear splined PTO shaft tube (1) off of the front splined PTO shaft (2).

48049004 14/11/2016

31.1 [31.201] / 16

Power Take-Off (PTO) - Power Take-Off (PTO) drive shaft

Rear drive shaft - Service instruction The rear half of the Power Take-Off (PTO) shaft is the same style as the front half of the PTO shaft. Both of the shaft assemblies use a single universal joint and quick-coupler collar to engage the yoke on the connecting shaft.

For service information, see the following areas: • Front half drive shaft - Disassemble (31.201) • Front half drive shaft - Assemble (31.201)

48049004 14/11/2016

31.1 [31.201] / 17

Power Take-Off (PTO) - Power Take-Off (PTO) drive shaft

Rear drive shaft - Install 1. Slide the front splined PTO shaft (2) into the rear splined PTO shaft tube (2).

NHIL16HT00398AA

1

NHIL13HT00494AA

2

2. Slide the front shield over the primary Power Take-off (PTO) shaft.

3. Pull back on the collar and slide the primary PTO shaft (2) onto the input shaft of the swivel hitch gearbox. The Auto-Lok slide lock collar should snap into place.

4. Install the front shield (1) over the PTO shaft.

48049004 14/11/2016

31.1 [31.201] / 18

Power Take-Off (PTO) - Power Take-Off (PTO) drive shaft

Rear drive shaft - Service instruction - Guard The rear Power Take-Off (PTO) shaft guard is the same style as the front PTO shaft guard. Both of the guards use the Easy Lock clip securing system and a nylon bearing.

For service information, see the following areas: • Front half drive shaft - Remove - Guard (31.201) • Front half drive shaft - Install - Guard (31.201)

48049004 14/11/2016

31.1 [31.201] / 19

Power Take-Off (PTO) - Power Take-Off (PTO) drive shaft

Universal joint - Service instruction As the procedure is the same, service of the Power Take-Off (PTO) for front half drive shaft and the rear drive shaft universal joints in the primary shaft is covered in the disassemble and assemble procedures listed as follows.

NOTE: Replacement of the universal joint requires the disassembly of the drive shaft.

See the following areas for the proper service procedure: • Front half drive shaft - Disassemble (31.201) • Front half drive shaft - Assemble (31.201)

48049004 14/11/2016

31.1 [31.201] / 20

Index Power Take-Off (PTO) - 31 Power Take-Off (PTO) drive shaft - 201 Front half drive shaft - Assemble . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8

Front half drive shaft - Disassemble . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6

Front half drive shaft - Install . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10

Front half drive shaft - Install - Guard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

12

Front half drive shaft - Remove . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5

Front half drive shaft - Remove - Guard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11

Power Take-Off (PTO) drive shaft - Static description Auto-Lok slide lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3

Power Take-Off (PTO) drive shaft - Static description - Primary Power Take-Off (PTO) . . . . . . . . . .

4

Rear drive shaft - Install . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

18

Rear drive shaft - Remove . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

16

Rear drive shaft - Service instruction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

17

Rear drive shaft - Service instruction - Guard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

19

Universal joint - Service instruction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

20

Yoke assembly - Install - Auto-Lok slide lock collar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

15

Yoke assembly - Remove - Auto-Lok slide lock collar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

14

48049004 14/11/2016

31.1 [31.201] / 21

48049004 14/11/2016

31.1 [31.201] / 22

Power Take-Off (PTO) - 31 Secondary Power Take-Off (PTO) - 214

Discbine® 313 Discbine® 316

48049004 14/11/2016

31.2 [31.214] / 1

Contents Power Take-Off (PTO) - 31 Secondary Power Take-Off (PTO) - 214

FUNCTIONAL DATA Secondary Power Take-Off (PTO) Static description - Secondary Power Take-Off (PTO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

SERVICE Drive shaft Remove - Front telescoping drive shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Install - Front telescoping drive shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Remove - Rear non-telescoping drive shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Install - Rear non-telescoping drive shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

48049004 14/11/2016

31.2 [31.214] / 2

Power Take-Off (PTO) - Secondary Power Take-Off (PTO)

Secondary Power Take-Off (PTO) - Static description - Secondary Power Take-Off (PTO) The secondary Power Take-Off (PTO) is comprised of a front section (1), a middle section (2), and a rear section (3).

The secondary PTO runs from the front upper-half swivel gearbox (4) to the rear upper-half reversing swivel gearbox (5).

NHVM14HT00041AA

48049004 14/11/2016

31.2 [31.214] / 3

1

Power Take-Off (PTO) - Secondary Power Take-Off (PTO)

Drive shaft - Remove - Front telescoping drive shaft 1. Squeeze the trumpet shield (2) at the front of the tongue and slide it over the mounting pins (1).

2. Slide the trumpet shield rearward over the secondary Power Take-Off (PTO) shaft.

NHVM14HT00342AA

1

NHVM14HT00343AA

2

NHIL16HT00444AA

3

NHIL16HT00443AA

4

3. Loosen and remove the two clamp bolts (1) and locknuts that secure the slip clutch yoke to the swivel hitch gearbox output shaft.

4. Squeeze the trumpet shield (2) at the rear of the telescoping drive shaft and slide it over the mounting pins (1).

5. Loosen and remove the clamp bolt (1) and locknut that secures the rear yoke of the telescoping drive shaft.

6. Pull the two telescoping halves of the secondary PTO shaft together. Slide the front yoke off of the gearbox output shaft and slide the rear yoke off of the non-telescoping splined shaft.

48049004 14/11/2016

31.2 [31.214] / 4

Power Take-Off (PTO) - Secondary Power Take-Off (PTO)

Drive shaft - Install - Front telescoping drive shaft 1. Slide each trumpet shield over the yokes on the front telescoping drive shaft.

2. Install the front telescoping drive shaft onto the machine; slide the front yoke onto the gearbox output shaft and slide the rear yoke onto the non-telescoping splined shaft.

3. Secure the front yoke with the two clamp bolts (1) and locknuts.

4. Torque the locknuts to 163 N·m (120 lb ft).

NHVM14HT00343AA

1

NHIL16HT00443AA

2

NHIL16HT00444AA

3

5. Secure the rear yoke with the clamp bolt (1) and locknuts.

6. Torque the locknut to 163 N·m (120 lb ft).

7. Squeeze the sides of the rear trumpet shield (2) and slide the shield back into position on the mounting pins (1).

48049004 14/11/2016

31.2 [31.214] / 5

Power Take-Off (PTO) - Secondary Power Take-Off (PTO)

8. Squeeze the sides of the front trumpet shield (2) and slide the shield back into position on the mounting pins (1).

NHVM14HT00342AA

48049004 14/11/2016

31.2 [31.214] / 6

4

Power Take-Off (PTO) - Secondary Power Take-Off (PTO)

Drive shaft - Remove - Rear non-telescoping drive shaft 1. Disconnect the front telescoping driveshaft from the splined shaft of the rear non-telescoping drive shaft. ○ See Drive shaft - Remove - Front telescoping drive shaft (31.214).

2. Squeeze the trumpet shield (2) at the rear of the nontelescoping drive shaft and slide it over the mounting pins (1).

NHIL16HT00445AA

1

NHIL16HT00446AA

2

NHIL16HT00447AA

3

3. Remove and retain the hub (1) and three sets of washers (2), (3), and (4).

4. Loosen the set screw (1) on the bearing.

5. Pull the bearing forward on the splined shaft until it clears the tongue bracket (2).

6. With the weight of the non-telescoping drive shaft supported, remove the 1/2 x 1-1/4 inch carriage bolts (3) and flange nuts that secure the bearing flangettes to the tongue.

• Retain the bracket (4) for installation.

7. Slide the rear yoke of the non-telescoping drive shaft off of the splined shaft and drop the non-telescoping drive shaft down through the slot in the tongue bracket.

48049004 14/11/2016

31.2 [31.214] / 7

Power Take-Off (PTO) - Secondary Power Take-Off (PTO)

Drive shaft - Install - Rear non-telescoping drive shaft 1. Install the trumpet shield on the removed drive shaft and slide the rear yoke of the non-telescoping drive shaft onto the splined shaft.

2. Install the shield (1) over the splined end of the nontelescoping drive shaft.

3. Pivot the other end of the non-telescoping drive shaft up and through the slot (A).

4. Install the bearing-flangette set (2) and secure with a 1/2 x 1-1/4 inch carriage bolt (3) and flange nut (4) at the top hole.

NHIL16HT00448AA

1

NHIL16HT00447AA

2

NHIL16HT00446AA

3

NHIL16HT00445AA

4

5. position the bracket (1) as shown at the bottom hole and install the remainder of the 1/2 x 1-1/4 inch carriage bolts (2) and flange nuts.

6. Securely tighten the flange nuts.

7. Torque the set screw (3) on the bearing to 17.5 N·m (155 lb in).

8. Install the previously removed three sets of washers (2), (3), and (4) and the hub (1).

9. Connect the front telescoping driveshaft from the splined shaft of the rear non-telescoping drive shaft.

• See Drive shaft - Install - Front telescoping drive shaft (31.214).

10. Squeeze the trumpet shield (2) at the rear of the nontelescoping drive shaft and slide the shield over the mounting pins (1).

48049004 14/11/2016

31.2 [31.214] / 8

Index Power Take-Off (PTO) - 31 Secondary Power Take-Off (PTO) - 214 Drive shaft - Install - Front telescoping drive shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5

Drive shaft - Install - Rear non-telescoping drive shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8

Drive shaft - Remove - Front telescoping drive shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4

Drive shaft - Remove - Rear non-telescoping drive shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7

Secondary Power Take-Off (PTO) - Static description - Secondary Power Take-Off (PTO) . . . . . . .

3

48049004 14/11/2016

31.2 [31.214] / 9

48049004 14/11/2016

31.2 [31.214] / 10

Power Take-Off (PTO) - 31 Intermediate Power Take-Off (PTO) - 215

Discbine® 313 Discbine® 316

48049004 14/11/2016

31.3 [31.215] / 1

Contents Power Take-Off (PTO) - 31 Intermediate Power Take-Off (PTO) - 215

FUNCTIONAL DATA Intermediate Power Take-Off (PTO) Static description - Cross-header Power Take-Off (PTO) drive shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

SERVICE Drive shaft Remove - Header cross drive Power Take-Off (PTO) shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Install - Header cross drive Power Take-Off (PTO) shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

48049004 14/11/2016

31.3 [31.215] / 2

Power Take-Off (PTO) - Intermediate Power Take-Off (PTO)

Intermediate Power Take-Off (PTO) - Static description Cross-header Power Take-Off (PTO) drive shaft The cross-header Power Take-Off (PTO) drive shaft (1) runs from the lower-half reversing swivel gearbox (3) at the base of the tongue to the fixed header drive gearbox (2) on the left-hand side of the machine.

The cross-header PTO drive shaft has universal joints at both ends.

NHVM14HT00039AA

48049004 14/11/2016

31.3 [31.215] / 3

1

Power Take-Off (PTO) - Intermediate Power Take-Off (PTO)

Drive shaft - Remove - Header cross drive Power Take-Off (PTO) shaft 1. Detach the trumpet shield (1) from the lower-half reversing swivel gearbox. Squeeze the sides of the trumpet shield and slide it off of the mounting pins.

2. Detach the trumpet shield (2) from the bevel gearbox.

3. Remove the yoke from each gearbox shaft. Follow the instructions based on the type of drive shaft that is on the machine.

NHIL13HT00500AA

1

NHIL16HT00432AA

2

For machines that use the Bondioli and Pavesi drive shaft: A. Loosen the locknut (1) that clamps the yoke to the gearbox shaft until it is flush with the end of the tapered pin.

B. Strike the locknut to loosen the tapered pin (1).

C. Remove the locknut and the flat washer, and then remove the tapered pin.

D. Pull the yoke off of the gearbox shaft.

For machines that use the Weasler drive shaft: A. Loosen and remove the locknut , washer, and bolt that clamps the yoke to the gearbox shaft.

B. Pull the yoke off of the gearbox shaft.

4. Remove the header cross drive Power Take-Off (PTO) shaft from the machine.

48049004 14/11/2016

31.3 [31.215] / 4

Power Take-Off (PTO) - Intermediate Power Take-Off (PTO)

Drive shaft - Install - Header cross drive Power Take-Off (PTO) shaft 1. Slide the trump shields for both ends over the yokes and onto the drive shaft.

2. Install the yoke onto each gearbox shaft. Follow the instructions based on the type of drive shaft that is on the machine.

NHIL16HT00432AA

1

For machines that use the Bondioli and Pavesi drive shaft: A. Slide the yoke onto the splined gearbox shaft so that the pin through hole aligns with the groove in the splined gearbox shaft.

B. Install the tapered pin so that the cut grove in the pin aligns with the gearbox shaft.

C. Install the flat washer and the locknut (1) to clamp the yoke to the gearbox shaft.

D. Torque the locknut to 150 N·m (110.6 lb ft).

E. Strike the locknut with a hammer, and then torque the locknut to 150 N·m (110.6 lb ft) again. Repeat this sequence until the torque stabilizes.

For machines that use the Weasler drive shaft: A. Slide the yoke onto the splined gearbox shaft so that the bolt through hole aligns with the groove in the splined gearbox shaft.

B. Install the bolt through the yoke.

C. Install the flat washer and the locknut (1) to clamp the yoke to the gearbox shaft.

D. Torque the locknut to 163 N·m (120 lb ft).

E. Strike the locknut with a hammer, and then torque the locknut to 163 N·m (120 lb ft) again. Repeat this sequence until the torque stabilizes.

3. Attach the trumpet shield (1) to the lower-half reversing swivel gearbox. Squeeze the sides of the trumpet shield and slide it back into position on the mounting pins.

4. Attach the trumpet shield (2) to the bevel gearbox.

NHIL13HT00500AA

48049004 14/11/2016

31.3 [31.215] / 5

2

Index Power Take-Off (PTO) - 31 Intermediate Power Take-Off (PTO) - 215 Drive shaft - Install - Header cross drive Power Take-Off (PTO) shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5

Drive shaft - Remove - Header cross drive Power Take-Off (PTO) shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4

Intermediate Power Take-Off (PTO) - Static description - Cross-header Power Take-Off (PTO) drive shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3

48049004 14/11/2016

31.3 [31.215] / 6

Power Take-Off (PTO) - 31 Gearbox - 220

Discbine® 313 Discbine® 316

48049004 14/11/2016

31.4 [31.220] / 1

Contents Power Take-Off (PTO) - 31 Gearbox - 220

TECHNICAL DATA Gearbox Special tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Special tools - Swivel neck tools - Rolling torque tool (locally manufacture) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Special tools - Swivel neck tools - Neck locknut tool (locally manufacture) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Special tools - Swivel neck tools - Neck assembly plate (locally manufacture) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Shimming - Gear tooth contact pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

FUNCTIONAL DATA Gearbox Overview - Swivel hitch gearboxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Overview - Reversing swivel gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Exploded view - Swivel gearboxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Exploded view - Swivel gearbox neck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

SERVICE Gearbox Change fluid - Swivel hitch gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Change fluid - Reversing swivel gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Remove - Swivel hitch gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Install - Swivel hitch gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Remove - Reversing swivel gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Install - Reversing swivel gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Disassemble - Swivel hitch or reversing swivel gearboxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Disassemble - Neck assembly - Swivel hitch or reversing swivel gearboxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Assemble - Neck assembly - Swivel hitch or reversing swivel gearboxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Disassemble - Upper gearbox - Swivel hitch or reversing swivel gearboxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Assemble - Upper gearbox - Swivel hitch or reversing swivel gearboxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Disassemble - Lower gearbox - Swivel hitch or reversing swivel gearboxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Assemble - Lower gearbox - Swivel hitch or reversing swivel gearboxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Assemble - Swivel hitch gearboxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

48049004 14/11/2016

31.4 [31.220] / 2

Power Take-Off (PTO) - Gearbox

Gearbox - Special tools NH01386 – A set of two tools used for removal and assembly of the neck assembly to the upper and lower gearboxes.

• NH01386-1 – A low profile hex wrench • NH01386-2 – An extension hex wrench NOTE: The special tools may be available as a set or individually. If the special tool NH01386-2 is not available, you can use special tool NH01386-1.

Gearbox - Special tools - Swivel neck tools - Rolling torque tool (locally manufacture) The special tool described below must be locally manufactured and is required for the assembly of the swivel gearboxes.

Use the rolling torque tool to check the rolling torque of the bearings in the neck assembly.

NHIL16HT00829FA

1

Tool required to check the rolling torque of the neck assembly (A) (B) (C) (D)

50.8 mm (2 in) diameter 225 mm (8.86 in) 112.5 mm (4.43 in) 90 mm (3.54 in)

(E) 25.4 mm (1 in) (F) Hole – 10.3 mm (13/32 in) (G) 4.8 mm (3/16 in) material thickness

Special tool – Materials • Plate (1) – Mild plate steel – 4.8 mm (3/16 in) thickness ○ Cut a section of steel 225 mm (8.86 in) x 50.8 mm (2 in).

• One 3/8 inch non-plated steel locknut • Two 3/8 x 2-3/8 inch hex head bolts (3) • Two 3/8 inchnuts (4)

Special tool – Fabrication 1. Drill two 10.3 mm (13/32 in) diameter holes (F) at the indicated locations.

48049004 14/11/2016

31.4 [31.220] / 3

Power Take-Off (PTO) - Gearbox

2. Weld the 3/8 inch non-plated steel locknut at the location indicated.

3. Install 3/8 x 2-3/8 inch bolts through the drilled holes. ○ At installation for the check of rolling torque, the bolts extend through the mounting holes of the flange on the neck assembly.

4. Secure each bolt with a 3/8 inch nut. ○ At installation for the check of rolling torque, the nuts space the tool plate off of the neck flange and prevent part interference.

Gearbox - Special tools - Swivel neck tools - Neck locknut tool (locally manufacture) The special tool described below must be locally manufactured and is required for the disassembly and assembly of the swivel gearboxes.

Use the neck locknut tool for removal and installation of the locknut that secures the inner neck assembly in the outer neck.

NHIL16HT00521FA

1

Required tool to tighten the locknut on the swivel gearbox neck (A) 165.1 mm (6-1/2 in) (B) 145.3 mm (5-23/32 in) (C) 82.6 mm (3-1/4 in) (D) 19.8 mm (25/32 in) (E) 9.5 mm (3/8 in) square hole, four places

(F) 19.4 mm (0.765 in) square hole (G) 6.4 mm (1/4 in) material thickness (H) 12.7 mm (1/2 in) material thickness (J) 15.9 mm (5/8 in)

Special tool – Materials • Large plate (1) – Mild plate steel – 6.4 mm (1/4 in) thickness ○ Cut a 165.1 mm (6-1/2 in) square ○ Cut four 9.5 mm (0.375 in) square holes at the indicated locations. ○ Cut one 19.4 mm (0.765 in) square hole in the center.

NOTE: You can drill the holes for the square holes, and then finish cut or file the holes to the specified square hole size.

• Small plate (2) – Mild plate steel: 48049004 14/11/2016

31.4 [31.220] / 4

Power Take-Off (PTO) - Gearbox

○ Cut a 57.2 mm (2-1/4 in) square out of 12.7 mm (0.5 in) flat mild steel. ○ Cut a 19.4 mm (0.765 in) square hole in the center to accept a 3/4 inch torque wrench drive.

• Key stock (3): ○ Cut four pieces of 9.5 mm (3/8 in) key stock each to a length of approximately 25.4 mm (1 in).

48049004 14/11/2016

31.4 [31.220] / 5

Power Take-Off (PTO) - Gearbox

Special tool – Fabrication 1. Install the four pieces of key stock (3) into the four 9.5 mm (3/8 in) square holes in the large plate (1).

Each length of key stock should extend equally, a distance (J) of approximately 15.9 mm (5/8 in) from the bottom of the large plate.

NHIL16HT00518AA

2

NHIL16HT00517AA

3

2. Weld the top of each piece of key stock (3) to the large plate (1).

3. Center the small plate (2) on the large plate (1).

4. Align the square center hole, and then weld the plates together.

Gearbox - Special tools - Swivel neck tools - Neck assembly plate (locally manufacture) The special tool described below must be locally manufactured and is required for the disassembly and assembly of the swivel gearboxes.

Use the neck assembly plate as clamping surface to which you securely bolt the outer neck assembly for removal and installation of the locknut that secures the inner neck assembly.

48049004 14/11/2016

31.4 [31.220] / 6

Power Take-Off (PTO) - Gearbox

NHIL16HT00522FA

1

Required tool to hold the swivel gearbox neck assembly to loosen and tighten the locknut (A) 406.4 mm (16 in) (B) 277.6 mm (10.9 in) (C) 203.2 mm (8 in) (D) 128.8 mm (5.1 in) (E) 66.6 mm (2.6 in)

(F) 195.6 mm (7.7 in) (G) 304.8 mm (12 in) (H) 10.3 mm (13/32 in) diameter (J) Material – Mild plate steel – 6.4 mm (1/4 in) thickness

Special tool – Materials • Plate (1) – Mild plate steel – 6.4 mm (1/4 in) thickness ○ Cut a section of the steel material to 304.8 mm (12 in) x 406.4 mm (16 in).

Special tool – Fabrication • Plate (1): ○ Drill three 10.3 mm (13/32 in) diameter holes at the indicated locations.

Gearbox - Shimming - Gear tooth contact pattern Identify the following locations on each tooth of the gear, and use them as a reference when interpreting gear tooth contact patterns: • (1) – Top • (2) – Toe • (3) – Heel • (4) – Root

NHIL13RB00993AA

1

To check the gear contact pattern: 1. First, set the bearing pre-load as specified, and then check the backlash before you check the gear contact pattern.

48049004 14/11/2016

31.4 [31.220] / 7

Power Take-Off (PTO) - Gearbox

2. Apply PERMATEX ® NON-DRYING PRUSSIAN BLUE gear marking compound to five or six gear teeth on the bevel gear.

3. Rotate the gear shaft several times.

4. Visually inspect the impression of the marking compound on the inter-meshing gears. ○ The contact pattern should be centered on the tooth. ○ There should be clearance between the contact pattern and the top of the tooth.

5. When you achieve the proper contact pattern, wipe the gears clean of the marking compound.

See the table below for contact pattern troubleshooting.

NOTE: If you add or remove shims on the pinion shaft, you must again set the backlash to within the specifications before you observe the correct contact pattern.

Drive contact pattern

Contact condition

Coast contact pattern

The contact is pattern centered on tooth

Condition

Action

The contact is pattern No action is required. centered on tooth

Top toe

Add shims to the pinion to increase the position toward bevel gear.

Root toe

Root heel

Remove shims from the pinion to decrease the position toward bevel gear.

Top heel

Top heel

Decrease backlash.

Root toe

Root toe

Increase backlash.

Top heel

48049004 14/11/2016

31.4 [31.220] / 8

Power Take-Off (PTO) - Gearbox

Gearbox - Overview - Swivel hitch gearboxes

NHVM14HT00044AA

1

Upper-half and lower-half swivel hitch gearbox – Exploded view The swivel hitch gearbox (1) allows a smaller angle between the tractor and the mower-conditioner without damaging either the tractor Power Take-Off (PTO) or the mower-conditioner PTO shaft.

The lower gearbox directs the torque from the tractor PTO, through the swivel neck gear, into the upper gearbox, to the disc mower-conditioner secondary PTO shafts, and the pivot tongue gearbox. The upper and lower gearboxes are nearly identical. The swivel hitch gearbox assembly uses four beveled gears that are interchangeable. The use of a six-spline shaft couples the lower PTO input gearbox to the tractor The upper PTO output gearbox contains a twenty-one spline shaft that drives the secondary PTO shafts that connect to the reversing swivel gearbox, which in-turn drives the header bevel gearbox.

The inner neck casing is held to the outer neck casing by the use of a center-joint locknut. Motion between the two gearboxes occurs when the tractor initiates a turn. Installed bearings in the neck permit unrestricted horizontal movement between the upper and lower gearboxes. The neck shaft rotates within the assembly maintaining a constant PTO speed without regard to the direction each gearbox is facing. An installed O-ring between the inner and outer neck casings prevents leakage from the swivel hitch gearbox at the point of relative motion.

A set of two installed oil seals installed on the neck shaft help to maintain a visible oil level in the lower gearbox. Oil leaking out the lower gearbox breather is a possible indication of worn oil seals on the neck shaft, and you should investigate the reason for the leakage to prevent damage to the gearbox and neck assemblies.

48049004 14/11/2016

31.4 [31.220] / 9

Power Take-Off (PTO) - Gearbox

Gearbox - Overview - Reversing swivel gearbox

NHIL13HT00508AA

1

The reversing swivel gearbox (1) assembly transfers torque from the secondary Power Take-Off (PTO) shaft (2) to the intermediate cross-header PTO drive shaft (3).

The reversing swivel gearboxes are identical to the swivel hitch gearboxes at the front of the tongue except in the configuration of their gear sets. The bevel gear in the upper gearbox of the reversing swivel gearbox assembly is assembled on the opposite end of the shaft, which reverses the output drive direction, and the upper input shaft does not have a groove.

48049004 14/11/2016

31.4 [31.220] / 10

Power Take-Off (PTO) - Gearbox

Gearbox - Exploded view - Swivel gearboxes

NHIL16HT00879FA

1

Swivel gearboxes – Exploded view Shaft component orientation: (A) – Reversing swivel gearbox (B) – Swivel hitch gearbox (1) – Drain plug, 3/8 inch NPT (2) – Oil level check plug, 3/8 inch NPT (3) – Plug, 3/8 inch NPT (4) – Gear (5) – Upper gearbox housing (6) – Bearing cup (7) – Shim (8) – Bearing cone (9) – Key (10) – Shaft (11) – Bearing cone (12) – Bearing cup (13) – Shim (14) – Gasket (15) – Cap (16) – Bolt, M10 x 22 (17) – Cover (18) – Screw, hex socket, M10 x 25 (19) – Breather / fill plug, 3/8 inch NPT (20) – Oil level check plug, 3/8 inch NPT

(21) – Cap (22) – Plug, 3/8 inch NPT (23) – Drain plug, 3/8 inch NPT (24) – Lower gearbox housing (25) – Bearing cup (26) – Bearing cone (27) – Shim (28) – Shaft (29) – Bolt, M10 x 22 (30) – Key (31) – Bearing cone (32) – Shim (33) – Neck assembly – See Gearbox - Exploded view - Swivel gearbox neck (31.220).

(34) – Cap (35) – Gear (36) – Bearing cup (37) – Cover (38) – Cap (39) – Breather / fill plug, 3/8 inch NPT

48049004 14/11/2016

31.4 [31.220] / 11

Power Take-Off (PTO) - Gearbox

Gearbox - Exploded view - Swivel gearbox neck

NHIL16HT00878FA

1

Swivel gearbox neck – Exploded view (1) – Bearing cup (2) – Oil seal (3) – Outer neck (4) – Bearing cup (5) – Locknut (6) – Bearing cone (7) – Bearing cone (8) – Shim (9) – O-ring (10) – Inner neck (11) – Bearing cup (12) – Oil seal

(13) (14) (15) (16) (17) (18) (19) (20) (21) (22) (23) (24)

– – – – – – – – – – – –

Oil seal Bearing cup Shaft Key Gear Shim Bearing cone Bearing cone Shim Gear Castellated nut Cotter pin

48049004 14/11/2016

31.4 [31.220] / 12

Power Take-Off (PTO) - Gearbox

Gearbox - Change fluid - Swivel hitch gearbox Overview • The swivel gearbox assembly at the front of the tongue consists of an upper gearbox and a lower gearbox that are connected together.

NOTICE: You must separately change the oil in both the upper half and the lower half of the swivel gearbox assembly after the first 50 hours of operation, and then every 300 hours of operation or yearly thereafter.

NOTICE: Immediately prior to draining the oil from both gearboxes, run the machine so that the operation of the gearboxes will help to suspend any particulates or metal fines in the oil so that they will drain out with oil as opposed to settling at the base of each gearbox.

• Drain the oil from both the upper and the lower swivel hitch gearboxes as soon as possible after running the machine, rather than full servicing each gearbox individually.

• Fill the both the upper half and lower half of the gearbox assembly as specified with fresh TUTELA HYPOIDE EP GEAR LUBE SAE 80W-90 gear oil or CNH HYPOIDE SSL SYNTHETIC GEAR LUBE 75W-90 (synthetic).

Upper swivel hitch gearbox 1. Position a pan underneath the upper swivel hitch gearbox to drain the oil into.

2. Remove the oil drain plug (2) from the upper swivel hitch gearbox.

3. Remove the combination breather and oil fill plug (1) from the top of the upper swivel hitch gearbox.

4. Allow the oil to completely drain from the upper swivel hitch gearbox.

5. Clean the threads of the oil drain plug.

19985234N

1

6.

Apply LOCTITE® SI 598™ BLACK sealant to the threads of the oil drain plug.

7.

Install the oil drain plug (2) in the oil drain plug hole and tighten drain plug securely.

8.

Remove the oil level check plug (3) from the oil level check plug hole.

9.

Use a funnel to fill the upper reversing swivel gearbox with fresh oil via the oil fill hole until the oil level reaches the oil level check plug hole.

NOTE: The upper swivel hitch gearbox has a total capacity of approximately 1200 mL (41 US fl oz).

10. Apply LOCTITE® SI 598™ BLACK sealant to the threads of the oil level check plug.

11. Install the oil level check plug (3) in the oil level check plug hole and tighten the check plug securely.

12. Apply LOCTITE® SI 598™ BLACK sealant to the threads of the combination breather and oil fill plug.

13. Install the combination breather and oil fill plug (1) into the oil fill hole at the top of the upper of the swivel gearbox, and then tighten the fill plug securely.

48049004 14/11/2016

31.4 [31.220] / 13

Power Take-Off (PTO) - Gearbox

Lower swivel hitch gearbox 1. Position a pan underneath the lower swivel hitch gearbox to drain the oil into.

2. Remove the oil drain plug (1) from the lower swivel hitch gearbox.

3. Remove the combination breather and oil fill plug (2) from the top of the lower swivel hitch gearbox.

4. Allow the oil to completely drain from the lower swivel hitch gearbox.

5. Clean the threads of the oil drain plug.

6. Apply LOCTITE® SI 598™ BLACK sealant to the threads of the oil drain plug.

97-1550N

7.

Install the oil drain plug (1) in the oil drain plug hole and tighten drain plug securely.

8.

Remove the oil level check plug (3) from the oil level check plug hole.

9.

Use a funnel to fill the lower swivel hitch gearbox with fresh oil via the oil fill hole until the oil level reaches the oil level check plug hole.

NOTE: The upper swivel hitch gearbox has a total capacity of approximately 2200 mL (74 US fl oz).

10. Apply LOCTITE® SI 598™ BLACK sealant to the threads of the oil level check plug.

11. Install the oil level check plug (3) in the oil level check plug hole and tighten the check plug securely.

12. Apply LOCTITE® SI 598™ BLACK sealant to the threads of the combination breather and oil fill plug.

13. Install the combination breather and oil fill plug (2) into the oil fill hole at the top of the lower of the swivel gearbox, and then tighten the fill plug securely.

48049004 14/11/2016

31.4 [31.220] / 14

2

Power Take-Off (PTO) - Gearbox

Gearbox - Change fluid - Reversing swivel gearbox Overview • The reversing swivel gearbox assembly at the rear of the tongue consists of an upper gearbox and a lower gearbox that are connected together.

NOTICE: You must separately change the oil in both the upper half and the lower half of the swivel gearbox assembly after the first 50 hours of operation, and then every 300 hours of operation or yearly thereafter.

NOTICE: Immediately prior to draining the oil from both gearboxes, run the machine so that the operation of the gearboxes will help to suspend any particulates or metal fines in the oil so that they will drain out with oil as opposed to settling at the base of each gearbox.

• Drain the oil from both the upper and the lower reversing swivel gearboxes as soon as possible after running the machine, rather than full servicing each gearbox individually.

• Fill the both the upper half and lower half of the gearbox assembly as specified with fresh TUTELA HYPOIDE EP GEAR LUBE SAE 80W-90 gear oil or CNH HYPOIDE SSL SYNTHETIC GEAR LUBE 75W-90 (synthetic).

Upper reversing swivel gearbox 1. Position a pan underneath the upper reversing swivel gearbox to drain the oil into.

2. Remove the oil drain plug (1) from the bottom of the upper reversing swivel gearbox.

NOTE: You will need to rotate the tongue entirely to the right-hand side in order to access the oil drain plug.

3. Remove the combination breather and oil fill plug (2) from the top of the upper reversing swivel gearbox.

4. Allow the oil to completely drain from the upper reversing swivel gearbox.

5. Clean the threads of the oil drain plug.

NHIL13HT00508AA

1

6.

Apply LOCTITE® SI 598™ BLACK sealant to the threads of the oil drain plug.

7.

Install the oil drain plug (1) in the oil drain plug hole and tighten drain plug securely.

8.

Remove the oil level check plug (3) from the oil level check plug hole.

9.

Use a funnel to fill the upper reversing swivel gearbox with fresh oil via the oil fill hole until the oil level reaches the oil level check plug hole.

NOTE: The upper reversing swivel gearbox has a total capacity of approximately 1200 mL (41 US fl oz).

10. Apply LOCTITE® SI 598™ BLACK sealant to the threads of the oil level check plug.

11. Install the oil level check plug (3) in the oil level check plug hole and tighten the check plug securely.

12. Apply LOCTITE® SI 598™ BLACK sealant to the threads of the combination breather and oil fill plug.

13. Install the combination breather and oil fill plug (2) into the oil fill hole at the top of the upper of the reversing swivel gearbox, and then tighten the fill plug securely.

48049004 14/11/2016

31.4 [31.220] / 15

Power Take-Off (PTO) - Gearbox

Lower reversing swivel gearbox 1. Position a pan underneath the lower reversing swivel gearbox to drain the oil into.

2. Remove the oil drain plug (1) from the bottom of the lower reversing swivel gearbox.

3. Remove the combination breather and oil fill plug (2) from the top of the lower reversing swivel gearbox.

4. Allow the oil to completely drain from the lower reversing swivel gearbox.

5. Clean the threads of the oil drain plug.

6. Apply LOCTITE® SI 598™ BLACK sealant to the threads of the oil drain plug.

NHIL13HT00520AA

2

7.

Install the oil drain plug (1) in the oil drain plug hole and tighten drain plug securely.

8.

Remove the oil level check plug (3) from the oil level check plug hole.

9.

Use a funnel to fill the upper reversing swivel gearbox with fresh oil via the oil fill hole until the oil level reaches the oil level check plug hole.

NOTE: The lower reversing swivel gearbox has a total capacity of approximately 2200 mL (74 US fl oz).

10. Apply LOCTITE® SI 598™ BLACK sealant to the threads of the oil level check plug.

11. Install the oil level check plug (3) in the oil level check plug hole and tighten the check plug securely.

12. Apply LOCTITE® SI 598™ BLACK sealant to the threads of the combination breather and oil fill plug.

13. Install the combination breather and oil fill plug (2) into the oil fill hole at the top of the lower of the reversing swivel gearbox, and then tighten the fill plug securely.

48049004 14/11/2016

31.4 [31.220] / 16

Power Take-Off (PTO) - Gearbox

Gearbox - Remove - Swivel hitch gearbox NOTE: If you are removing the swivel gearbox assembly for disassembly to service internal components, be advised that you will require special tools. Three of the tools must be locally manufactured and are listed below: Neck locknut tool – See Gearbox - Special tools - Swivel neck tools - Neck locknut tool (locally manufacture) (31.220).

Neck assembly plate – See Gearbox - Special tools - Swivel neck tools - Neck assembly plate (locally manufacture) (31.220).

Rolling torque tool – See Gearbox - Special tools - Swivel neck tools - Rolling torque tool (locally manufacture) (31.220).

NOTICE: The installed swivel hitch gearbox assembly on the tongue and the drawbar use specialized lock bolts. The lock bolts are a one time use bolt that have a special chemical coating patch on the threads and must not be reused, because the locking feature is lost when you remove the bolts. Discard the removed lock bolts. When you install the gearbox on the machine, always use new lock bolts, part number 86604182, that are available from your NEW HOLLAND service parts dealer.

Drawbar hitch and trunnion assembly to gearbox – Remove 1. Support the drawbar hitch-and-trunnion assembly (1) with a jack stand.

2. Remove four 5/8 x 1-3/4 inch lock bolts and set of washers (3) on each side of the trunnion-to-lower swivel gearbox (2) assembly.

• Discard the lock bolts.

NOTICE: Do not reuse the lock bolts.

3. Remove the drawbar hitch-and-trunnion assembly.

NHVM14HT00044AA

1

NHVM14HT00045AA

2

Gearbox to tongue – Remove 4. Support the swivel hitch gearbox assembly (1) with a jack stand.

5. Remove four 5/8 x 1-3/4 inch lock bolts and sets of washers (2) on each side of the swivel hitch gearbox that secure the gearbox to the tongue.

• Discard the lock bolts.

NOTICE: Do not reuse the lock bolts.

48049004 14/11/2016

31.4 [31.220] / 17

Power Take-Off (PTO) - Gearbox

6. Remove the swivel hitch gearbox assembly from the tongue.

NHVM14HT00046AA

48049004 14/11/2016

31.4 [31.220] / 18

3

Power Take-Off (PTO) - Gearbox

Gearbox - Install - Swivel hitch gearbox NOTICE: The installation of the swivel hitch gearboxes to the tongue and the drawbar hitch and trunnion assembly require the use of a specialized lock bolts. The lock bolts are a one time use bolt that have a special chemical coating patch on the threads and must not be reused, because the locking feature is lost when you remove the bolts. When you install the gearbox on the machine, always use new lock bolts, part number 86604182, that are available from your NEW HOLLANDservice parts dealer.

Gearbox to tongue – Install 1. Support the upper and lower swivel gearboxes assembly (1) with a jack stand, and then align the upper swivel gearbox bolt holes to the bolt holes on the tongue mounting bracket.

2. Install four new 5/8 x 1-3/4 inch lock bolts (2) along with one Belleville lock washer and two thick flat washers per bolt on each side of the upper swivel hitch gearbox to secure the gearbox to the tongue.

• Torque the lock bolts to 224 N·m (165 lb ft).

NHVM14HT00045AA

1

NHVM14HT00044AA

2

Drawbar hitch and trunnion assembly to gearbox – Install 1. Support the drawbar hitch and trunnion assembly (1) with a jack stand, and then align the trunnion assembly bolts holes to the bolt holes on lower swivel hitch gearbox.

2. Install four new 5/8 x 1-3/4 inch lock bolts (3) along with one Belleville lock washer and two thick flat washer per lock bolt on each side of the trunnion-to-lower swivel hitch gearbox (2) assembly.

• Torque the lock bolts to 224 N·m (165 lb ft).

48049004 14/11/2016

31.4 [31.220] / 19

Power Take-Off (PTO) - Gearbox

Gearbox - Remove - Reversing swivel gearbox NOTE: If you are removing the reversing swivel gearbox assembly for disassembly to service internal components, be advised that you will require special tools. Three of the tools must be locally manufactured and are listed below: Neck locknut tool – See Gearbox - Special tools - Swivel neck tools - Neck locknut tool (locally manufacture) (31.220).

Neck assembly plate – See Gearbox - Special tools - Swivel neck tools - Neck assembly plate (locally manufacture) (31.220).

Rolling torque tool – See Gearbox - Special tools - Swivel neck tools - Rolling torque tool (locally manufacture) (31.220).

1. Disconnect the rear section of the secondary Power Take-Off (PTO) shaft (1) from the upper swivel gearbox of the reversing gearbox assembly (2).

2. Disconnect the cross-header drive PTO shaft (3) from the lower swivel gearbox of the reversing swivel gearbox assembly (2).

NHVM14HT00048AA

1

NHVM14HT00049AA

2

NHVM14HT00050AA

3

3. Remove the two 5/8 x 1-1/4 inch bolts and washers (1) that secure the lower half of the reversing swivel gearbox to the trail frame bracket.

4. Support the swivel gearbox assembly (1) with wood blocks, and then remove the four 5/8 x 1-1/4 inch bolts and spring washers (1) on each side of the gearbox mounting bracket on the tongue.

48049004 14/11/2016

31.4 [31.220] / 20

Power Take-Off (PTO) - Gearbox

5. Remove the reversing swivel gearbox assembly from the tongue.

NHVM14HT00051AA

48049004 14/11/2016

31.4 [31.220] / 21

4

Power Take-Off (PTO) - Gearbox

Gearbox - Install - Reversing swivel gearbox 1. Support the swivel gearbox assembly (1) with wood blocks, and then align the upper swivel gearbox bolt holes to the bolt holes on the tongue mounting bracket.

2. Install four 5/8 x 1-1/4 inch bolts (2) along with four thick flat washers on each side of the tongue mounting bracket to secure the upper swivel gearbox.

• Torque the bolts to 224 N·m (165 lb ft).

NHVM14HT00050AA

1

NHVM14HT00049AA

2

NHVM14HT00048AA

3

3. Install two 5/8 x 1-1/4 inch bolts (1) along with one spring washer per bolt to secure the trail frame bracket to the lower swivel gearbox.

• Torque the bolts to 224 N·m (165 lb ft).

4. Connect the rear section of the secondary Power TakeOff (PTO) shaft (1) to the upper swivel gearbox (2).

5. Connect the cross-header drive PTO shaft (3) to the lower swivel gearbox (2).

48049004 14/11/2016

31.4 [31.220] / 22

Power Take-Off (PTO) - Gearbox

Gearbox - Disassemble - Swivel hitch or reversing swivel gearboxes Prior operation: Gearbox - Remove - Swivel hitch gearbox (31.220) or Gearbox - Remove - Reversing swivel gearbox (31.220)

Special tool required NH01386 – A set of two tools used for removal and assembly of the neck assembly to the upper and lower gearboxes.

• NH01386-1 – A low profile hex wrench • NH01386-2 – An extension hex wrench NOTE: You will require special tools for the disassembly of the swivel gearbox assembly and sub-assemblies. Three of the tools must be locally manufactured and are listed below: Neck locknut tool – See Gearbox - Special tools - Swivel neck tools - Neck locknut tool (locally manufacture) (31.220).

Neck assembly plate – See Gearbox - Special tools - Swivel neck tools - Neck assembly plate (locally manufacture) (31.220).

Rolling torque tool – See Gearbox - Special tools - Swivel neck tools - Rolling torque tool (locally manufacture) (31.220).

NOTE: The oil level check plugs are at different positions on the upper and lower gearbox. You can identify the oil level check plug position by the gear box casting; there is no recess in the casting under the oil level check plugs. The upper gearbox oil level check plug is positioned lower because the upper gearbox requires 1200 mL (41 US fl oz) of gear oil. The lower gearbox oil level check plug is positioned higher because the lower gearbox requires 2200 mL (74 US fl oz) of gear oil.

1. Prior to disassembly, drain the oil from both the upper and lower gearboxes as follows: A. Prepare a method for capturing and disposal of the drain oil from the gearboxes.

B. Remove the breather/oil fill plug and elbow assembly (1) in the upper and lower gearboxes to prevent them from being damaged during disassembly and assembly.

C. Remove the oil drain plugs (2) and the smaller oil level check plugs (3).

NOTE: There is no recess in the gearbox casting under the oil level check plug.

D. Capture and completely drain the oil from both gearboxes.

E. Dispose of the captured oil in accordance with shop practice and/or local oil recycling requirements.

48049004 14/11/2016

31.4 [31.220] / 23

10992721N

1

Power Take-Off (PTO) - Gearbox

2. Use the special tool NH01386-1 (2) to remove the eight M10 x 25 hex socket head screws that secure the neck assembly (1) to the lower gearbox.

10992728N

2

10001632N

3

10992727N

4

10001633N

5

3. Use a chisel or other suitable prying tool as needed to separate the lower gearbox from the neck.

4. Use the special tool NH01386-2 (1) to remove the remaining eight M10 x 25 hex socket head screws that secure the neck assembly to the upper gearbox.

NOTE: If the special tool NH01386-2 is not available, use special tool NH01386-1 as shown in Step 2 for the removal of the lower gearbox.

5. Use a chisel or other suitable prying tool as needed to separate the neck assembly (1) from the upper gearbox.

Next operation: Gearbox - Disassemble - Neck assembly - Swivel hitch or reversing swivel gearboxes (31.220) 48049004 14/11/2016

31.4 [31.220] / 24

Power Take-Off (PTO) - Gearbox

Gearbox - Disassemble - Neck assembly - Swivel hitch or reversing swivel gearboxes NOTICE: Mark each component in an ordered method to make sure that during assembly the components will be in the same upper and lower positions of the assemblies. Disassembled shims, if not damaged and not being replaced, must be assembled at the same position from which the shims were removed.

NOTE: When the gearbox assembly is complete, the orientation of the neck assembly is such that the reinforced end of the neck casing attaches to the upper gearbox and the castellated nut end of the neck assembly install into the lower gearbox.

1. Unbend the cotter pin (1), and then remove the cotter pin from the castellated nut (2).

10992651N

1

10992652N

2

10992720N

3

2. Remove the M40 castellated nut (1).

3. Install a bearing separator tool (1) under the bevel gear as shown, and then use a 2722 - 4536 kg (3 - 5 ton) press to press the gear (1) off of the shaft.

48049004 14/11/2016

31.4 [31.220] / 25

Power Take-Off (PTO) - Gearbox

4. Remove and retain the shims, and then press the bearing outward from the neck assembly.

NOTICE: Do not attempt to press the shaft out of the neck without first removing the gear and key. Pressing the shaft with the key installed will damage the shaft, shims, keys and other parts in the neck assembly.

10992654N

4

10992655N

5

10992656N

6

10992657N

7

5. Remove the bearing race (1) from the inner neck.

• Tap evenly around the race from the rear with a soft punch until the race is free of the neck.

6. Remove the seal (1) from the inner neck.

NOTICE: Replace all seals that you remove from the gearbox. Seals are damaged when removed.

7. Turn over the neck assembly and remove the bearing race (1) from the outer neck assembly.

48049004 14/11/2016

31.4 [31.220] / 26

Power Take-Off (PTO) - Gearbox

8. Remove the seal from the outer neck assembly.

NOTICE: Replace all seals that you remove from the gearbox. Seals are damaged when removed.

10992658N

8

10992659N

9

9. Remove the locknut (1) from the outer neck assembly.

• Use the special locknut tool; see Gearbox - Special tools - Swivel neck tools - Neck locknut tool (locally manufacture) (31.220) (local manufacture).

• Leave two or more of the neck bolts and nuts assembled to hold the inner neck in place during locknut removal.

NOTE: The locknut is assembled with a thread-locking sealant. Use heat if necessary to loosen the locknut.

10. Press the inner neck out of the outer neck, removing the bearings and thrust washers in the process.

10992660N

10

10992665N

11

11. Use a bearing separator tool (1) or equivalent tool to press the inner neck bearing off the neck.

• Remove the O-ring from the lower neck.

48049004 14/11/2016

31.4 [31.220] / 27

Power Take-Off (PTO) - Gearbox

12. Inspect all the parts removed from the neck assembly.

13. Assemble together both pairs of the bearing cups and cones, and then measure the thickness of each bearing set.

• Make note of the thickness measurement as you will need to compare the thickness to new bearing sets in order to determine if there is a need to add or remove shims at assembly.

14. Replace any worn or damaged parts 15. Replace all seals prior to assembly.

10992661N

Next operation: Gearbox - Assemble - Neck assembly - Swivel hitch or reversing swivel gearboxes (31.220)

48049004 14/11/2016

31.4 [31.220] / 28

12

Power Take-Off (PTO) - Gearbox

Gearbox - Assemble - Neck assembly - Swivel hitch or reversing swivel gearboxes NOTICE: Disassembled shims, if not damaged and not being replaced must be assembled at the same position from which the shims were removed.

NOTE: Assembly of the swivel hitch gearbox neck requires use of locally-manufactured special tools. For manufacturing specifications, see Gearbox - Special tools (31.220).

1. Install the oil seal (2) into the external neck housing (3).

NOTICE: Make sure that you install the oil seal so that the groove faces upward toward the upper gearbox. Oil will leak from the gearbox if you do not install the oil seal correctly, and then part failure may result.

NHIL16HT00980AA

1

NHIL16HT00981AA

2

10992669N

3

2. Install the an upper and lower bearing cup (1) into the external neck housing.

3. Coat the O-ring (5) with TUTELA MOLY GREASE GR-75 lubricant, and then install the O-ring into the indicated groove in the inner neck assembly (6).

4. Install the inner neck thrust washer (4) onto the inner neck assembly.

5. Press the lower side bearing cone (2B) onto the inner neck assembly.

• Use a 3 - 5 ton press with the applicable tools to perform this step to prevent damage to the neck or the bearing cone during installation.

6. Fill the space between underside of the installed oil seal, the bearing cup, and the bearing cone with TUTELA MOLY GREASE GR-75 lubricant.

7. Press the inner neck assembly (6) into the external neck housing assembly (3).

8. Install the upper bearing cone (2A) into the upper bearing cup in the external neck housing assembly.

9. Secure the flange (2) of the internal neck assembly, which is the lower section of neck assembly (1), onto the locally manufactured neck assembly plate (3).

• For neck assembly plate fabrication specifications, see Gearbox - Special tools - Swivel neck tools - Neck assembly plate (locally manufacture) (31.220).

48049004 14/11/2016

31.4 [31.220] / 29

Power Take-Off (PTO) - Gearbox

10. Apply LOCTITE® 263™ thread-locking sealant to the threads of the locknut (1).

11. Install the locknut onto the threaded section of the internal neck assembly (2).

10992668N

4

10998189N

5

NHIL16HT00828AA

6

NHIL16HT00976AA

7

12. Use the neck locknut tool (1) to tighten the locknut until you achieve a bearing preload of 110 - 130 kg·cm (96 - 113 lb·in) that you will measure for in Step 14.

• For the fabrication specifications, of the neck locknut tool see Gearbox - Special tools - Swivel neck tools - Neck locknut tool (locally manufacture) (31.220).

13. To help seat the bearings, strike the outer neck flange several times around the flange circumference with a soft-faced hammer, while rotating the outer neck.

14. Install the locally manufactured rolling torque tool (1) onto the neck assembly, and then check the rolling torque.

• The measure rolling torque of the neck assembly should be 110 - 130 kg·cm (96 - 113 lb·in).

• For the rolling torque tool fabrication specifications, see Gearbox - Special tools - Swivel neck tools - Rolling torque tool (locally manufacture) (31.220).

15. Adjust the torque on the locknut and seat the bearing cones again to obtain the specified rolling torque.

16. Install the upper and lower oil seals (2) into the internal neck assembly (3).

NOTICE: Make sure that you install the oil seals so that the groove in the oil seal faces the related gearbox. Oil will leak from the gearbox if you do not install the oil seals correctly, and then part failure may result.

17. Install the upper and lower bearing cups (1) into the internal neck assembly.

48049004 14/11/2016

31.4 [31.220] / 30

Power Take-Off (PTO) - Gearbox

18. Clean and inspect the shaft and parts. Replace any worn or damaged parts.

10001646N

8

NHIL16HT00906AA

9

19. Set the shaft (1), with the threaded end (A) upward, into a shop press.

20. Insert the key (2) into the key seat, and then press bevel gear (3) onto the shaft with the beveled teeth facing downward.

• Make sure that you align the key to the bevel gear keyway to fully press the bevel gear onto the shaft.

21. Install the shim (4) onto the shaft, and then press the inner bearing cone (5A) (beveled end up) onto the shaft.

22. Apply adhesive tape over the key way to prevent any sharp edges from damaging the lips of oil seals when you install the shaft into the neck assembly in the next step.

23. Carefully install the assembled bevel gear and shaft downward through oil seals of the internal neck assembly.

24. Remove the adhesive tape from over the key seat (6).

25. Position the neck and shaft assembly (1) with the installed bevel gear end downward, and then place the shim pack (3) onto the shaft and bearing. and press the gear (3) onto the shaft.

26. Install the key (7) into the key seat (6).

27. Press the bevel gear (4) onto the shaft and over the key with the gear teeth facing upward.

28. Screw the M40 castellated nut (5)onto the shaft to secure the gear.

NHIL16HT00984AA

48049004 14/11/2016

31.4 [31.220] / 31

10

Power Take-Off (PTO) - Gearbox

29. Orient the neck assembly (1) with the threaded shaft end upward, and then secure the bevel gear of the neck assembly into a vice to prevent rotation of the shaft.

30. Use an inch-pound rated torque wrench (2) to apply a preload on the bearings equal to a rolling torque of 4.6 - 11.5 kg·cm (4 - 10 lb·in).

• Set the preload by striking the top of the shaft, and then turning the shaft approximately 10 revolutions.

NOTE: You have to remove the neck assembly from the vice to rotate the shaft the specified 10 revolutions.

NHIL16HT00880AA

11

31. Check the preload with the torque wrench (1) and adjust the preload to within the specification. ○ To increase the rolling torque, tighten the castle nut. ○ To decrease the rolling torque, support the neck flange and strike the end of the shaft to slightly back off the press. ○ Tighten the castle nut slowly to obtain the correct preload.

32. Install the cotter pin (1) through the shaft and the castellated nut (2).

• Bend the legs (3) of the cotter pin open to secure the cotter pin.

10992651N

48049004 14/11/2016

31.4 [31.220] / 32

12

Power Take-Off (PTO) - Gearbox

Gearbox - Disassemble - Upper gearbox - Swivel hitch or reversing swivel gearboxes 1. Remove the eight M10 x 22 bolts that secure the cover (1) to the housing (2).

2. Remove the cover from the housing, and then slide the shaft and gear assembly from the housing.

10992723N

1

NOTE: The gear (1) mounts on either side of the shaft (2); the gear position depends on the desired output shaft rotation of the machine. The swivel hitch gearbox output shaft rotates in the same direction as the input shaft, which requires the gear to mount on the splined-end (A) of the shaft. The reversing swivel gearbox output shaft rotates in the opposite direction as the input shaft, which requires the gear to mount on the non-splined end (B) of the shaft.

Bevel gear orientation

10001635N

2

NHIL16HT00889AA

3

Reversing swivel gearbox

Swivel hitch gearbox 3. Press the bearing (1) off of the shaft.

4. Remove the shims (2) from the shaft (3) 5. Remove the retaining ring (4), and then press the bearing (5), the shims (6), and the gear (7) from the shaft.

10001636N

Next operation: Gearbox - Assemble - Upper gearbox - Swivel hitch or reversing swivel gearboxes (31.220)

48049004 14/11/2016

31.4 [31.220] / 33

4

Power Take-Off (PTO) - Gearbox

Gearbox - Assemble - Upper gearbox - Swivel hitch or reversing swivel gearboxes For proper component orientation, use the two figures below: • Figure 1 – Swivel hitch gearbox • Figure 2 – Reversing swivel gearbox

NHIL16HT00979AA

1

NHIL16HT00978AA

2

Reversing swivel gearbox

Swivel hitch gearbox

1. Clean all of the parts thoroughly with LOCTITE® ODC-FREE CLEANER AND DEGREASER. 2. Remove any remaining gasket material or sealer from the mating surfaces of the gearbox housing and the cover.

3. Install the key (1) into the key seat in the shaft (2).

4. Press the gear (3) and the bearing cone (7) onto the shaft.

5. Press the shim (4) and the bearing cone (5) onto the shaft.

6. Install the bearing cup (6) into the gearbox housing (A).

7. Install the assembled shaft into the gearbox housing.

8. Install the bearing cup (1) into the cover (2).

9. Install the cover onto the gearbox housing and secure with the eight M10 x 22 bolts (3).

NHIL16HT00907AA

48049004 14/11/2016

31.4 [31.220] / 34

3

Power Take-Off (PTO) - Gearbox

10. Make two complete revolutions of the shaft, and then check and record the initial rolling torque of the shaft with a torque wrench (1).

NOTE: The rolling torque is an indication of the preload on the tapered roller bearings.

11. Remove the bolts and the cover.

A4834-4N

4

NHIL16HT00907AA

5

NHIL16HT00908AA

6

NHIL16HT00890AA

7

12. Remove the bearing cup (1) from the cover.

13. Install the shim (4), and then press the bearing cup back into the cover.

14. Install the cover (2), and the bolts (3).

15. Make two complete revolutions of the shaft again, and then check and record the final rolling torque of the shaft with a torque wrench.

• The difference between the two recorded rolling torque values must be 1 - 5 kg·cm (0.87 4.34 lb·in).

• If the difference is not within the specification, adjust the number or thickness of shims (4) between the cover and the bearing cup.

16. Remove the bolts (1) and the cover (2), and then apply a bead of LOCTITE® SI 598™ BLACK sealant or DOW CORNING® 7091 ADHESIVE SEALANT BLACK to the mating surfaces of the gearbox housing and the cover.

17. Install the cover onto the gearbox housing.

18. Install the eight M10 x 22 bolts.

• Torque the bolts to 76 - 81 N·m (56 - 60 lb ft), following the criss-cross pattern (A).

19. Install the oil seal (3) over the shaft.

20. Install the cap (4) into the gearbox housing.

48049004 14/11/2016

31.4 [31.220] / 35

Power Take-Off (PTO) - Gearbox

Gearbox - Disassemble - Lower gearbox - Swivel hitch or reversing swivel gearboxes 1. Remove the eight M10 x 22 bolts securing the cover (1) to the housing (2).

10992723N

1

10001635N

2

10001636N

3

2. Remove the cover from the housing, and then slide the shaft-and-gear assembly (1) from the housing

3. Press the bearing (1) off of the shaft.

4. Remove the shims (2) from the shaft (3).

5. Remove the retaining ring (4), and then press the bearing (5), the shims (6), and the gear (7) from the shaft.

48049004 14/11/2016

31.4 [31.220] / 36

Power Take-Off (PTO) - Gearbox

Gearbox - Assemble - Lower gearbox - Swivel hitch or reversing swivel gearboxes 1. Clean all of the parts thoroughly with LOCTITE® ODCFREE CLEANER AND DEGREASER. 2. Remove any remaining gasket material or sealer from the mating surfaces of the gearbox housing and the cover.

3. Install the key (1) into the key seat in the shaft (2).

4. Press the gear (3) and the bearing cone (7) onto the shaft.

5. Press the shim (4) and the bearing cone (5) onto the shaft.

6. Install the bearing cup (6) into the gearbox housing (A).

NHIL16HT00888AA

1

NHIL16HT00911AA

2

A4834-4N

3

7. Install the assembled shaft into the gearbox housing.

8. Install the bearing cup (1) into the cover (2).

9. Install the cover onto the gearbox housing and secure with the eight M10 x 22 bolts (3).

10. Make two complete revolutions of the shaft, and then check and record the initial rolling torque of the shaft with a torque wrench (1).

NOTE: The rolling torque is an indication of the preload on the tapered roller bearings.

11. Remove the bolts and the cover.

48049004 14/11/2016

31.4 [31.220] / 37

Power Take-Off (PTO) - Gearbox

12. Remove the bearing cup (1) from the cover.

13. Install the shim (4), and then press the bearing cup back into the cover.

14. Install the cover (2), and the bolts (3).

15. Make two complete revolutions of the shaft again, and then check and record the final rolling torque of the shaft with a torque wrench.

• The difference between the two recorded rolling torque values must be 1 - 5 kg·cm (0.87 4.34 lb·in).

• If the difference is not within the specification, adjust the number or thickness of shims (4) between the cover and the bearing cup.

NHIL16HT00910AA

4

NHIL16HT00913AA

5

NHIL16HT00890AA

6

16. Remove the bolts (1) and the cover (2), and then apply a bead of LOCTITE® SI 598™ BLACK sealant or DOW CORNING® 7091 ADHESIVE SEALANT BLACK to the mating surfaces of the gearbox housing and the cover.

17. Install the cover onto the gearbox housing.

18. Install the eight M10 x 22 bolts.

• Torque the bolts to 76 - 81 N·m (56 - 60 lb ft), following the criss-cross pattern (A).

19. Install the oil seal (3) over the shaft.

20. Install the cap (4) into the gearbox housing.

48049004 14/11/2016

31.4 [31.220] / 38

Power Take-Off (PTO) - Gearbox

Gearbox - Assemble - Swivel hitch gearboxes Neck assembly-to-upper gearbox – Assemble NOTE: In Step 16, the purpose, size, and placement of the spacers or washers is to support the neck assembly from full contact with gearbox to prevent the sealant from spreading into the screw holes. The elevated neck assembly should be high enough to install and start the eight hex socket screws without the screws contacting the sealant.

Gear backlash – Check – Lower gearbox to neck assembly 1. Apply PERMATEX ® NON-DRYING PRUSSIAN BLUE compound to the teeth of the lower bevel gear (A) in the neck assembly and the bevel gear (B) in the lower gearbox.

2. Secure the neck assembly (1) to the lower gearbox (2) with the eight hex socket screws (4).

3. Snug-tighten the hex socket screws.

4. Install a dial indicator on the teeth of the lower bevel gear. Zero the dial indicator out.

5. Hold the lower shaft and rotate the bevel gear to check the gear backlash.

NHIL16HT00914AA

• The backlash specification is 0.21 - 0.57 mm (0.01 0.02 in) • If the backlash is not within the specification, add or remove the shim (3).

6. Rotate the input shaft several times to allow the gearmarking compound to set on the mating teeth.

7. Remove the screws and separate the neck assembly from the lower gearbox.

• Inspect the gear tooth contact pattern left on the mating gears for proper gear mesh. See Gearbox Shimming - Gear tooth contact pattern (31.220).

48049004 14/11/2016

31.4 [31.220] / 39

1

Power Take-Off (PTO) - Gearbox

Gear backlash – Check – Upper gearbox to neck assembly 8. Apply PERMATEX ® NON-DRYING PRUSSIAN BLUE compound to the teeth of the lower bevel gear (A) in the neck assembly and the bevel gear (B) in the upper gearbox.

9. Secure the neck assembly (1) to the upper gearbox (2) with the eight hex socket screws (4).

10. Snug-tighten the hex socket screws.

11. Install a dial indicator on the teeth of the lower bevel gear. Zero the dial indicator out.

12. Hold the upper shaft and rotate the bevel gear to check the gear backlash.

NHIL16HT00915AA

2

NHIL16HT00884AA

3

• The backlash specification is 0.21 - 0.57 mm (0.01 - 0.02 in) • If the backlash is not within the specification, add or remove the shim (3).

13. Rotate the input shaft several times to allow the gearmarking compound to set on the mating teeth.

14. Remove the screws and separate the neck assembly from the upper gearbox.

• Inspect the gear tooth contact pattern left on the mating gears for proper gear mesh. See Gearbox Shimming - Gear tooth contact pattern (31.220).

15. Carefully apply LOCTITE® SI 598™ BLACK sealant or DOW CORNING® 7091 ADHESIVE SEALANT BLACK to the gearbox mating surface. Make sure that you do not allow the sealant to penetrate into the screw holes.

16. Equally distribute locally acquired spacers or washers (3) around the mating surface of the upper gearbox.

17. Position and align the screw holes of the neck assembly (1) to the mating surface of the upper gearbox (2).

48049004 14/11/2016

31.4 [31.220] / 40

Power Take-Off (PTO) - Gearbox

10992727N

4

NHIL16HT00885BA

5

18. Install the eight M10 x 25 hex socket screws to attach the neck assembly to the upper gearbox.

19. Use the special tool NH01386-2 (1) or special tool NH01386-1 (1) to torque the hex socket screws in a criss-cross pattern (A) to 78 N·m (58 lb ft).

NHIL16HT00887AA

48049004 14/11/2016

31.4 [31.220] / 41

6

Power Take-Off (PTO) - Gearbox

NOTICE: Do not apply the sealant over the screw holes of the gearbox mating surface where you install the hardware.

You must prevent the sealant from entering into the bolt holes, which can counteract the thread-locking ability of the applied LOCTITE® 263™ thread-locking compound.

20. Carefully apply LOCTITE® SI 598™ BLACK sealant or DOW CORNING® 7091 ADHESIVE SEALANT BLACK to the gearbox mating surface. Make sure that you do not allow the sealant to penetrate into the screw holes.

21. Install spacers or washers (3) on the mating surface of the lower gearbox.

22. Install the neck assembly (1) onto the lower gearbox (2).

23. Remove the spacers or washers from the mating surface of the lower gearbox and the neck assembly and install the M10 x 25 hex socket screws.

50013378N

7

10992728N

8

24. Use the special tool NH01386-1 (1) to torque the hex socket screws to 78 N·m (58 lb ft).

25. Apply LOCTITE® SI 598™ BLACK to the threads and Install the oil drain plug and the oil level check plug into each gearbox.

26. Add 1200 mL (41 US fl oz) of TUTELA HYPOIDE EP GEAR LUBE SAE 80W-90 or CNH HYPOIDE SSL SYNTHETIC GEAR LUBE 75W-90 (synthetic) to the upper gearbox.

27. Add 2200 mL (74 US fl oz) of TUTELA HYPOIDE EP GEAR LUBE SAE 80W-90 or CNH HYPOIDE SSL SYNTHETIC GEAR LUBE 75W-90 (synthetic) to the upper gearbox.

28. Apply LOCTITE® SI 598™ BLACK to the threads and install the combination breather and oil fill plug into each gearbox.

48049004 14/11/2016

31.4 [31.220] / 42

Index Power Take-Off (PTO) - 31 Gearbox - 220 Gearbox - Assemble - Lower gearbox - Swivel hitch or reversing swivel gearboxes . . . . . . . . . . . . .

37

Gearbox - Assemble - Neck assembly - Swivel hitch or reversing swivel gearboxes . . . . . . . . . . . . .

29

Gearbox - Assemble - Swivel hitch gearboxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

39

Gearbox - Assemble - Upper gearbox - Swivel hitch or reversing swivel gearboxes . . . . . . . . . . . . .

34

Gearbox - Change fluid - Reversing swivel gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

15

Gearbox - Change fluid - Swivel hitch gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

13

Gearbox - Disassemble - Lower gearbox - Swivel hitch or reversing swivel gearboxes . . . . . . . . . .

36

Gearbox - Disassemble - Neck assembly - Swivel hitch or reversing swivel gearboxes . . . . . . . . . .

25

Gearbox - Disassemble - Swivel hitch or reversing swivel gearboxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

23

Gearbox - Disassemble - Upper gearbox - Swivel hitch or reversing swivel gearboxes . . . . . . . . . .

33

Gearbox - Exploded view - Swivel gearbox neck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

12

Gearbox - Exploded view - Swivel gearboxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11

Gearbox - Install - Reversing swivel gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

22

Gearbox - Install - Swivel hitch gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

19

Gearbox - Overview - Reversing swivel gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10

Gearbox - Overview - Swivel hitch gearboxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9

Gearbox - Remove - Reversing swivel gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

20

Gearbox - Remove - Swivel hitch gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

17

Gearbox - Shimming - Gear tooth contact pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7

Gearbox - Special tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3

Gearbox - Special tools - Swivel neck tools - Neck assembly plate (locally manufacture) . . . . . . . .

6

Gearbox - Special tools - Swivel neck tools - Neck locknut tool (locally manufacture) . . . . . . . . . . . .

4

Gearbox - Special tools - Swivel neck tools - Rolling torque tool (locally manufacture) . . . . . . . . . . .

3

48049004 14/11/2016

31.4 [31.220] / 43

48049004 14/11/2016

31.4 [31.220] / 44

Power Take-Off (PTO) - 31 Clutches - 225

Discbine® 313 Discbine® 316

48049004 14/11/2016

31.5 [31.225] / 1

Contents Power Take-Off (PTO) - 31 Clutches - 225

FUNCTIONAL DATA Main drive slip clutch Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

SERVICE Main drive slip clutch Remove . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Disassemble . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Visual inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Assemble . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Install . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Resurface - Burnish the slip clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

Overrunning clutch Remove . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Disassemble . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Visual inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Assemble . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Install . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

48049004 14/11/2016

31.5 [31.225] / 2

Power Take-Off (PTO) - Clutches

Main drive slip clutch - Overview The slip clutch (1) is part of the secondary Power Take-Off (PTO) drive shaft. The slip clutch clamps onto the output shaft of the front swivel gearbox. The slip clutch is set to slip in the event an overload occurs during machine operation. Prior to the start of each season and after long periods of non-use, the slip clutch should be burnished to ensure it is not locked up.

NHIL13HT00422AA

48049004 14/11/2016

31.5 [31.225] / 3

1

Power Take-Off (PTO) - Clutches

Main drive slip clutch - Remove 1. Squeeze the trumpet shield (2) at the front of the tongue and slide it over the mounting pins (1).

2. Slide the trumpet shield rearward over the secondary Power Take-Off (PTO) shaft.

NHVM14HT00342AA

1

NHVM14HT00343AA

2

3. Loosen and remove the two clamp bolts (1) and locknuts that secure the slip clutch yoke to the swivel hitch gearbox output shaft.

4. Slide the slip clutch yoke off of the output shaft.

5. Pull the front half secondary PTO shaft from the rear half.

48049004 14/11/2016

31.5 [31.225] / 4

Power Take-Off (PTO) - Clutches

Main drive slip clutch - Disassemble 1. Loosen the six bolts (1) around the clutch housing, onehalf of a turn at a time until all six of the bolts are loose.

2. Carefully remove and discard the six bolts and nuts from the clutch.

NHIL16HT00441AA

1

NHIL16HT00442AA

2

50006843N

3

3. Remove the internal components one at a time over the clamp hub at the rear of the clutch.

The clutch contains the following components: 1.

Compression plate

2.

Disc spring

3.

Ribbed pressure plate

4.

Friction disc

5.

Separator plate

6.

Friction disc

4. Discard the friction discs (4) and (6).

48049004 14/11/2016

31.5 [31.225] / 5

Power Take-Off (PTO) - Clutches

Main drive slip clutch - Visual inspection 1. Inspect the separator plate (1).

A. Check for a discolored, warped, or cracked plate.

Replace the plate if any damage is found.

B. Make sure that both faces of the separator plate have a rough surface. Replace the plate if either face is worn smooth.

C. Inspect the inner drive tangs for excessive wear.

Replace the plate if the drive tangs are rounded off or worn more than one-third of the way through.

2. Inspect the ribbed pressure plate (2).

A. Check for a discolored or cracked plate. Replace the plate if any damage is found.

1431-4-3N

1

20006843N

2

B. Lay a straight edge across the face of the plate and replace the plate if it is warped more than 1.6 mm (1/16 in).

3. Inspect the disc spring (1).

A. Check for a discolored or cracked disc spring. Replace the disc spring if any damage is found.

B. Use a depth micrometer or a caliper to measure the height of the disc spring on a flat surface. Replace the spring if it is not between 10.2 - 10.7 mm (0.400 - 0.420 in).

48049004 14/11/2016

31.5 [31.225] / 6

Power Take-Off (PTO) - Clutches

Main drive slip clutch - Assemble 1. A spacer (1) on the outer overrunning clutch hub (2) prevents the hub from shifting rearward during use.

Make sure that this spacer is over the outer overrunning clutch hub before you rebuild the slip clutch.

1431-4-4N

1

50006844N

2

20006845N

3

20006846N

4

2. Install a new friction disc (1) into the clutch housing followed by the separator plate (2) and another friction disc (3).

3. Install the pressure plate (1) in the housing with the flat surface facing the friction disc. Align the tabs on the pressure plate with the relief notches in the housing.

4. Position the disc spring (1) over the clutch hub so that the inside diameter of the disc spring contacts the ribs on the pressure plate.

5. Position the compression plate over the clutch hub against the outer diameter of the disc spring.

6. Install six new bolts through the grooves in the housing and secure with six new nuts.

7. Tighten the nuts only until the compression plate contacts the clutch housing.

48049004 14/11/2016

31.5 [31.225] / 7

Power Take-Off (PTO) - Clutches

Main drive slip clutch - Install 1. Slide the front half of the secondary Power Take-Off (PTO) shaft onto the rear half.

2. Slide the slip clutch yoke (1) over the output shaft of the swivel hitch gearbox.

NOTE: You must slide the trumpet shield over the end of the PTO shaft before you attach the yoke to the gearbox shaft.

3. Secure the clutch yoke with the two clamp bolts (2) and locknuts.

4. Torque the locknuts to 163 N·m (120 lb ft).

NHVM14HT00343AA

1

NHVM14HT00342AA

2

5. Squeeze the sides of the trumpet shield (2) and slide the shield back into position on the mounting pins (1).

48049004 14/11/2016

31.5 [31.225] / 8

Power Take-Off (PTO) - Clutches

Main drive slip clutch - Resurface - Burnish the slip clutch WARNING Moving parts!

Disengage the Power Take-Off (PTO), turn off the engine, and remove the key. Wait for all movement to stop before you leave the operator's position. Never adjust, lubricate, clean, or remove a blockage of crop material when the engine is on.

Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury.

W0112B

NOTICE: The slip clutch is factory-calibrated and is not adjustable.

The slip clutch (1) on the disc mower-conditioner is part of the secondary Power Take-Off (PTO) drive shaft, and mounts on the output shaft of the upper-half swivel hitch gearbox at the front of the tongue.

The friction slip clutch is set to slip if an overload occurs during machine operation.

Burnish a new friction slip clutch or any friction slip clutch that has had no use for a period of 60 days to ensure the clutch friction discs are not bound together by rust.

NHIL13HT00422AA

1

NHIL13HT00423AA

2

NHIL13HT00422AA

3

Burnish the friction slip clutch as follows: 1.

Remove the PTO from the tractor.

2.

Remove the PTO trumpet shield (1).

3.

Loosen the six clutch bolts one-half of a turn at a time until the bolts are just loose, then retighten all of the bolts one-half turn.

4.

Attach the PTO to the tractor.

5.

Operate the tractor at one-third throttle, and engage the tractor PTO for a few seconds, or until the slip clutch visibly smokes, and then disengage the tractor PTO.

6.

Turn the tractor off.

• If the clutch does not slip, you must disassemble the clutch to unlock the friction discs.

• Consult your authorized dealer for additional information about friction slip clutch service.

After you burnish the friction slip clutch, perform the following steps: 1.

Tighten the cap screws one-half of a turn at a time until the compression plate (1) contacts the clutch housing (2).

2.

Grease the fitting on the yoke with NEW HOLLAND AMBRA HI TEMP EP GREASE.

3.

If there is an integral overrunning clutch, make sure that the clutch turns freely in one direction.

4.

Install and secure the trumpet shield over the slip clutch.

48049004 14/11/2016

31.5 [31.225] / 9

Power Take-Off (PTO) - Clutches

Overrunning clutch - Remove 1. Remove the clutch and the front half of the secondary Power Take-Off (PTO) shaft from the machine. See Main drive slip clutch - Remove (31.225).

2. Use a screwdriver to release the Easy Lock clip (1).

3. Turn the guard counterclockwise to disengage the nylon bearing (2).

4. Slide the guard off of the front half of the secondary PTO shaft.

NHIL16HT00433AA

1

NHIL16HT00434AA

2

5. Remove the four bolts (1) that secure the overrunning clutch to the slip clutch.

6. Slide the slip clutch assembly off of the overrunning clutch.

48049004 14/11/2016

31.5 [31.225] / 10

Power Take-Off (PTO) - Clutches

Overrunning clutch - Disassemble 1. Remove the retaining ring (1) and the washer (2) from the hub (3) of the overrunning clutch.

NHIL16HT00435AA

1

NHIL16HT00436AA

2

NHIL16HT00437AA

3

NHIL16HT00438AA

4

2. Slowly remove the hub (1) from the inner hub (2).

• Retain the keys (3) and the leaf springs (4) while you remove the hub from the inner hub.

3. Remove the wave spring (5) from the inner hub.

4. With the set screw positioned upward, remove the set screw (1) from the inner hub (2).

NOTE: The inner hub contains 31 ball bearings that will come out of the inner hub when you remove the set screw.

5. To remove the 31 ball bearings rotate the set screw hole downward.

NOTE: An application of a penetrating lubricant may be necessary in order to remove all of the ball bearings.

6. Make sure that all 31 ball bearing are out of the inner hub.

NOTICE: Discard all of the 31 ball bearings. Do not reuse the removed ball bearings.

48049004 14/11/2016

31.5 [31.225] / 11

Power Take-Off (PTO) - Clutches

Overrunning clutch - Visual inspection 1. Inspect the overrunning pawls and ramps on the inner diameter of the outer overrunning clutch hub (1) for wear or damage.

• Replace the components as necessary.

2. Inspect the overrunning hub (2) and yoke bearing grooves and mating surfaces for galling or other damage.

• Replace the components as necessary.

3. Discard the ball bearings (3) and replace with new parts.

NHIL16HT00439AA

48049004 14/11/2016

31.5 [31.225] / 12

1

Power Take-Off (PTO) - Clutches

Overrunning clutch - Assemble 1. Apply a thin film of NEW HOLLAND AMBRA HI TEMP EP GREASE to the inner and outer race of the ball bearing cavity.

2. Install the inner hub (1) onto the yoke (2).

3. Rotate the inner hub to position the set screw hole upward, and then install all or the 31 ball bearings (3) into the inner hub.

NHIL16HT00438AA

1

NHIL16HT00437AA

2

NHIL16HT00440AA

3

NHIL16HT00435AA

4

4. Install and securely tighten the set screw (1).

5. Apply NEW HOLLAND AMBRA HI TEMP EP GREASE to the grease fitting (2) while you rotate the overrunning hub to distribute the grease evenly.

• Wipe away any excess grease.

6. Install the wave spring (1) onto the yoke, as shown.

7. Apply NEW HOLLAND AMBRA HI TEMP EP GREASE into the spring recesses (2) in the inner hub.

8. Install the leaf springs (3) into place with the concave (curving inward) side facing downward toward the center of the yoke.

9. Apply a thin film of NEW HOLLAND AMBRA HI TEMP EP GREASE onto the keys and set each key into place on top of the leaf springs.

10. Install the outer hub (1) on the inner hub.

11. Install the washer (2) and the retaining ring (3).

48049004 14/11/2016

31.5 [31.225] / 13

Power Take-Off (PTO) - Clutches

Overrunning clutch - Install 1. Install the overrunning clutch assembly into the slip clutch assembly.

2. Install the four previously removed bolts (1) that secure the overrunning clutch to the slip clutch assembly.

3. Securely tighten the hardware.

4. Slide the guard onto the front half of the secondary Power Take-Off (PTO) shaft. Make sure that you align the four holes in the guard with the four tabs on the nylon bearing.

NHIL16HT00434AA

1

NHIL16HT00405AA

2

NHIL16HT00433AA

3

5. Rotate the nylon bearing until the tabs (1) engage the guard (2).

6. Push the Easy Lock clip (1) into position to secure the guard.

48049004 14/11/2016

31.5 [31.225] / 14

Index Power Take-Off (PTO) - 31 Clutches - 225 Main drive slip clutch - Assemble . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7

Main drive slip clutch - Disassemble . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5

Main drive slip clutch - Install . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8

Main drive slip clutch - Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3

Main drive slip clutch - Remove . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4

Main drive slip clutch - Resurface - Burnish the slip clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9

Main drive slip clutch - Visual inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6

Overrunning clutch - Assemble . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

13

Overrunning clutch - Disassemble . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11

Overrunning clutch - Install . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

14

Overrunning clutch - Remove . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10

Overrunning clutch - Visual inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

12

48049004 14/11/2016

31.5 [31.225] / 15

CNH Industrial America New Holland Site 100 Brubaker Avenue New Holland, Pennsylvania United States 17557 SERVICE - Technical Publications & Tools

PRINTED IN U.S.A. © 2016 CNH Industrial America LLC. All rights reserved. No part of the text or illustrations of this publication may be reproduced.

NEW HOLLAND policy is one of continuous improvement and the right to change prices, specification or equipment at any time without notices is reserved.

All data given in this publication is subject to production variations. Dimensions and weight are approximate only and the illustrations do not necessarily show products in standard condition. For exact information about any particular product, please consult your NEW HOLLAND Dealer.

48049004 14/11/2016 EN

SERVICE MANUAL Hydraulic systems Discbine® 313 Discbine® 316

48049004 14/11/2016

35

Contents Hydraulic systems - 35

[35.000] Hydraulic systems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35.1 [35.410] Header or attachment height system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35.2 [35.415] Header or attachment tilting system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35.3 [35.947] Frame positioning swinging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35.4

48049004 14/11/2016

35

Hydraulic systems - 35 Hydraulic systems - 000

Discbine® 313 Discbine® 316

48049004 14/11/2016

35.1 [35.000] / 1

Contents Hydraulic systems - 35 Hydraulic systems - 000

FUNCTIONAL DATA Hydraulic systems Component localization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Functional diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Hydraulic schematic frame 01 - Tongue swing circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Hydraulic schematic frame 02 - Header lift / header tilt circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

48049004 14/11/2016

35.1 [35.000] / 2

Hydraulic systems - Hydraulic systems

Hydraulic systems - Component localization

NHIL14HT00083FA

1

Hydraulic systems overview

(A) Header lift circuit • Header lift slave cylinder (1) • Slave cylinder hose (2) • Header lift master cylinder (3) • Master cylinder hoses (4)

48049004 14/11/2016

35.1 [35.000] / 3

NHIL14HT00086AA

2

NHIL14HT00091AA

3

Hydraulic systems - Hydraulic systems

(B) Header tilt circuit • Header tilt cylinder (1) • Header tilt cylinder hose (2)

NHIL14HT00073AA

4

NHIL14HT00056AA

5

(C) Tongue swing circuit • Tongue swing cylinder (1) • Tongue swing cylinder hoses (2)

48049004 14/11/2016

35.1 [35.000] / 4

Hydraulic systems - Hydraulic systems

Hydraulic systems - Functional diagram

1431-8-8

1

Hydraulic system diagram (1) Tractor remote outlets (4) Tilt cylinder (7) Tongue swing cylinder (X) Tongue swing circuit

(2) Orifice, 2.38 mm (0.09375 in) (5) Slave lift cylinder (A) Left-hand side (Y) Header lift circuit

48049004 14/11/2016

35.1 [35.000] / 5

(3) Master lift cylinder (6) Header lift circuit bleed location (B) Right-hand side (Z) Header tilt circuit

Hydraulic systems - Hydraulic systems

Hydraulic systems - Hydraulic schematic frame 01 - Tongue swing circuit

NHIL16HT00394FA

1

NOTE: Hydraulic schematic is for reference only.

Hydraulic port and tractor component identification Item (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) (F)

Description Pressure Return Directional Control Valve (DCV) Pressure relief valve Hydraulic pump Hydraulic reservoir

Hydraulic component identification Item (1) (2) (3) (4)

Name CYL-01 ORF-01 VLV-01 VLV-02

Description Tongue swing cylinder Swing cylinder orifice Swing cylinder lock 1 Swing cylinder lock 2

48049004 14/11/2016

35.1 [35.000] / 6

Hydraulic systems - Hydraulic systems

Hydraulic systems - Hydraulic schematic frame 02 - Header lift / header tilt circuit

NHIL16HT00395FA

1

NOTE: Hydraulic schematic is for reference only.

Hydraulic port and tractor component identification Item (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) (F)

Description Pressure Return Directional Control Valve (DCV) Pressure relief valve Hydraulic pump Hydraulic reservoir

Hydraulic component identification Item (1) (2) (3)

Name CYL-02 CYL-03 CYL-04

Description Master lift cylinder Slave lift cylinder Header tilt cylinder

48049004 14/11/2016

35.1 [35.000] / 7

Index Hydraulic systems - 35 Hydraulic systems - 000 Hydraulic systems - Component localization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3

Hydraulic systems - Functional diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5

Hydraulic systems - Hydraulic schematic frame 01 - Tongue swing circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6

Hydraulic systems - Hydraulic schematic frame 02 - Header lift / header tilt circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7

48049004 14/11/2016

35.1 [35.000] / 8

Hydraulic systems - 35 Header or attachment height system - 410

Discbine® 313 Discbine® 316

48049004 14/11/2016

35.2 [35.410] / 1

Contents Hydraulic systems - 35 Header or attachment height system - 410

FUNCTIONAL DATA Header or attachment height system Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

SERVICE Positioning cylinder Remove - Master cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Disassemble - Master cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Inspect - Master cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Assemble - Master cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Install - Master cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Remove - Slave cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Disassemble - Slave cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Inspect - Slave cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Assemble - Slave cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Install - Slave cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Bleed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

DIAGNOSTIC Header or attachment height system Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

48049004 14/11/2016

35.2 [35.410] / 2

Hydraulic systems - Header or attachment height system

Header or attachment height system - Overview

NHIL14HT00082FA

1

Header lift circuit The header lift circuit consists of a master cylinder (1), a slave cylinder (2), and hoses (3) that allow the operator to raise, lower, or adjust the levelness of the header from the operator’s platform.

When the operator lowers the header, oil from the auxiliary hydraulic outlet on the tractor flows to the base of the master cylinder, and oil from the rod of the master cylinder flows to the base of the slave cylinder. This combination allows the master and slave cylinders to extend equally under any load.

An out-of-phase condition, when the left-hand and right-hand sides of the machine raise unevenly, is a possible occurrence for the master and slave cylinder. See Positioning cylinder - Bleed (35.410) for more information on the procedure for re-phasing the header lift circuit.

48049004 14/11/2016

35.2 [35.410] / 3

Hydraulic systems - Header or attachment height system

DANGER Crushing hazard!

Make sure that you engage the header lift lock channels whenever you raise the header for maintenance or road transport.

Failure to comply will result in death or serious injury.

D0198A

NOTICE: Always engage or disengage both of the header lift lock channels at the same time. If you lower the unit with only one header lift lock channel engaged you could damage the machine.

NOTE: You may need to purge air from the hydraulic system if the cylinders do not extend far enough to release the header lift lock channels.

See Positioning cylinder - Bleed (35.410).

Header lift locks Always engage the header lift locks when you service or transport the machine.

To engage the header lift locks, raise the header, and then rotate both the left-hand and the right-hand lock levers (1) forward until the lift lock channel (2) engages under the lift cylinder.

NHIL13HT00304AA

48049004 14/11/2016

35.2 [35.410] / 4

2

Hydraulic systems - Header or attachment height system

Positioning cylinder - Remove - Master cylinder WARNING Escaping fluid!

Hydraulic fluid or diesel fuel leaking under pressure can penetrate the skin and cause infection or other injury. To prevent personal injury: Relieve all pressure before disconnecting fluid lines or performing work on the hydraulic system. Before applying pressure, make sure all connections are tight and all components are in good condition. Never use your hand to check for suspected leaks under pressure. Use a piece of cardboard or wood for this purpose. If injured by leaking fluid, see your doctor immediately.

Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury.

W0178A

DANGER Heavy objects!

Lift and handle all heavy components using lifting equipment with adequate capacity. Always support units or parts with suitable slings or hooks. Make sure the work area is clear of all bystanders.

Failure to comply will result in death or serious injury.

D0076A

1. Raise the header, and then engage the header lift lock (1) on the slave cylinder on the left-hand side of the machine.

NHIL16HT00027AA

1

NHIL14HT00090AA

2

2. Attach a lifting device (1) to the right-hand side of the trail frame (2).

NOTICE: Make sure that the lifting device does not contact the hydraulic lines that run on the underside of the trail frame.

3. Turn off the tractor and remove the key.

4. Relieve all pressure from the header lift circuit.

48049004 14/11/2016

35.2 [35.410] / 5

Hydraulic systems - Header or attachment height system

5. On the master cylinder (1), remove the hydraulic hoses (2) and (3).

6. Label the hoses and install a cap in each hose to prevent hydraulic contamination.

NHIL16HT00450AA

3

NHIL16HT00451AA

4

7. Remove the hardware on the rod (1) and base (2) of the cylinder (3).

8. Remove the master cylinder from the machine.

48049004 14/11/2016

35.2 [35.410] / 6

Hydraulic systems - Header or attachment height system

Positioning cylinder - Disassemble - Master cylinder 1. Loosen and remove the set screw (1).

A14119-6NN

1

A14119-7NN

2

A14119-8NN

3

2. Using a hammer and a punch, tap the cylinder head (1) into the cylinder barrel far enough to remove the retaining ring (2).

3. Pull the piston and rod assembly out of the cylinder barrel.

4. Prevent the rod from rotating by inserting a bar through the hole in the end, and then remove the rod nut (1).

5. Remove the piston (2) and cylinder head (3) from the rod.

6. Remove all O-rings and seals for replacement.

48049004 14/11/2016

35.2 [35.410] / 7

Hydraulic systems - Header or attachment height system

Positioning cylinder - Inspect - Master cylinder The barrel of the cylinder should be cleaned and checked for scratches. Any small scratches should be removed before the cylinder is reassembled. If there are deep grooves in the piston, there most likely will be deep grooves worn into the barrel, and the barrel should be replaced. If a barrel shows rust in any area where the O-ring must travel, it should be replaced.

If there is leakage around the cylinder rod, it should be inspected for dents and scratches. If any dents or scratches are found on the rod, it should be replaced and not repaired.

Inspect the head for high wear or scratches from the rod. If the bore ( 63.5 mm (2.5 in)) is worn over 0.127 mm (0.005 in), or severely scratched, it should be replaced. Remove any sharp edges that may have formed in the bore of the head.

Clean all of the parts with LOCTITE® ODC-FREE CLEANER AND DEGREASER or an equivalent solvent-based cleaner, and then coat the O-ring, seals, head, piston, and the inside of the cylinder barrel with new, clean NEW HOLLAND AMBRA MASTERTRAN® ULTRACTION or an equivalent hydraulic oil.

48049004 14/11/2016

35.2 [35.410] / 8

Hydraulic systems - Header or attachment height system

Positioning cylinder - Assemble - Master cylinder 1. Apply NEW HOLLAND AMBRA MASTERTRAN® ULTRACTION lubricant to all seals, O-rings, and sliding surfaces prior to installation.

2. Install a new rod seal on the inside of the cylinder head.

3. Install a new wiper seal (1) onto the face of the cylinder head.

4. Install an O-ring (3) and backup washer in the outer groove of the cylinder head.

NOTE: Orient the backup washer so that it is toward the outer face of the cylinder head.

5. Install a new retaining ring and the cylinder head assembly over the rod.

A14119-9NN

1

A14119-8NN

2

A14119-7N

3

A14119-6NN

4

6. Prevent the piston from rotating by placing a bar through the hole in the end.

7. Install the piston (2) with the recessed end facing out.

8. Install the locknut (1).

9. Torque the locknut to 210 N·m (155 lb ft) 10. Install the piston seal (3).

11. Apply NEW HOLLAND AMBRA MASTERTRAN® ULTRACTION lubricant to the cylinder barrel.

12. Carefully insert the complete piston and rod assembly into the barrel.

NOTICE: Use caution not to damage the seals on the retaining ring groove.

13. Push the cylinder head into the cylinder barrel far enough to expose the retaining ring groove, and then install the retaining ring (2).

14. Pull the rod outward to seat the cylinder head (1) against the retaining ring.

15. Install and tighten the set screw (1).

48049004 14/11/2016

35.2 [35.410] / 9

Hydraulic systems - Header or attachment height system

Positioning cylinder - Install - Master cylinder 1. Install the cylinder to the machine: A. Secure the base (1) of the cylinder with the previously removed clevis pin (2) and cotter pin (3).

NHIL14HT00089AA

1

NHIL14HT00088AA

2

NHIL16HT00450AA

3

NHIL14HT00090AA

4

B. Secure the rod (1) of the cylinder with the previously removed clevis pin (2), lift lock channel (3), four flat washers (4)(two on each side of the cylinder rod), and one cotter pin (5).

2. Remove the cap from the hydraulic hose.

3. Connect the hydraulic hoses (1) and (2) to the ports on the master cylinder (3).

4. Torque the hose end fittings to standard hydraulic torque specifications.

5. Remove the lifting device (1) from the trail frame (2).

6. Raise the header, and then disengage the header lift lock that was engaged during the cylinder removal procedure.

7. Bleed the lift cylinders. See Positioning cylinder Bleed (35.410).

48049004 14/11/2016

35.2 [35.410] / 10

Hydraulic systems - Header or attachment height system

Positioning cylinder - Remove - Slave cylinder WARNING Escaping fluid!

Hydraulic fluid or diesel fuel leaking under pressure can penetrate the skin and cause infection or other injury. To prevent personal injury: Relieve all pressure before disconnecting fluid lines or performing work on the hydraulic system. Before applying pressure, make sure all connections are tight and all components are in good condition. Never use your hand to check for suspected leaks under pressure. Use a piece of cardboard or wood for this purpose. If injured by leaking fluid, see your doctor immediately.

Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury.

W0178A

DANGER Heavy objects!

Lift and handle all heavy components using lifting equipment with adequate capacity. Always support units or parts with suitable slings or hooks. Make sure the work area is clear of all bystanders.

Failure to comply will result in death or serious injury.

D0076A

1. Place blocks of wood under both ends of the cutterbar (1).

2. Lower the header so that the cutterbar rests on the blocks.

NHIL16HT00539AA

1

NHIL16HT00449AA

2

3. Attach a lifting device (1) to the trail frame (2) at the cylinder that is to be removed. Raise the trail frame slightly to tension the lifting device.

NOTICE: Make sure that the lifting device does not contact the hydraulic lines that run on the underside of the trail frame.

4. Turn off the tractor and remove the key.

5. Use the hydraulic remote on the tractor to relieve all pressure from the header lift circuit. The right-hand tire should fall slightly until it contacts the ground, and the pins for the slave cylinder should be loose.

48049004 14/11/2016

35.2 [35.410] / 11

Hydraulic systems - Header or attachment height system

6. On the slave cylinder (1), remove the hydraulic hose (2).

7. Install a cap on the hydraulic hose to prevent hydraulic contamination.

NHIL14HT00086AA

3

NHIL14HT00087AA

4

8. Remove the hardware on the rod (1) and base (2) of the cylinder (3).

9. Remove the cylinder from the machine.

48049004 14/11/2016

35.2 [35.410] / 12

Hydraulic systems - Header or attachment height system

Positioning cylinder - Disassemble - Slave cylinder 1. Loosen and remove the set screw (1).

A14119-13N

1

A14119-13NN

2

A14119-14N

3

2. Using a hammer and a punch, tap the cylinder head (1) into the cylinder barrel far enough to remove the retaining ring (2).

3. Pull the piston and rod assembly out of the cylinder barrel.

4. Prevent the rod from rotating by inserting a bar through the hole in the end, and then remove the rod nut (1).

5. Remove the piston (2) and cylinder head (3) from the rod.

6. Remove all O-rings and seals for replacement.

48049004 14/11/2016

35.2 [35.410] / 13

Hydraulic systems - Header or attachment height system

Positioning cylinder - Inspect - Slave cylinder The barrel of the cylinder should be cleaned and checked for scratches. Any small scratches should be removed before the cylinder is reassembled. If there are deep grooves in the piston, there most likely will be deep grooves worn into the barrel, and the barrel should be replaced. If a barrel shows rust in any area where the O-ring must travel, it should be replaced.

If there is leakage around the cylinder rod, it should be inspected for dents and scratches. If any dents or scratches are found on the rod, it should be replaced and not repaired.

Inspect the head for high wear or scratches from the rod. If the bore ( 50.8 mm (2 in)) is worn over 0.127 mm (0.005 in), or severely scratched, it should be replaced. Remove any sharp edges that may have formed in the bore of the head.

Clean all of the parts with LOCTITE® ODC-FREE CLEANER AND DEGREASER or an equivalent solvent-based cleaner, and then coat the O-ring, seals, head, piston, and the inside of the cylinder barrel with new, clean NEW HOLLAND AMBRA MASTERTRAN® ULTRACTION or an equivalent hydraulic oil.

48049004 14/11/2016

35.2 [35.410] / 14

Hydraulic systems - Header or attachment height system

Positioning cylinder - Assemble - Slave cylinder 1. Apply NEW HOLLAND AMBRA MASTERTRAN® ULTRACTION lubricant to all seals, O-rings, and sliding surfaces prior to installation.

2. Install a new rod seal on the inside of the cylinder head.

3. Install a new wiper seal (1) onto the face of the cylinder head.

4. Install an O-ring (3) and backup washer in the outer groove of the cylinder head.

NOTE: Orient the backup washer so that it is toward the outer face of the cylinder head.

5. Install a new retaining ring and the cylinder head assembly over the rod.

A14119-9NN

1

A14119-8NN

2

A14119-13NN

3

A14119-13N

4

6. Prevent the piston from rotating by placing a bar through the hole in the end.

7. Install the piston (2) with the recessed end facing out.

8. Install the locknut (1).

9. Torque the locknut to 210 N·m (155 lb ft) 10. Install the piston seal (3).

11. Apply NEW HOLLAND AMBRA MASTERTRAN® ULTRACTION lubricant to the cylinder barrel.

12. Carefully insert the complete piston and rod assembly into the barrel.

NOTICE: Use caution not to damage the seals on the retaining ring groove.

13. Push the cylinder head into the cylinder barrel far enough to expose the retaining ring groove, and then install the retaining ring (2).

14. Pull the rod outward to seat the cylinder head (1) against the retaining ring.

15. Install and tighten the set screw (1).

48049004 14/11/2016

35.2 [35.410] / 15

Hydraulic systems - Header or attachment height system

Positioning cylinder - Install - Slave cylinder 1. Install the cylinder to the machine: A. Secure the base (1) of the cylinder with the previously removed clevis pin (2) and cotter pin (3).

NHIL14HT00089AA

1

NHIL14HT00088AA

2

NHIL14HT00086AA

3

NHIL16HT00449AA

4

B. Secure the rod (1) of the cylinder with the previously removed clevis pin (2), lift lock channel (3), four flat washers (4)(two on each side of the cylinder rod), and one cotter pin (5).

2. Remove the cap from the hydraulic hose.

3. Connect the hydraulic hose (1) to the port on the cylinder (1).

4. Torque the fitting to standard hydraulic torque specifications.

5. Lower the header and remove the lifting device (1) from the trail frame (2).

6. Raise the header and remove the blocks from under the cutterbar.

7. Bleed the lift cylinders.

• See Positioning cylinder - Bleed (35.410).

48049004 14/11/2016

35.2 [35.410] / 16

Hydraulic systems - Header or attachment height system

Positioning cylinder - Bleed WARNING Risk of harm during maintenance of the machine!

Before all adjustment, lubrication, and maintenance ALWAYS: 1. Raise the machine. Engage the header lift lock channels.

2. Disengage the Power Take-Off (PTO) drive.

3. Shut off the tractor engine. Remove the key.

4. Engage the tractor parking brake.

5. Make sure that all moving parts have stopped.

Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury.

W1451B

WARNING Pressurized system! Pressurized fluid can penetrate the skin and cause severe injuries.

ALWAYS wear Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) when you service a pressurized hydraulic system.

ALWAYS relieve all hydraulic system pressure. Make sure the system pressure is at zero before you: • Connect or disconnect quick-disconnect coupler hoses.

• Open a line or hose connection.

Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury.

W1396A

WARNING Escaping fluid!

Hydraulic fluid or diesel fuel leaking under pressure can penetrate the skin and cause infection or other injury. To prevent personal injury: Relieve all pressure before disconnecting fluid lines or performing work on the hydraulic system. Before applying pressure, make sure all connections are tight and all components are in good condition. Never use your hand to check for suspected leaks under pressure. Use a piece of cardboard or wood for this purpose. If injured by leaking fluid, see your doctor immediately.

Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury.

W0178A

48049004 14/11/2016

35.2 [35.410] / 17

Hydraulic systems - Header or attachment height system

If the lift cylinders do not lift the header frame evenly, high enough for the header lift lock channels to engage or disengage, or if one side lifts higher than the other, you must re-phase the cylinders as follows: 1. With the tractor-hydraulics remote lever lower the disc mower-conditioner, and then continue to hold the remote lever in the “lower” position for 10 to 15 seconds, or raise the disc mower-conditioner and continue to hold the remote lever in the “raise” position for 10 to 15 seconds.

2. If the lift cylinders on both sides of the machine still do not extend far enough to disengage the header lift lock channels (1), you must bleed out the entrapped air from the hydraulic system.

NHIL13HT00305AA

1

NHIL16HT00027AA

2

NHIL16HT00027AA

3

Bleed air from the lift cylinders Bleed the entrapped air from the lift cylinders as follows: 1. Loosen the hose swivel fitting (1) at the upper end of the slave cylinder on the left-hand side of the machine.

NOTE: Use a shop rag or other shielding means for protection from seeping oil when you loosen the slave cylinder fitting.

2. With the tractor engine at a low idle, move the tractor-hydraulics remote lever to the “raise” position to extend the master lift cylinder, on the right-hand side of the machine, until the oil flow from the slave cylinder loosened fitting is visibly free of air bubbles.

3. Tighten the hose swivel fitting on the slave cylinder.

4. Raise and lower the header several times until all air is bled from the hydraulic system. Repeat the previous steps if necessary.

48049004 14/11/2016

35.2 [35.410] / 18

Hydraulic systems - Header or attachment height system

Header or attachment height system - Troubleshooting Problem The header raises or lowers unevenly.

The header drifts down when in the fully raised position.

Possible Cause There is entrapped air in the system.

The tractor remote does not seal.

Correction Bleed the system. See Positioning cylinder - Bleed (35.410).

Check tractor and repair the remote valves if necessary.

The seals in the cylinder are worn or dam- Replace seals. aged.

48049004 14/11/2016

35.2 [35.410] / 19

Index Hydraulic systems - 35 Header or attachment height system - 410 Header or attachment height system - Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3

Header or attachment height system - Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

19

Positioning cylinder - Assemble - Master cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9

Positioning cylinder - Assemble - Slave cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

15

Positioning cylinder - Bleed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

17

Positioning cylinder - Disassemble - Master cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7

Positioning cylinder - Disassemble - Slave cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

13

Positioning cylinder - Inspect - Master cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8

Positioning cylinder - Inspect - Slave cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

14

Positioning cylinder - Install - Master cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10

Positioning cylinder - Install - Slave cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

16

Positioning cylinder - Remove - Master cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5

Positioning cylinder - Remove - Slave cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11

48049004 14/11/2016

35.2 [35.410] / 20

Hydraulic systems - 35 Header or attachment tilting system - 415

Discbine® 313 Discbine® 316

48049004 14/11/2016

35.3 [35.415] / 1

Contents Hydraulic systems - 35 Header or attachment tilting system - 415

TECHNICAL DATA Cylinder General specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

FUNCTIONAL DATA Header or attachment tilting system Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

SERVICE Cylinder Remove . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Disassemble . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Inspect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Assemble . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Install . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

48049004 14/11/2016

35.3 [35.415] / 2

Hydraulic systems - Header or attachment tilting system

Cylinder - General specification Description Type Bore Stroke Maximum working pressure

Value Single acting cylinder 50.8 mm (2 in) 101.6 mm (4 in) 13790 kPa (2000 psi)

When assembling or overhauling the header tilt cylinder, tighten the following item to the following torque specification.

• Piston locknut: 271 N·m (200 lb ft)

48049004 14/11/2016

35.3 [35.415] / 3

NHIL14HT00072AA

1

Hydraulic systems - Header or attachment tilting system

Header or attachment tilting system - Overview

NHIL14HT00082FA

1

Header tilt circuit The header tilt circuit consists of a single-acting hydraulic cylinder (1) and hose (2) to connect the circuit to the master/ slave header lift circuit.

The header tilt cylinder is teed into the pressure line between the tractor and the header lift master cylinder. When the unit is lowered, the header will drop until it rests on the ground, and the tilt cylinder will then extend to the position determined by the location of the tilt limiter pin (1), Figure 2.

WARNING Moving parts!

Disengage the Power Take-Off (PTO), turn off the engine, and remove the key. Wait for all movement to stop before leaving the operator's position. Never adjust, lubricate, clean, or unplug machine with the engine running.

Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury.

W0112A

48049004 14/11/2016

35.3 [35.415] / 4

Hydraulic systems - Header or attachment tilting system

Tilt limiter pin The tilt angle of the header tilt cylinder is adjustable by changing the position of the tilt limiter pin (1) with the header fully raised and the header tilt cylinder fully retracted.

To set a minimal amount of header tilt, insert the tilt limiter pin and flat washers through the rearmost rod hole, and then secure it with the linchpin. This position of the tilt limiter pin locks the header tilt cylinder in place, preventing the header from tilting.

NHVM13HT00587AA

48049004 14/11/2016

35.3 [35.415] / 5

2

Hydraulic systems - Header or attachment tilting system

Cylinder - Remove WARNING Escaping fluid!

Hydraulic fluid or diesel fuel leaking under pressure can penetrate the skin and cause infection or other injury. To prevent personal injury: Relieve all pressure before disconnecting fluid lines or performing work on the hydraulic system. Before applying pressure, make sure all connections are tight and all components are in good condition. Never use your hand to check for suspected leaks under pressure. Use a piece of cardboard or wood for this purpose. If injured by leaking fluid, see your doctor immediately.

Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury.

W0178A

1. Position wooden support blocks (1) under the front skirt frame (2) of the header.

NOTICE: Make sure that the support blocks are positioned under an area of the skirt that will support the weight of the header.

20002675N

1

NHIL13HT00304AA

2

NHIL14HT00073AA

3

2. Engage the header lift lock channels (1), and then actuate the auxiliary hydraulic valve on the tractor to extend the header tilt cylinder until the skirt frame is resting on the support blocks.

3. Turn off the tractor and remove the key.

4. Make sure all hydraulic pressure is relieved from the header lift and tilt circuit.

5. Disconnect and remove the hydraulic hose (1) from the header tilt cylinder (2).

6. Cap the end of the hydraulic hose to prevent hydraulic contamination.

48049004 14/11/2016

35.3 [35.415] / 6

Hydraulic systems - Header or attachment tilting system

7. Remove the hardware from the base (1) and rod (2) of the header tilt cylinder, and then remove the tilt cylinder from the machine.

• Retain the washers and spacers for installation.

NHIL14HT00074AA

4

NHIL14HT00075AA

5

NHIL14HT00076AA

6

8. Remove the hardware (1) from the lift lock channel (2).

9. Remove the linchpin (1), clevis pin (2) and flat washers to free the lift lock channel (3) from the header tilt cylinder (4).

Next operation: Cylinder - Disassemble (35.415)

48049004 14/11/2016

35.3 [35.415] / 7

Hydraulic systems - Header or attachment tilting system

Cylinder - Disassemble Prior operation: Cylinder - Remove (35.415) 1. Clamp the end of the header tilt cylinder into a vise.

NOTICE: Do not clamp the body of the barrel or cylinder rod into the vise, as the clamping pressure of the vise will distort the body of the barrel and result in oil leakage from the cylinder. Scarring of the cylinder rod will damage the oil seals and result in oil leakage.

2. Loosen and remove the set screw (1).

20002682N

1

20002683N

2

NHIL13RB02245AA

3

3. Using a hammer and punch, tap the cylinder head (1) into the barrel until the cylinder head is 25.4 - 50.8 mm (1 - 2 in) from the top.

4. Remove the retaining ring (2) from the barrel.

5. Remove the rod by grabbing the rod end (1) and pulling rapidly to free the assembly from the barrel.

48049004 14/11/2016

35.3 [35.415] / 8

Hydraulic systems - Header or attachment tilting system

6. Clamp the piston and rod assembly in a vise.

7. Remove the piston locknut (3), piston (2), and cylinder head (1) from the rod.

20002678N

4

20002677N

5

8. Remove the inner half of the rod (1) from the outer half of the rod (2).

Next operation: Cylinder - Inspect (35.415)

48049004 14/11/2016

35.3 [35.415] / 9

Hydraulic systems - Header or attachment tilting system

Cylinder - Inspect Prior operation: Cylinder - Disassemble (35.415) Clean and check the internal surface of the barrel of the cylinder for scratches. Remove any small scratches before assembly of the cylinder. If there are deep grooves in the piston, there most likely are deep grooves worn into the barrel, and the barrel should be replaced. If a barrel shows rust in any area where the O-ring must travel, replace the barrel or entire cylinder assembly.

If there is leakage around the cylinder rod, check the cylinder rod for dents and scratches. If any dents or scratches are found on the rod, replace the cylinder rod.

NOTICE: Do not attempt repair cylinder rod dents or scratches. Attempted repairs will only result in oil leakage.

Inspect the head for high wear or scratches from the rod. If the bore ( 50.8 mm (2 in)) is worn over 0.127 mm (0.005 in), or severely scratched, replace the bore. Remove any sharp edges that may have formed in the bore of the head.

Clean all of the parts with LOCTITE® ODC-FREE CLEANER AND DEGREASER or an equivalent solvent-based cleaner, and then coat the O-ring, seals, head, piston, and the inside of the cylinder barrel with new NEW HOLLAND AMBRA MASTERTRAN® ULTRACTION or an equivalent hydraulic oil.

Next operation: Cylinder - Assemble (35.415)

48049004 14/11/2016

35.3 [35.415] / 10

Hydraulic systems - Header or attachment tilting system

Cylinder - Assemble Prior operation: Cylinder - Inspect (35.415) 1. Apply NEW HOLLAND AMBRA MASTERTRAN® ULTRACTION lubricant to the cylinder head, piston, and seals.

2. Clamp the outer half of the piston rod (1) in a vise.

20002676N

1

20002677N

2

20001727N

3

3. Apply LOCTITE® 242® thread locking compound or an equivalent thread locking compound onto the threads of the outer half of the piston rod.

4. Turn the inner half of the piston rod (1) onto the outer half of the piston rod (2).

5. Install the three piece seal (1) onto the piston.

6. Install the two piece seal (2) onto the cylinder head.

7. Install the rod seal (3) onto the cylinder head.

48049004 14/11/2016

35.3 [35.415] / 11

Hydraulic systems - Header or attachment tilting system

8. Apply NEW HOLLAND AMBRA MASTERTRAN® ULTRACTION lubricant to the rod and cylinder head.

9. Install the cylinder head (1) onto the rod with the two piece seal closest to the piston end.

10. Install the piston (2) onto the rod, and then secure the piston with the locknut (3).

11. Torque the locknut to 210 - 251 N·m (155 - 185 lb ft).

NOTE: Allow the inner piston rod to rotate on the outer piston rod. The torque between the two rods should also be 210 - 251 N·m (155 - 185 lb ft).

20002678N

4

20002679N

5

20002680N

6

12. Remove the assembled piston rod from the vise, and then clamp the cylinder into the vise.

13. Apply NEW HOLLAND AMBRA MASTERTRAN® ULTRACTION lubricant to the cylinder head and barrel.

14. Install the rod into the barrel.

15. Use a hammer and punch to lightly tap the piston rod into the barrel.

• Tap the cylinder head 25.4 - 50.8 mm (1 - 2 in) inches further to install the retaining ring.

16. Install the retaining ring (1) into the barrel.

• Once the retaining ring is inside the bore, move the retaining ring into the firmly seated position in the groove near the end of the barrel.

Next operation: Cylinder - Install (35.415)

48049004 14/11/2016

35.3 [35.415] / 12

Hydraulic systems - Header or attachment tilting system

Cylinder - Install Prior operation: Cylinder - Assemble (35.415) 1. Install the limit channel (1) over the cylinder rod (2).

2. Secure the limit channel by installing the clevis pin (3), flat washers (4), and linchpin (5).

NHIL14HT00077AA

1

NHIL14HT00078AA

2

NHIL14HT00081AA

3

3. Secure the limit channel (1) with one 5/16 x 3-1/2 inch bolt (2) and one 5/16 inch flange nut (3).

4. Apply NEW HOLLAND AMBRA HI TEMP EP GREASE or an equivalent lubricant to the ball joints (1) of the cylinder ends.

5. Install the bushings (2) into the base and rod end of the header tilt cylinder (3).

48049004 14/11/2016

35.3 [35.415] / 13

Hydraulic systems - Header or attachment tilting system

6. Install the header tilt cylinder onto the machine as follows: A. Make sure that the port is facing upward.

B. Secure the base of the cylinder (1) with one 3/4 x 5-1/2 inch bolt (2) Grade (GR) 8, two flat washers (3), two spacers (4), one lock washer (5), and one 3/4 inch locknut (6).

NHIL14HT00079AA

4

NHIL14HT00080AA

5

NHIL13HT00304AA

6

C. Secure the rod of the cylinder (1) with one 3/4 x 5-1/2 inch bolt (2) Grade (GR) 8 , two flat washers (3), two spacers (4), one lock washer (5), and one 3/4 inch locknut (6).

7. Torque both 3/4 inch locknuts to 383 N·m (282 lb ft).

8. Remove the cap from the hydraulic hose (1), and then connect the hose to the port (2) on the header tilt cylinder.

9. Torque the fitting to standard hydraulic torque specifications.

10. Turn on the tractor, and then raise the header completely.

11. Disengage the header lift lock channels (1).

48049004 14/11/2016

35.3 [35.415] / 14

Hydraulic systems - Header or attachment tilting system

12. Remove the support blocks (1) from beneath the skirt frame (2).

20002675N

48049004 14/11/2016

35.3 [35.415] / 15

7

Index Hydraulic systems - 35 Header or attachment tilting system - 415 Cylinder - Assemble . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11

Cylinder - Disassemble . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8

Cylinder - General specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3

Cylinder - Inspect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10

Cylinder - Install . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

13

Cylinder - Remove . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6

Header or attachment tilting system - Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4

48049004 14/11/2016

35.3 [35.415] / 16

Hydraulic systems - 35 Frame positioning swinging - 947

Discbine® 313 Discbine® 316

48049004 14/11/2016

35.4 [35.947] / 1

Contents Hydraulic systems - 35 Frame positioning swinging - 947

TECHNICAL DATA Cylinder General specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

FUNCTIONAL DATA Frame positioning swinging Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

SERVICE Cylinder Remove . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Disassemble . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Inspect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Assemble . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Install . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

Lockout valve Remove . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Install . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

48049004 14/11/2016

35.4 [35.947] / 2

Hydraulic systems - Frame positioning swinging

Cylinder - General specification Description Type Bore Stroke Maximum working pressure

Value Double acting cylinder 76.2 mm (3.0 in) 484 mm (19 in) 20684 kPa (3000 psi)

When assembling or overhauling the tongue swing cylinder, tighten the following item to the following torque specification.

• Piston locknut: 373 - 407 N·m (275 - 300 lb ft)

48049004 14/11/2016

35.4 [35.947] / 3

NHIL14HT00065AA

1

Hydraulic systems - Frame positioning swinging

Frame positioning swinging - Overview

NHIL14HT00071FA

1

Tongue swing circuit The tongue swing circuit consists of a double-acting hydraulic cylinder (1), two lockout valves (2), and hoses (3) to connect the circuit to an auxiliary hydraulic outlet on the tractor.

The center-pivoting tongue allows the operator to maneuver the header from the tractor seat to clear obstacles in the field and to narrow the header for road transport.

WARNING Transport hazard!

ALWAYS engage the header lift lock channels and the tongue swing cylinder lock before road transport. If you fail to engage the locking devices for road transport and then accidentally engage the tractor hydraulics, the machine can drop onto the road surface and swing into oncoming traffic, roadside obstacles, or ditches.

Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury.

W0235A

48049004 14/11/2016

35.4 [35.947] / 4

Hydraulic systems - Frame positioning swinging

Transport lock To engage the transport lock: While standing at the rear of the machine, pull the tongue swing cylinder lockout lever (1) toward the rear of the machine. This will restrict flow in and out of both ports of the hydraulic cylinder, secure the tongue in its current state, and prevent the operator from accidentally actuating the auxiliary hydraulic valve on the tractor.

NHIL13HT00314AA

2

The tongue swing cylinder has a screw-in style orifice plate (1) to control the speed of swing during use; the orifice is 2.38 mm (0.09375 in) in diameter. In addition, the tongue swing cylinder piston is tapered toward the barrel end to control the speed of the cylinder at the end of the stroke.

When retracting, the cylinder moves at a speed controlled by the flow rate from the tractor and the orifice plate. As the leading edge of the piston covers the barrel end port, the flow rate is reduced by the taper of the cylinder to “cushion” the end of the stroke. The piston will continue to move until it gently bottoms out in the cylinder bore.

When extending, the cylinder moves at a speed controlled by the flow rate from the tractor and the orifice plate. As the piston reaches the cylinder head, the metering sleeve (2) enters a counterbore (3) in the cylinder head; this further restricts the flow of oil out of the cylinder, to “cushion” the end of the stroke.

20002690N

3

48049004 14/11/2016

35.4 [35.947] / 5

Hydraulic systems - Frame positioning swinging

Cylinder - Remove WARNING Escaping fluid!

Hydraulic fluid or diesel fuel leaking under pressure can penetrate the skin and cause infection or other injury. To prevent personal injury: Relieve all pressure before disconnecting fluid lines or performing work on the hydraulic system. Before applying pressure, make sure all connections are tight and all components are in good condition. Never use your hand to check for suspected leaks under pressure. Use a piece of cardboard or wood for this purpose. If injured by leaking fluid, see your doctor immediately.

Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury.

W0178A

1. Disconnect the hydraulic hoses (1) and (2) from the ports on the lockout valves. Install caps or plugs in the ends to prevent hydraulic system contamination.

NHIL14HT00056AA

1

NHIL14HT00059AA

2

NHIL14HT00063AA

3

2. Disconnect the lockout valves (1) and (2) from the lockout valve lever (2) by removing the hardware (3) and (4).

3. Remove the bolt (1), and then disconnect the base of the tongue swing cylinder (2) by removing the linchpin (3) and pin assembly (4).

48049004 14/11/2016

35.4 [35.947] / 6

Hydraulic systems - Frame positioning swinging

4. Remove the bolt (1), and then disconnect the rod end of the tongue swing cylinder (2) by removing the linchpin (3) and pin assembly (4).

NHIL14HT00064AA

5. Remove the tongue swing cylinder from the machine.

Next operation: Cylinder - Disassemble (35.947)

48049004 14/11/2016

35.4 [35.947] / 7

4

Hydraulic systems - Frame positioning swinging

Cylinder - Disassemble Prior operation: Cylinder - Remove (35.947) NOTICE: Clean your work area prior to disassembling the tongue swing cylinder to prevent contamination. Hydraulic contamination can cause cylinder failure, resulting in damage to the machine.

1. Loosen the 45 ° elbow fittings (1), and then remove the lockout valve assemblies (2) from the cylinder barrel (3).

NHIL14HT00068AA

1

NHIL14HT00069AA

2

NHIL14HT00067AA

3

2. Clamp the base of the tongue swing cylinder (1) in vise (2). Support the barrel near the cylinder head with a block of wood (3).

NOTICE: Do not clamp the barrel of the cylinder in a vise.

3. Use a large open-ended wrench to loosen and remove the cylinder head (1) from the barrel (2).

48049004 14/11/2016

35.4 [35.947] / 8

Hydraulic systems - Frame positioning swinging

4. Remove the rod (1) and piston (2) from the barrel.

NHIL13RB02271AA

5. Loosen and remove the locknut (3), and then remove the piston assembly (2).

Next operation: Cylinder - Inspect (35.947)

48049004 14/11/2016

35.4 [35.947] / 9

4

Hydraulic systems - Frame positioning swinging

Cylinder - Inspect Prior operation: Cylinder - Disassemble (35.947) The barrel of the cylinder should be cleaned and checked for scratches. Any small scratches should be removed before the cylinder is reassembled. If there are deep grooves in the piston, there most likely will be deep grooves worn into the barrel, and the barrel should be replaced. If a barrel shows rust in any area where the O-ring must travel, it should be replaced.

If there is leakage around the cylinder rod, it should be inspected for dents and scratches. If any dents or scratches are found on the rod, it should be replaced and not repaired.

Inspect the head for high wear or scratches from the rod. If the bore ( 76.2 mm (3 in)) is worn over 0.127 mm (0.005 in), or severely scratched, it should be replaced. Remove any sharp edges that may have formed in the bore of the head.

Clean all of the parts with LOCTITE® ODC-FREE CLEANER AND DEGREASER or an equivalent solvent-based cleaner, and then coat the O-ring, seals, head, piston, and the inside of the cylinder barrel with new, clean NEW HOLLAND AMBRA MASTERTRAN® ULTRACTION or an equivalent hydraulic oil.

Next operation: Cylinder - Assemble (35.947)

48049004 14/11/2016

35.4 [35.947] / 10

Hydraulic systems - Frame positioning swinging

Cylinder - Assemble Prior operation: Cylinder - Inspect (35.947) 1. Remove the worn seals from the piston and cylinder head.

2. Apply a light coating of NEW HOLLAND AMBRA MASTERTRAN® ULTRACTION to lubricate the cylinder head, piston, and seals prior to installing them.

20002690N

1

3. Install the 3-piece seal (1) onto the piston.

4. Install the wear ring (2) onto the piston.

5. Install the O-ring (3) and backup ring (4) onto the cylinder head.

6. Install the inner seal (5) onto the cylinder head.

7. Install the oil seal (6) into the end of the cylinder head.

48049004 14/11/2016

35.4 [35.947] / 11

Hydraulic systems - Frame positioning swinging

8. Install the piston (1) onto the rod (2).

9. Apply two to three drops of LOCTITE® 241 or an equivalent thread locking compound to the threads of the rod, and then install the locknut (3).

10. Torque the locknut to 373 - 407 N·m (275 - 300 lb ft).

NHIL13RB02271AA

2

NHIL14HT00070AA

3

NHIL14HT00069AA

4

NHIL14HT00068AA

5

11. Install the piston and rod assembly (2) into the cylinder barrel (1).

12. Apply 3 drops of LOCTITE® 243™ or an equivalent thread locking compound on the first two threads of the cylinder head, at 120 ° apart.

13. Install and tighten the cylinder head (3) into the barrel.

14. Install the lockout valve assemblies (2), and then tighten the 45 ° elbow fittings (1). Orient the elbow fittings toward the rod end of the cylinder barrel.

Next operation: Cylinder - Install (35.947)

48049004 14/11/2016

35.4 [35.947] / 12

Hydraulic systems - Frame positioning swinging

Cylinder - Install 1. Install the tongue swing cylinder so that the clevis ends are oriented over their clevis pin holes.

2. On the base end (2) of the cylinder, install the pin assembly (4) through the clevis and mounting hole, and then secure it with the bolt (1).

3. Secure the pin with the previously removed 4.7 x 33 millimeter linchpin (3).

NHIL14HT00063AA

1

NHIL14HT00064AA

2

NHIL14HT00062AA

3

NHIL14HT00061AA

4

4. On the rod end (2) of the cylinder, install the pin assembly (4) through the clevis and mounting hole, and then secure it with the bolt (1).

5. Secure the pin with the previously removed 4.7 x 33 millimeter linchpin (3).

6. Install the base end lockout valve assembly (1) to the lockout valve lever (2) with the following components: • Locknut (3) – 3/8 inch • Flat washer (4) • Compression spring (5) • Spacer (6) • Flat washer (7) • Flange bolt (8) – 3/8 x 2 inch

7. Install the rod end lockout valve assembly (1) to the lockout valve lever (2) with the following components: • Locknut (3) – 3/8 inch • Flat washer (4) • Flange bolt (5) – 3/8 x 2 inch

48049004 14/11/2016

35.4 [35.947] / 13

Hydraulic systems - Frame positioning swinging

8. Remove the plugs or caps, and then connect the hydraulic hoses (1) and (2) to the ports on the lockout valves.

9. Tighten the swivel fittings to standard hydraulic torque specifications.

NHIL14HT00056AA

48049004 14/11/2016

35.4 [35.947] / 14

5

Hydraulic systems - Frame positioning swinging

Lockout valve - Remove WARNING Escaping fluid!

Hydraulic fluid or diesel fuel leaking under pressure can penetrate the skin and cause infection or other injury. To prevent personal injury: Relieve all pressure before disconnecting fluid lines or performing work on the hydraulic system. Before applying pressure, make sure all connections are tight and all components are in good condition. Never use your hand to check for suspected leaks under pressure. Use a piece of cardboard or wood for this purpose. If injured by leaking fluid, see your doctor immediately.

Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury.

W0178A

1. Disconnect the hydraulic hoses (1) and (2) from the ports on the lockout valves. Install caps or plugs in the ends to prevent hydraulic system contamination.

NHIL14HT00056AA

1

NHIL14HT00059AA

2

NHIL13HT00106AA

3

2. Disconnect and remove the lockout valve lever (1) by removing the hardware (2).

3. On both ends of the tongue swing cylinder, remove the hardware (1) to free the channel (2) from the lockout valve (3). Retain the channel for assembly at a later time.

48049004 14/11/2016

35.4 [35.947] / 15

Hydraulic systems - Frame positioning swinging

4. Loosen the hydraulic fittings (1), and then remove the lockout valves (2) from the ports on the tongue swing cylinder.

5. Remove the 45 ° elbow, 90 ° elbow, and union from the lockout valve assembly.

NHIL13HT00107AA

48049004 14/11/2016

35.4 [35.947] / 16

4

Hydraulic systems - Frame positioning swinging

Lockout valve - Install 1. On the replacement lockout valve, remove one plastic plug (1) for viewing the internal valve ball.

2. Rotate the lockout valve handle (3) until the valve is closed. Look down the open end to make sure that the ball is in the closed position.

3. Loosen and remove the hex socket screw (2), and then discard the handle and one plastic washer. Retain the hex socket screw, the shouldered spacer, the notched washer, and one plastic washer.

NHIL14HT00114AA

1

NHIL14HT00115AA

2

NHIL14HT00129AA

3

4. Re-install the plastic washer (1).

5. Rotate the notched washer (2) to the position shown, and then re-install it onto the lockout valve.

NOTE: It is important that the pin (1) be on the right-hand side as shown when looking down onto the lockout valve.

48049004 14/11/2016

35.4 [35.947] / 17

Hydraulic systems - Frame positioning swinging

6. Assemble the lockout valve with the following components: • Channel (3), removed during the removal procedure.

Orient the channel as shown.

• Rubber washer (4) • Steel washer (5) • Shouldered spacer (6) • Hex socket screw (7), #10-24 x 3/8 inch NOTE: The plastic washer (1) and notched washer (2) are already installed but shown for reference in Figure 4.

7. Apply LOCTITE® 243™ or an equivalent thread locking compound to the threads of the #10 x 3/8 inch hex socket screw, and then tighten it until the lockout valve and channel assembly is secure.

NHIL14HT00113BA

4

NHIL14HT00108AA

5

NHIL14HT00109AA

6

8. Install the previously removed 45 ° elbow (1), union (2), and 90 ° elbow (3) as shown, and then install the lockout valve assembly to the tongue swing cylinder (4).

On the port at the base of the tongue swing cylinder, orient the lockout valve so that it is facing toward the front of the machine with the 90 ° elbow (3A) pointing forward.

On the port at the rod of the tongue swing cylinder, orient the lockout valve so that it is facing toward the front of the machine with the 90 ° elbow (3B) pointing rearward and angled down approximately 15 ° to allow the hose to route under the lockout valve lever.

48049004 14/11/2016

35.4 [35.947] / 18

Hydraulic systems - Frame positioning swinging

9. Install the base end lockout valve assembly (1) to the lockout valve lever (2) with the following components: • Locknut (3), 3/8 inch • Flat washer (4) • Compression spring (5) • Spacer (6) • Flat washer (7) • Flange bolt (8), 3/8 inch x 2 inch

NHIL14HT00062AA

7

NHIL14HT00061AA

8

NHIL14HT00056AA

9

10. Install the rod end lockout valve assembly (1) to the lockout valve lever (2) with the following components: • Locknut (3), 3/8 inch • Flat washer (4) • Flange bolt (5), 3/8 inch x 1 inch NOTE: Tighten locknuts as required such that the lockout valve lever is snug, but will move freely to open and close the valves.

11. Remove the plugs or caps, and then connect the hydraulic hoses (1) and (2) to the ports on the lockout valves. Route the hoses as shown with hose (2) passing under the lockout valve lever.

12. Tighten all hardware and fittings not previously tightened to standard torque specifications.

13. Install cable ties to tie the hoses together at two locations at (3) as shown.

NOTE: Closed position is shown in Figure 9. Push lockout valve lever forward to open valves.

48049004 14/11/2016

35.4 [35.947] / 19

Index Hydraulic systems - 35 Frame positioning swinging - 947 Cylinder - Assemble . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11

Cylinder - Disassemble . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8

Cylinder - General specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3

Cylinder - Inspect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10

Cylinder - Install . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

13

Cylinder - Remove . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6

Frame positioning swinging - Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4

Lockout valve - Install . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

17

Lockout valve - Remove . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

15

48049004 14/11/2016

35.4 [35.947] / 20

48049004 14/11/2016

35.4 [35.947] / 21

CNH Industrial America New Holland Site 100 Brubaker Avenue New Holland, Pennsylvania United States 17557 SERVICE - Technical Publications & Tools

PRINTED IN U.S.A. © 2016 CNH Industrial America LLC. All rights reserved. No part of the text or illustrations of this publication may be reproduced.

NEW HOLLAND policy is one of continuous improvement and the right to change prices, specification or equipment at any time without notices is reserved.

All data given in this publication is subject to production variations. Dimensions and weight are approximate only and the illustrations do not necessarily show products in standard condition. For exact information about any particular product, please consult your NEW HOLLAND Dealer.

48049004 14/11/2016 EN

SERVICE MANUAL Wheels Discbine® 313 Discbine® 316

48049004 14/11/2016

44

Contents Wheels - 44

[44.530] Carrying and transport wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44.1

48049004 14/11/2016

44

Wheels - 44 Carrying and transport wheels - 530

Discbine® 313 Discbine® 316

48049004 14/11/2016

44.1 [44.530] / 1

Contents Wheels - 44 Carrying and transport wheels - 530

SERVICE Transport wheel Remove - Wheel and tire assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Install - Wheel and tire assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Remove - Wheel hub assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Disassemble - Wheel hub assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Assemble - Wheel hub assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Install - Wheel hub assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Remove - Wheel arm assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Install - Wheel arm assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

48049004 14/11/2016

44.1 [44.530] / 2

Wheels - Carrying and transport wheels

Transport wheel - Remove - Wheel and tire assembly 1. Leave the machine attached to the tractor.

2. Pivot the lock lever (1) forward on both the left-hand and right-hand sides of the machine.

3. Fully raise the header completely to engage the header lift lock channels (2).

4. Lower the header so that the cylinder body rests onto the top of the header lift lock channel.

NHIL16HT00023BA

1

NHIL16HT00024AA

2

NHIL16HT00001AA

3

5. Use a jack to lift the trail frame (2), and then support the wheel arm (1) with a suitable jack stand.

6. Loosen and remove the wheel lug bolts (1).

NOTE: If the wheel lug bolts are difficult to remove, break loose the bolts when the weight of the machine is on the wheel and tire assembly.

7. Remove the tire and wheel assembly (2) from the machine.

48049004 14/11/2016

44.1 [44.530] / 3

Wheels - Carrying and transport wheels

Transport wheel - Install - Wheel and tire assembly 1. Install the tire and wheel assembly (2) onto the wheel hub.

2. Install the wheel lug bolts (1).

3. Torque the wheel lug bolts to 230 N·m (150 lb ft) as per the torque specification decal (3).

4. Check the torque of the wheel lug bolts after 2 hours of operation, after 10 hours of operation, and every 50 hours of operation thereafter.

5. Check and inflate the tires to 248 kPa (36 psi). Limit highway transport speeds to 32 km/h (20 mph) to prevent tire failures.

NHIL16HT00001AA

1

NHIL16HT00024AA

2

6. Use a jack to raise the trail frame, and then remove the supporting jack stand.

7. Lower the trail frame and remove the jack.

8. Pivot the lock lever (1) rearward on both the left-hand and right-hand sides of the machine.

9. Raise the header slightly so that the header lift lock channels (2) disengage from the lift cylinders.

10. Fully lower the header.

48049004 14/11/2016

44.1 [44.530] / 4

Wheels - Carrying and transport wheels

Transport wheel - Remove - Wheel hub assembly 1. Remove the wheel and tire assembly (1).

• See Transport wheel - Remove - Wheel and tire assembly (44.530).

2. Remove the hub cap (2) from the wheel hub assembly.

NHIL16HT00001AA

1

NHIL16HT00455AA

2

3. Remove the cotter pin (1) and the castellated nut (2).

4. Remove the wheel hub assembly (3) from the wheel arm assembly (4).

48049004 14/11/2016

44.1 [44.530] / 5

Wheels - Carrying and transport wheels

Transport wheel - Disassemble - Wheel hub assembly 1. Remove the bearing cones (1) and (2) from the wheel hub assembly.

NHIL16HT00456AA

1

NHIL16HT00457AA

2

2. Remove the bearing cups (3) and (4) from the wheel hub assembly.

3. Wipe away any excess grease and thoroughly clean the wheel hub with LOCTITE® ODC-FREE CLEANER AND DEGREASER or a suitable solvent.

4. Inspect the inner bore of the wheel hub for damage and replace if necessary.

48049004 14/11/2016

44.1 [44.530] / 6

Wheels - Carrying and transport wheels

Transport wheel - Assemble - Wheel hub assembly 1. Apply a thin film of NEW HOLLAND AMBRA HI TEMP EP GREASE to the inner bore of the wheel hub.

2. Press in new bearing cups (1) and (2) flush against the inside shoulder of the wheel hub.

• The 82 mm (3.23 in) OD bearing cup should be pressed in approximately 17 mm (0.67 in) past the rear edge of the wheel hub.

• The 59.16 mm (2.33 in) OD bearing cup should be pressed in approximately 19.1 mm (0.75 in) past the front edge of the wheel hub.

NOTICE: Always use new bearing cups when you replace the bearing cones in the wheel hub.

NHIL16HT00452AA

1

NHIL16HT00459AA

2

3. Thoroughly pack the new bearing cones with NEW HOLLAND AMBRA HI TEMP EP GREASE. 4. Install the new bearing cones (3) and (4) into the wheel hub.

5. Install a new grease seal (1) so that the sealing lip faces outward into the rear of the wheel hub.

48049004 14/11/2016

44.1 [44.530] / 7

Wheels - Carrying and transport wheels

Transport wheel - Install - Wheel hub assembly 1. Apply NEW HOLLAND AMBRA HI TEMP EP GREASE to the wheel hub shaft (1).

2. Install the wheel hub assembly (2) onto the wheel hub shaft.

3. Secure the wheel hub assembly to the wheel hub shaft with the previously removed flat washer (3) and the castellated nut (4).

NHIL16HT00458AA

1

NHIL16HT00454AA

2

4. Tighten the castellated nut only until the wheel hub has little free play (front to back) but still rotates smoothly.

5. Back the castellated nut off so that the cotter hole aligns with the next closest slot.

6. Secure the castellated nut with the cotter pin (1).

• Bend the legs of the cotter pin open.

7. Install the wheel and tire assembly (1) and torque the wheel lug bolts to 203 N·m (150 lb ft).

• See Transport wheel - Install - Wheel and tire assembly (44.530).

48049004 14/11/2016

44.1 [44.530] / 8

Wheels - Carrying and transport wheels

Transport wheel - Remove - Wheel arm assembly 1. Lower the header so that the cutterbar rests on the ground.

2. Use a suitable lifting device and strap (1) to support the weight of the trail frame (2) on the side from which you are removing the wheel arm assembly.

NHIL16HT00449AA

1

NHIL16HT00001AA

2

NHIL14HT00086AA

3

NHIL16HT00464AA

4

3. Remove the wheel and tire assembly (1).

• See Transport wheel - Remove - Wheel and tire assembly (44.530).

4. Support the weight of the wheel arm assembly before you disconnect the slave cylinder.

5. Remove the cotter pin (2), washers, and clevis pin (1) that secures the header lift lock channel (4) and the slave cylinder (3) to the machine.

6. Remove the 5/16 x 2 inch roll pin (1), collar (2), shims (3), and the pin assembly (4) that secure the lift arm (5) to the wheel arm assembly (6).

48049004 14/11/2016

44.1 [44.530] / 9

Wheels - Carrying and transport wheels

7. Remove the 3/8 x 3 inch roll pin (1), collar (2), shims (3), and pin assembly (4) that secure the wheel arm assembly (5) to the trail frame (6).

8. Remove the wheel arm assembly from the machine.

NHIL16HT00466AA

48049004 14/11/2016

44.1 [44.530] / 10

5

Wheels - Carrying and transport wheels

Transport wheel - Install - Wheel arm assembly 1. Apply NEW HOLLAND AMBRA HI TEMP EP GREASE to the bushings in the lift arm and the wheel arm assembly.

2. Position the wheel arm assembly (1) into place and install the pin assembly (2).

3. Install the same amount of shims (3) as removed; make sure that there is 0 - 0.8 mm (0 - 0.031 in) free play in the pin assembly after the collar and roll pin are secure.

4. Install the collar (4) and secure with the 3/8 x 3 inch roll pin (5).

NHIL16HT00467AA

1

NHIL16HT00465AA

2

NHIL14HT00088AA

3

NHIL16HT00449AA

4

5. Position the lift arm (1) into place and install the pin assembly (2).

6. Install the same amount of shims (3) as removed; make sure that there is 0 - 0.8 mm (0 - 0.031 in) free play in the pin assembly after the collar and roll pin are secure.

7. Install the collar (4) and secure with the 5/16 x 2 inch roll pin (5).

Secure the rod (1) of the hydraulic cylinder with the previously removed clevis pin (2), lift lock channel (3), four flat washers (4) (two on each side of the cylinder rod), and one cotter pin (5).

8. Install the wheel and tire assembly (1) and torque the wheel lug bolts to 203 N·m (150 lb ft).

• See Transport wheel - Install - Wheel and tire assembly (44.530).

9. Lower the trail frame (2) and remove the lifting strap (1).

48049004 14/11/2016

44.1 [44.530] / 11

Index Wheels - 44 Carrying and transport wheels - 530 Transport wheel - Assemble - Wheel hub assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7

Transport wheel - Disassemble - Wheel hub assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6

Transport wheel - Install - Wheel and tire assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4

Transport wheel - Install - Wheel arm assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11

Transport wheel - Install - Wheel hub assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8

Transport wheel - Remove - Wheel and tire assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3

Transport wheel - Remove - Wheel arm assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9

Transport wheel - Remove - Wheel hub assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5

48049004 14/11/2016

44.1 [44.530] / 12

48049004 14/11/2016

44.1 [44.530] / 13

CNH Industrial America New Holland Site 100 Brubaker Avenue New Holland, Pennsylvania United States 17557 SERVICE - Technical Publications & Tools

PRINTED IN U.S.A. © 2016 CNH Industrial America LLC. All rights reserved. No part of the text or illustrations of this publication may be reproduced.

NEW HOLLAND policy is one of continuous improvement and the right to change prices, specification or equipment at any time without notices is reserved.

All data given in this publication is subject to production variations. Dimensions and weight are approximate only and the illustrations do not necessarily show products in standard condition. For exact information about any particular product, please consult your NEW HOLLAND Dealer.

48049004 14/11/2016 EN

SERVICE MANUAL Electrical systems Discbine® 313 Discbine® 316

48049004 14/11/2016

55

Contents Electrical systems - 55

[55.000] Electrical system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55.1 [55.100] Harnesses and connectors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55.2 [55.404] External lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55.3

48049004 14/11/2016

55

Electrical systems - 55 Electrical system - 000

Discbine® 313 Discbine® 316

48049004 14/11/2016

55.1 [55.000] / 1

Contents Electrical systems - 55 Electrical system - 000

FUNCTIONAL DATA Electrical system Component localization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

48049004 14/11/2016

55.1 [55.000] / 2

Electrical systems - Electrical system

Electrical system - Component localization

NHIL14HT00083FA

1

Hydraulic systems overview For identification of connectors and wiring harnesses, see Wiring harnesses - Identification (55.100).

48049004 14/11/2016

55.1 [55.000] / 3

Electrical systems - Electrical system

(1) Left-hand flashing light

4.0 m (13 ft) units

(2) Right-hand flashing light The flashing lights mount on each side of the machine, facing forward and rearward. The flashing lights provide for increased visibility from bystanders and traffic during road transportation.

(3) Left-hand brake/tail light (4) Right-hand brake/tail light The combination brake/tail lights allow for awareness of turning or stopping operations to other bystanders or vehicles.

NHIL16HT00008AB

2

4.9 m (16 ft) units

NHIL16HT00010AA

(5) Lighting control module (if equipped) The implement lighting control module (5) mounts behind a protective cover on the left-hand side of the machine at the base of the tongue.

Machines that do not have an implement lighting control module will instead have a small jumper harness (A) on the machine wiring harness.

48049004 14/11/2016

55.1 [55.000] / 4

19994424

4

93110023

5

3

Electrical systems - Electrical system

(6) Trailer lighting connector The wire harness uses a 7-pin trailer connector (6) which conforms to SAE J560 standard. A storage mount (A) for the trailer connector is provided on the top of the tongue; press the connector into the mount and rotate the connector 1/4 turn to latch it in the mount.

NHPH12RB00053AA

1431-1-28

48049004 14/11/2016

55.1 [55.000] / 5

7

6

Index Electrical systems - 55 Electrical system - 000 Electrical system - Component localization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

48049004 14/11/2016

55.1 [55.000] / 6

3

Electrical systems - 55 Harnesses and connectors - 100

Discbine® 313 Discbine® 316

48049004 14/11/2016

55.2 [55.100] / 1

Contents Electrical systems - 55 Harnesses and connectors - 100

FUNCTIONAL DATA Wiring harnesses Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Electrical schematic sheet 01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

Wire connectors Component diagram 00 - Connectors X-000 to X-009 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Component diagram 02 - Connectors X-020 to X-029 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Component diagram 03 - Connectors X-030 to X-039 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

Electrical components ECU description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Lamp description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

48049004 14/11/2016

55.2 [55.100] / 2

Electrical systems - Harnesses and connectors

Wiring harnesses - Identification

NHIL16HT00396FA

1

Wiring harness identification Color Blue Red

Description Tongue (TH) harness Lighting (LT) harness

Wiring connector identification Item (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10) (11) (12) (13) (14) (15) (16)

Connector X-023 X-024 X-025 X-022 X-021 X-026 X-027 X-029 X-030 X-031 X-003B X-003A X-002 X-002B X-005B X-005A X-001

Description Left-hand brake/tail light ground terminal Left-hand tail light signal Left-hand brake light signal Left-hand flashing light signal Left-hand flashing light ground terminal Right-hand flashing light ground terminal Right-hand flashing light signal Right-hand brake/tail light ground terminal Right-hand tail light signal Right-hand brake light signal Lighting harness (LT) to tongue harness (TH) connector Tongue harness (TH) to lighting harness (LT) connector Jumper plug or lighting control module connector Jumper plug connector Brake signal in-line connector Brake signal in-line connector Vehicle trailer lighting connector

48049004 14/11/2016

55.2 [55.100] / 3

Electrical systems - Harnesses and connectors

Wiring harnesses - Electrical schematic sheet 01 Type Module

Component A-001

Lamp

E-001

Lamp

E-002

Lamp

E-003

Lamp

E-004

Connector / Link – X-021 X-022 X-026 X-027 X-023 X-024 X-025 X-029 X-030 X-031

48049004 14/11/2016

55.2 [55.100] / 4

Description Lighting control module LH Flashing light RH Flashing light LH Brake/tail light

RH Brake/tail light

Electrical systems - Harnesses and connectors

NHIL16HT00393JA

1

48049004 14/11/2016

55.2 [55.100] / 5

Electrical systems - Harnesses and connectors

48049004 14/11/2016

55.2 [55.100] / 6

Electrical systems - Harnesses and connectors

Wire connectors - Component diagram 00 - Connectors X-000 to X-009 X-001 - Vehicle trailer lighting connector (84137504) (Female)

84137504

1

84137504 Pin 1 3 4 5 6

From SP-A SP-B X-005A (Female) pin 1 SP-C X-003A (Female) pin 1

Wire TH-001A TH-003B TH-004 TH-005C TH-006

Description Ground Left turn signal Brake signal Right turn signal Tail lights signal

NHIL16HT00781AA

Color-Size WH-3.0 YE-2.0 RD-2.0 GN-2.0 BR-2.0

Frame SHEET 01

2

Connector X-001 plugs into the vehicle trailer light connector. When not in use connector X-001 (1) stores in a holster (2) on top of the tongue.

48049004 14/11/2016

55.2 [55.100] / 7

Electrical systems - Harnesses and connectors

X-002 - Jumper plug or lighting control module (87694112) (Female)

87694112

3

87694112 1 2 3 4 5

Pin

From SP-B SP-C X-005B (Male) pin 1 SP-A X-003A (Female) pin 3

Wire TH-008B TH-011C TH-017 TH-007A TH-009

6

X-003A (Female) pin 2

TH-010

Description Left turn signal Right turn signal Brake signal Ground Left–hand brake light signal Right–hand brake light signal

NHIL16HT00780AA

Color-Size YE - 1.0 GN-2.0 RD-1.0 WH-1.0 OR-1.0

Frame SHEET 01

VT-1.0

4

Connector X-002 (1) plugs into a brake lights jumper plug (2) or an optional lighting control module, if required.

48049004 14/11/2016

55.2 [55.100] / 8

Electrical systems - Harnesses and connectors

X-002B - Jumper plug (87694152) (Male)

87694152

5

87694152 3 5

Pin SP-6 SP-6

From

Wire JP-001 JP-002

6

SP-6

JP-003

Description Brake signal Left–hand brake light signal Right–hand brake light signal

NHIL16HT00780AA

6

Connector X-002B (1) is a factory brake lights jumper plug.

48049004 14/11/2016

55.2 [55.100] / 9

Color-Size BL-2.0 BL-2.0 BL-2.0

Frame SHEET 01

Electrical systems - Harnesses and connectors

X-003A - Tongue harness (TH) to lighting harness (LT) connector (87694152) (Female)

87694152

7

87694152 1 2

Pin

From X-001 (Female) pin 6 X-002 (Female) pin 6

Wire TH-006 TH-010

3 4 5 6

X-002 (Female) pin 5 SP-A SP-C SP-B

TH-009 TH-013A TH-016C TH-015B

Description Tail lights signal Right–hand brake light signal Left-hand brake light signal Ground Right turn signal Left turn signal

NHIL16HT00778AA

Color-Size BR-2.0 VT-1.0

Frame SHEET 01

OR-1.0 WH-2.0 GN-2.0 YE-2.0

8

Connector X-003A (1) connects the tongue harness (TH) to the lighting harness (LT).

48049004 14/11/2016

55.2 [55.100] / 10

Electrical systems - Harnesses and connectors

X-003B - Lighting harness (LT) to tongue harness (TH) connector (87694112) (Male)

87694112

9

87694112 1 2

Pin

From SP–D X-031 (Female) pin 1

Wire LT-006D LT-010

3 4 5 6

X-025 (Female) pin 1 SP-AA X-027 (Female) pin 1 X-022 (Female) pin 1

LT-009 LT-013A LT-016 LT-015

Description Tail lights signal Right–hand brake light signal Left-hand brake light signal Ground Right turn signal Left turn signal

NHIL16HT00778AA

Color-Size BR-1.0 VT-1.0

Frame SHEET 01

OR-2.0 WH-2.0 GN-2.0 YE-2.0

10

Connector X-003B (1) connects the lighting harness (LT) to the tongue harness (TH).

48049004 14/11/2016

55.2 [55.100] / 11

Electrical systems - Harnesses and connectors

X-005A - Brake signal in-line connector (87697528) (Female)

87697528

11

87697528 Pin 1

From SP–D

Wire TH-004

Description Brake signal

NHIL16HT00802AA

Color-Size RD-2.0

12

Connector X-005A (1) is an in-line connector for the vehicle brake signal.

48049004 14/11/2016

55.2 [55.100] / 12

Frame SHEET 01

Electrical systems - Harnesses and connectors

X-005B - Brake signal in-line connector (87697527) (Male)

87697527

13

87697527 Pin 1

From X-002 (Female) pin 3

Wire TH-017

Description Brake signal

NHIL16HT00802AA

Color-Size RD-1.0

14

Connector X-005B (1) is an in-line connector for the vehicle brake signal.

48049004 14/11/2016

55.2 [55.100] / 13

Frame SHEET 01

Electrical systems - Harnesses and connectors

Wire connectors - Component diagram 02 - Connectors X-020 to X-029 X-021 - Left-hand flashing light ground terminal (84301910) (Female)

84301910

1

84301910 Pin 1

From SP-AA

Wire LT-018A

Description Left-hand flashing light ground

NHIL16HT00779AA

Color-Size WH - 2.0

Frame SHEET 01

2

Connector X-021 (1) terminates at the left-hand flashing light threaded lamp mounting base.

48049004 14/11/2016

55.2 [55.100] / 14

Electrical systems - Harnesses and connectors

X-022 - Left-hand flashing light signal (84120010) (Female)

84120010

3

84120010 Pin 1

From X-003B (Male) pin 6

Wire LT-015

Description Left-hand flashing light signal

NHIL16HT00779AA

Color-Size YE - 2.0

4

Connector X-022 (1) connects to the left-hand flashing light signal lead.

48049004 14/11/2016

55.2 [55.100] / 15

Frame SHEET 01

Electrical systems - Harnesses and connectors

X-023 - Left-hand brake/tail light ground terminal (84301910) (Female)

84301910

5

84301910 Pin 1

From SP-AA

Wire LT-020A

Description Left-hand brake/tail light ground

NHIL16HT00779AA

Color-Size WH - 2.0

Frame SHEET 01

6

Connector X-023 (1) terminates at the left-hand brake/tail light threaded lamp mounting base.

48049004 14/11/2016

55.2 [55.100] / 16

Electrical systems - Harnesses and connectors

X-024 - Left-hand tail light signal (84120010) (Female)

84120010

7

84120010 Pin 1

From SP-D

Wire LT-022D

Description Left-hand tail light signal

NHIL16HT00779AA

8

Connector X-024 (1) connects to the left-hand tail light signal lead.

48049004 14/11/2016

55.2 [55.100] / 17

Color-Size BR - 2.0

Frame SHEET 01

Electrical systems - Harnesses and connectors

X-025 - Left-hand brake light signal (84120010) (Female)

84120010

9

84120010 Pin 1

From X-003B (Male) pin 3

Wire LT-009

Description Color-Size Left-hand brake light signal OR - 2.0

NHIL16HT00779AA

10

Connector X-025 (1) connects to the left-hand brake light signal lead.

48049004 14/11/2016

55.2 [55.100] / 18

Frame SHEET 01

Electrical systems - Harnesses and connectors

X-026 - Right-hand flashing light ground terminal (84301910) (Female)

84301910

11

84301910 Pin 1

From SP-AA

Wire LT-017A

Description Right-hand flashing light ground

NHIL16HT00406AA

Color-Size WH - 2.0

Frame SHEET 01

12

Connector X-026 (1) terminates at the right-hand flashing light threaded lamp mounting base.

48049004 14/11/2016

55.2 [55.100] / 19

Electrical systems - Harnesses and connectors

X-027 - Right-hand flashing light signal (84120010) (Female)

84120010

13

84120010 Pin 1

From X-003B (Male) pin 5

Wire LT-016

Description Right-hand flashing light signal

NHIL16HT00406AA

Color-Size GN - 2.0

14

Connector X-027 (1) connects to the right-hand flashing light signal lead.

48049004 14/11/2016

55.2 [55.100] / 20

Frame SHEET 01

Electrical systems - Harnesses and connectors

X-029 - Right-hand brake/tail light ground terminal (84301910) (Female)

84301910

15

84301910 Pin 1

From SP-AA

Wire LT-019A

Description Right-hand brake/tail light ground

NHIL16HT00406AA

Color-Size WH - 2.0

Frame SHEET 01

16

Connector X-029 (1) terminates at the right-hand brake/tail light threaded lamp mounting base.

48049004 14/11/2016

55.2 [55.100] / 21

Electrical systems - Harnesses and connectors

Wire connectors - Component diagram 03 - Connectors X-030 to X-039 X-030 - Right-hand tail light signal (84120010) (Female)

84120010

1

84120010 Pin 1

From SP-D

Wire LT-021D

Description Color-Size Right-hand tail light signal BR - 2.0

NHIL16HT00406AA

2

Connector X-030 (1) connects to the right-hand tail light signal lead.

48049004 14/11/2016

55.2 [55.100] / 22

Frame SHEET 01

Electrical systems - Harnesses and connectors

X-031 - Right-hand brake light signal (84120010) (Female)

84120010

3

84120010 Pin 1

From X-003B (Male) pin 2

Wire LT-010

Description Right-hand brake light signal

NHIL16HT00406AA

Color-Size VT - 2.0

4

Connector X-031 (1) connects to the right-hand brake light signal lead.

48049004 14/11/2016

55.2 [55.100] / 23

Frame SHEET 01

Electrical systems - Harnesses and connectors

Electrical components - ECU description A-001 - Lighting control module (ECU) Component Type Wiring frames Connectors Functional information Service information

ECU SHEET 01 X-002 External lighting - Overview (55.404) Lighting control module - Remove (if equipped) (55.404) Lighting control module - Install (if equipped) (55.404)

48049004 14/11/2016

55.2 [55.100] / 24

Electrical systems - Harnesses and connectors

Electrical components - Lamp description E-001 - LH Flashing light (Lamp) Component Type Wiring frames Connectors

Lamp SHEET 01 X-021 X-022

E-002 - RH Flashing light (Lamp) Component Type Wiring frames Connectors

Lamp SHEET 01 X-026 X-027

E-003 - LH Brake/tail light (Lamp) Component Type Wiring frames Connectors

Lamp SHEET 01 X-023 X-024 X-025

E-004 - RH Brake/tail light (Lamp) Component Type Wiring frames Connectors

Lamp SHEET 01 X-029 X-030 X-031

48049004 14/11/2016

55.2 [55.100] / 25

Index Electrical systems - 55 Harnesses and connectors - 100 Electrical components - ECU description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

24

Electrical components - Lamp description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

25

Wire connectors - Component diagram 00 - Connectors X-000 to X-009 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7

Wire connectors - Component diagram 02 - Connectors X-020 to X-029 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

14

Wire connectors - Component diagram 03 - Connectors X-030 to X-039 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

22

Wiring harnesses - Electrical schematic sheet 01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4

Wiring harnesses - Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3

48049004 14/11/2016

55.2 [55.100] / 26

Electrical systems - 55 External lighting - 404

Discbine® 313 Discbine® 316

48049004 14/11/2016

55.3 [55.404] / 1

Contents Electrical systems - 55 External lighting - 404

FUNCTIONAL DATA External lighting Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

SERVICE Lighting control module Remove (if equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Install (if equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

48049004 14/11/2016

55.3 [55.404] / 2

Electrical systems - External lighting

External lighting - Overview The following chart details the transport light operation with a seven-pin male connector that conforms to SAE J560.

Tractor lights Headlights “OFF” Headlights “ON” Amber flashing lights “OFF” Amber flashing lights “ON” Brake lamps* (brakes applied) amber flashing lamps “ON” — no turn indicated (no tractor brake lamps) Amber flashing lamps “ON” —no turn indicated (no tractor brake lamps) Left turn Indicated Right turn indicated

Implement lights Right red Off Dim -

Right amber Off

Left amber Off

Left red Off Dim -

Flashing (same rate as right) Flashing (same rate as right)

-

-

Bright* Bright*

Bright* Bright*

Flashing (same rate as right)

Off**

Off**

Increased flash rate

Illuminated, no Off, dim, or flashing*** Off or dim flashing in unison with left Off or dim Off, dim or flashing*** Increased flash rate in unison with right

Illuminated, no flashing

Flashing (same rate as left) Flashing (same rate as left)

Flashing (same rate as left)

NOTE: Check local laws or regulations concerning agricultural machinery lighting and marking.

NOTE: It is recommended that headlights be illuminated, “ON”, for traveling on roads.

The following must be checked prior to transporting the machine on public roads: • Implement brake lights (red) to illuminate when tractor brakes applied (tractor with brake lights).

• If tractor is not equipped with brake lights, install the implement light control module. See the operator’s manual for installation.

• Brake light (red) flashes in unison with amber flasher indicating direction of turn if the tractor is not equipped with brake lights — requires implement light control module. See the operator’s manual for installation.

NOTE: The lighting control box is used to control the amber lamps and brake light circuits. The tail lamps are on only when the tractor park or road lights are on.

48049004 14/11/2016

55.3 [55.404] / 3

Electrical systems - External lighting

The SAE J560 standard provides that the number (4) conductor (red wire) socket of the propelling vehicle is connected to the brake light circuit so that the brake lights activate when the brake pedal is depressed.

Most tractors are wired to provide the brake light signal through the number (4) pin in the connector socket. Some model tractors do not provide this capability. On these tractors, the brake lights on trailing implements will not function; however, hazard, turn, and tail lamps will function.

The disc mower-conditioner trailing light wire harness uses a 7-pin trailer connector to connect the mower-conditioner to a tractor electrical socket which conforms to the SAE J560 standard.

For proper light function, this unit must be connected to a tractor incorporating a 7-pin conductor electrical socket which conforms to SAE J560. If your tractor does not have a 7-pin conductor electrical socket, obtain a connector socket from your NEW HOLLAND dealer.

Socket installation Use the tractor wiring diagram or, if necessary, use a test light to identify the tractor wires. Connect the wires to the socket as follows: Pin 1

Connector ID White (WHT)

2 3 4

Brown (BRN) Blue (BLU) Green (GRN)

5 6

Red (RED) Yellow (YEL)

7

Black (BLK)

Attached To Ground wire, all lights Taillights Not used Right side amber light Brake lights Left side amber light Not used

19987865

1

19994424

2

NOTE: On some tractors, the Number 4 pin in the socket is utilized for other functions. Therefore, this circuit may be on all the time or any time the key switch is on. This will cause the trailing implement brake lights to be on all the time.

If you have one of these tractors, the brake light circuit can be disabled by disconnecting the bullet connector located in the wire harness where it attaches to the lighting control box (1).

NOTICE: When you later attach the machine to a standard electrical socket on propelling vehicle, the brake light circuit must be reconnected to function.

NOTICE: If this machine is to be transported on the highway, the propelling vehicle must be equipped with the appropriate electrical socket so that the brake lights function.

48049004 14/11/2016

55.3 [55.404] / 4

Electrical systems - External lighting

Lighting control module - Remove (if equipped) 1. Remove the four bolts (1) and nuts holding the guard to the frame.

2. Disconnect the electrical connector (2) from the control box.

3. Remove the two control box mounting bolts (3).

4. Remove the control box from the machine.

20005568

48049004 14/11/2016

55.3 [55.404] / 5

1

Electrical systems - External lighting

Lighting control module - Install (if equipped) 1. Set the control box against the mount and install the two mounting bolts (3).

2. Connect the electrical connector (2) into the control box.

3. Secure the control box guard in place with four bolts (1) and nuts.

20005568

48049004 14/11/2016

55.3 [55.404] / 6

1

Index Electrical systems - 55 External lighting - 404 External lighting - Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3

Lighting control module - Install (if equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6

Lighting control module - Remove (if equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5

48049004 14/11/2016

55.3 [55.404] / 7

CNH Industrial America New Holland Site 100 Brubaker Avenue New Holland, Pennsylvania United States 17557 SERVICE - Technical Publications & Tools

PRINTED IN U.S.A. © 2016 CNH Industrial America LLC. All rights reserved. No part of the text or illustrations of this publication may be reproduced.

NEW HOLLAND policy is one of continuous improvement and the right to change prices, specification or equipment at any time without notices is reserved.

All data given in this publication is subject to production variations. Dimensions and weight are approximate only and the illustrations do not necessarily show products in standard condition. For exact information about any particular product, please consult your NEW HOLLAND Dealer.

48049004 14/11/2016 EN

SERVICE MANUAL Attachments/Headers Discbine® 313 Discbine® 316

48049004 14/11/2016

58

Contents Attachments/Headers - 58

[58.110] Attachment/Header cutting mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58.1 [58.130] Attachment/Header frame. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58.2

48049004 14/11/2016

58

Attachments/Headers - 58 Attachment/Header cutting mechanism - 110

Discbine® 313 Discbine® 316

48049004 14/11/2016

58.1 [58.110] / 1

Contents Attachments/Headers - 58 Attachment/Header cutting mechanism - 110

FUNCTIONAL DATA Attachment/Header cutting mechanism Static description Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

Disc cutterbar Static description - Disc knives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Quick-change knife kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Component identification - Cutterbar modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

SERVICE Disc cutterbar Replace - Bolt-on knives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Replace - Quick change knife system - Knives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Replace - Quick-change knife system - Knife bolt and knife nut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Replace - Quick-change knife system - Spring plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Replace - Crop lifter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Remove - Rock guards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Install - Rock guards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Cutter module skid shoe - Remove . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Cutter module skid shoe - Install . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Replace - ShockPro™ hub . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Remove - Cutterbar assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Install - Cutterbar assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Check - Oil level - Cutterbar module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Change fluid - Cutterbar module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Remove - Cutter bar module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Disassemble - Cutter bar module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Inspect - Lower cutterbar module components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Assemble - Cutterbar module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Disassemble - Cutterbar module top cap assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Inspect - Cutterbar module top cap assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Assemble - Cutterbar module top cap assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Install - Cutterbar module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

48049004 14/11/2016

58.1 [58.110] / 2

Attachments/Headers - Attachment/Header cutting mechanism

Attachment/Header cutting mechanism - Static description Introduction The 4.0 m (13 ft) machines have a modular eight-disc cutterbar with counter-rotating discs.

NHIL13HT00419AA

1

NHIL13HT00515AB

2

NHIL13HT00410AA

3

The 4.9 m (16 ft) machines have a ten-disc cutterbar with eight counter-rotating discs and two co-rotating discs.

The cutterbar is driven from the left-hand side by a driveshaft (1) that connects to the first disc on 4.0 m (13 ft) units and the second disc on 4.9 m (16 ft) units.

Independent, hardened alloy steel drive shafts (3) that pass through spacer modules (2) connect the gearbox (1) of the disc modules.

The entire cutterbar is assembled with bolts and washers (4) that connect the spacers to the disc modules.

The cutterbar then bolts to the header frame.

CBARN

48049004 14/11/2016

58.1 [58.110] / 3

4

Attachments/Headers - Attachment/Header cutting mechanism

• Each disc module is a separate gear case with its own oil sump and utilizes precision forged gears.

• Each disc module consists of a top cap assembly and a lower module assembly. ○ The top cap assembly consists of the top cap housing (1), a bevel gear shaft (2), and a bearing (3). ○ The lower module assembly consists of the lower module housing (4) and the pinion shaft and bearing assembly (5).

• The installation position of the pinion shaft determines the direction of rotation of the disc module.

NHIL16HT00991AA

5

• If a problem is found with a specific module, the extent of the damage can be quickly determined by removing the disc and the top cap assembly of the affected module.

• If damage is limited to the top cap assembly components, the lower module can be flushed out to remove contaminants, and a new top cap assembly installed to complete the repair.

• The top cap assembly can be removed from the module for servicing, without disassembling the cutterbar.

The cutterbar uses large diameter, high profile discs (1), which are hardened for long wear.

The profile of the discs, combined with bolt-on crop lifters (2) provides aggressive feeding to the conditioner in difficult crop conditions.

The 4.0 m (13 ft) machines have crop lifters on discs 1 and 8, and 4.9 m (16 ft) machines have crop lifters on discs 1, 2, 9, and 10.

The remaining discs on all units are equipped with boltprotectors (3) and knife-retaining bolts.

NHIL13HT00526AA

6

The discs are equipped with 50.8 mm (2.0 in) wide knives (3), which are retained with 1/2 in bolts and hardened knife nuts.

The knives are reversible for long life, and always have the beveled edge up.

An arrow is stamped on both sides of the knife to show the direction of rotation.

You can easily change knife location to any disc module position on the cutterbar.

A hardened ductile iron rock guard (1) and a skid shoe (2) protects each disc module.

The skid shoes are 4.76 mm (3/16 in) thick and 203 mm (8 in) wide.

The skid shoes extend behind the module several inches for optimum flotation and to prolong the wear-life of the skid shoe.

NHIL13HT00512AA

48049004 14/11/2016

58.1 [58.110] / 4

7

Attachments/Headers - Attachment/Header cutting mechanism

Disc cutterbar - Static description - Disc knives The disc header can be equipped with a choice of six different cutterbar knives, depending on crop conditions and soil types. All knives feature two cutting edges, are available from the parts department, and can be flipped for double the cutting life.

• (2) 14 ° long smooth knives are suitable for normal cutting conditions and are standard on the mower conditioner.

• (3) 14 ° long serrated knives offer the same advantages as the 14 ° long smooth knives, with extended wear in abrasive conditions.

• (Not shown) 18 ° long smooth knives are more effective in down crop conditions by providing more crop lift.

• (Not shown) 18 ° long serrated knives offer the same advantages in down crops as the 18 ° long smooth knives, with extended wear in abrasive conditions.

• (1) 7 ° long smooth knives offer clean cutting with less ash content, and will reduce crop blow-down in light or short crops.

• (4) Rock knives (long) are designed for durability in rocky/stony conditions.

NOTE: Center-pivot disc mower-conditioners with large discs use knives that are 6 mm (0.24 in) longer than knives used on models prior to model year 2014.

48049004 14/11/2016

58.1 [58.110] / 5

76075992N

1

Attachments/Headers - Attachment/Header cutting mechanism

Quick-change knife kit A quick-change knife kit is available as an optional accessory that allows you to quickly change the disc knives using an included tool (1). No manual torquing of the knife bolts is necessary.

NHIL14HT00753AA

1

NHIL14HT00754AA

2

The tool inserts underneath the disc shell at (1) and is used to pry down on the spring plate to facilitate quick removal and installation of the knives. Machines equipped with the quick-change knife kit can use any standard NEW HOLLAND knife style, except rock knives.

48049004 14/11/2016

58.1 [58.110] / 6

Attachments/Headers - Attachment/Header cutting mechanism

Disc cutterbar - Component identification - Cutterbar modules NOTE: Component orientation, the left-hand side and right-hand sides are referenced from, and described from, the normal working operation direction of travel of the machine.

Before you assemble a cutterbar module, you must know how to identify the type of cutterbar module (driven or non-driven) and directional rotation in relation to the mounting position of the cutterbar module onto the cutterbar.

Each cutterbar module housing is factory-engraved on the front underside of the module with either CCW for counterclockwise rotation or CW for clockwise rotation.

NOTE: Assembly of the module should be with regard to the engraved directional marking, though all of the nondriven cutterbar modules can be assembled as either CCW or CW if necessity requires a replacement module housing.

With reference to Figure 1, the illustration shows the assembly of a CCW cutterbar module with the pinion gear (A) on the left-hand side that produces counterclockwise rotation, and a CW cutterbar module with the pinion gear (B) on the right-hand side that produces clockwise rotation.

NOTICE: Make sure that you orient the breather valve (1) on the top cap to the opposite side of the pinion gear during assembly.

NHIL16HT00894FA

1

Cutterbar module – Sectional view (rear of module facing forward, the normal direction of travel and operation)

48049004 14/11/2016

58.1 [58.110] / 7

Attachments/Headers - Attachment/Header cutting mechanism

With the directional rotation determined by the side location of the pinion gear, look at the right-hand and left-hand ends of the pinion shaft and determine the pinion side location.

A narrow and shallow groove is in the bevelled edge of the pinion end of the shaft, as indicated in Figure 2.

• (Shown) CCW cutterbar module

NHIL16HT00891AA

2

Cutterbar module (top view) – Direction of rotation relative to side location of the pinion gear • Figure 3 – CW cutterbar module – The pinion end groove is on the right-hand side. – Disc rotation is clockwise toward the pinion gear side.

• Figure 4 – CCW cutterbar module – The pinion end groove is on the left-hand side. – Disc rotation is counterclockwise toward the pinion gear side.

NHIL16HT00987AA

3

NHIL16HT00986AA

48049004 14/11/2016

58.1 [58.110] / 8

4

Attachments/Headers - Attachment/Header cutting mechanism

Cutterbar module type idenification – Driven and non-driven • Figure 5 – Driven cutterbar module ○ Internal coupler shaft O-ring – Wet spline (oil lubrication of the coupler shaft spline) – Grease lubrication of the coupler shaft splines at assembly and operational oil lubrication from the cutterbar module internal oil supply ○ Direction of rotation is always clockwise. ○ Only one driven cutterbar module per cutterbar.

■ Location on the 8 disc cutterbar – The driven cutterbar module is the extreme left-hand end cutterbar module with the drive tower assembly.

■ Location on the 10 disc cutterbar – The driven cutterbar module is the second module from the left-hand side with the drive tower assembly.

• Figure 6 – Non-driven cutterbar module ○ No internal coupler shaft O-ring – Dry spline (no oil lubrication of the coupler shaft splines) – Only grease lubrication of the coupler shaft splines at assembly

NHIL16HT00892AA

5

NHIL16HT00893AA

48049004 14/11/2016

58.1 [58.110] / 9

6

Attachments/Headers - Attachment/Header cutting mechanism

Disc cutterbar - Replace - Bolt-on knives WARNING Cutting hazard!

Use care handling sharp components. Always wear appropriate Personal Protective Equipment (PPE), including heavy gloves.

Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury.

W1267A

NOTICE: Inspect the cutterbar for leaks or other needed repairs whenever you perform service work. If you find any leaks from a disc module, inspect and service the disc module immediately to prevent costly component failures to the disc module and cutterbar assembly.

NOTICE: Always replace both knives on a disc to maintain balance. Do not intermix old and new knives on a disc.

1. Install a bar (1) through a drive tower (2) to prevent the discs from turning.

NOTE: A roll conditioning unit shown; the procedure and those that follow are the same for flail conditioners.

NHIL13HT00406AA

1

NHIL13HT00418AA

2

NHIL16HT00904AA

3

2. Remove the debris from around the knife bolt (1).

3. Remove the knife bolt with a socket. If necessary, use a screwdriver to hold the nut up in the slot in the disc to prevent the nut from turning.

4. Remove the knife and the nut from under the disc after you remove the bolt.

Turn the knives over to use the opposite cutting edge after they become dull or nicked.

• All knives are angled.

• The leading edge (1) of the knives must be lower than the rear edge.

• Knives are referred to as clockwise or counter-clockwise indicating the direction they must turn to cut properly.

48049004 14/11/2016

58.1 [58.110] / 10

Attachments/Headers - Attachment/Header cutting mechanism

An eight disc cutterbar, Figure 4, has four pairs of discs (1) that counter-rotate in opposite directions.

A ten disc cutterbar, Figure 5, has four central pairs of discs that counter-rotate (1) in opposite directions along with two outermost end discs that co-rotate (2) in the same direction as the adjacent inner disc. See the accompanying drawings as to which way the discs rotate.

NHIL13HT00419AA

4

NHIL13HT00515AB

8 disc cutterbar – 4.0 m (13 ft)

5

10 disc cutterbar – 4.9 m (16 ft)

6. Install the nut through the knife and insert the nut (1) into the bottom of the discs. Align the nut with the slot in the disc.

7. Install the knife bolt, and then torque the knife bolt to 137 N·m (101 lb ft).

8. After you install all of the knives, turn the cutterbar by hand; check to make sure that all of the knife edges are angled to the operational direction of rotation, and that there is no component interference.

NHIL13HT00418AA

48049004 14/11/2016

58.1 [58.110] / 11

6

Attachments/Headers - Attachment/Header cutting mechanism

Disc cutterbar - Replace - Quick change knife system - Knives NOTICE: Replace knives with the same knife type used on all of the discs on the cutterbar. Always replace both knives on a disc to maintain balance. Do not intermix old and new knives or knife types on a disc.

NOTICE: Inspect each cutterbar disc for oil leakage, spring plate wear, or other needed repairs whenever performing service work on the disc cutterbar. If a leak is found, repair it immediately to prevent possible future failures. If the spring plate is severely worn on one or both sides, change the spring plate to an opposite rotating disc or replace the spring plate. See Disc cutterbar - Replace - Quick-change knife system - Spring plate (58.110).

When you replace cutterbar knives, the leading edge of angled knives must be lower than the rear edge. On this machine, the cutterbar discs rotate in opposite directions (counter-rotate) except the outermost pair on each side of the 4.9 m (16 ft) unit, which rotate in the same direction (co-rotate). Refer to the accompanying figures as to which way the discs turn.

NHIL13HT00419AA

1

NHIL13HT00515AB

Disc rotation – 8 Disc cutterbar 4.0 m (13 ft)

2

Disc rotation – 10 Disc cutterbar 4.9 m (16 ft)

Machines that have the optional QuickMax™ quick-change knife system can use the quick-change knife tool (1) to easily replace worn or damaged knives on the machine.

• You may use any style knife with this quick-change knife feature, except rock knives. The curve of the knife can cause excess load on the spring plates.

NOTE: In rocky conditions, use 7 ° knives.

• The tool mounts on the left-hand side of the machine for storage.

1. Remove the quick-change knife tool (1) from the tool holder (2).

NHIL14HT00753AA

48049004 14/11/2016

58.1 [58.110] / 12

3

Attachments/Headers - Attachment/Header cutting mechanism

2. Rotate a single cutterbar disc by hand until the disc knife end (1) aligns with the indentation (2) in the rock guard as shown. This position is at an angle approximately 45 ° to the cutterbar.

NOTE: From this single disc orientation you can change half of the paired disc knife sets along the full length of the disc cutterbar. To access the other half of the disc cutterbar knife sets, manually rotate the a single disc one-half of a full rotation ( 180 °).

3. Insert the prongs (3), Figure 4 and Figure 5, of the quick-change knife tool, between the disc shell (1) and the spring plate (2).

NHVM14HT00888AA

4

NHVM14HT00889AA

5

NHVM14HT00889AA

6

NOTE: For image clarity, the rock guard is removed in Figure 5.

4. Pry down on the spring plate (2) by applying a downward pressure to the quick-change knife tool (1).

5. Remove the worn knife from the disc.

6. Determine if you are going to turn the knife over to the opposite cutting edge or replace the knife with a new knife ○ When you replace knives on a disc module, you must replace both knives with new knives to maintain proper balance of the disc head. ○ When you install a new knife with a 7 °, 14 °, or 18 ° angled edge, make sure that the directional twist of the knife, indicated by an arrow stamped on the knife, corresponds to that specific disc’s rotational direction. The directional arrow designates the use on a clockwise or counterclockwise rotating disc.

7. Except for rock knives, turn the knives over to use the opposite cutting edge after they become dull or nicked.

Rock knives should not be used with the quick-change system.

8. While still applying downward pressure, insert the knife into place on the cutter disc. Once it is securely in place, release pressure on the quick-change knife tool. The spring plate should spring back into position to secure the knife.

9. Push and pull on the knife to verify that the knife is securely mounted.

48049004 14/11/2016

58.1 [58.110] / 13

Attachments/Headers - Attachment/Header cutting mechanism

10. Check the wear on the knife nut that secures the selflocking (patch type) bolt (1) as follows: A. Position and place the handle end (3) of the quick-change knife tool against the edge of the disc shell (2), as shown.

B. Check that the outer edge of the knife (4) extends to within the notch (5) in the tool handle.

NHIL14HT00869AA

7

NHIL14HT00869AA

8

11. Pull outward and push inward on the knife (1). The end of the knife (2) must be within the notch (3) on the quick-change knife tool handle.

• If the knife is able to move outside of the notch area, you must replace the knife nut.

• See Disc cutterbar - Replace - Quick-change knife system - Knife bolt and knife nut (58.110) for more information.

12. After you install all of the knives, turn the cutterbar by hand and check to make sure that all of knives are installed in the right direction and that there is no interference.

48049004 14/11/2016

58.1 [58.110] / 14

Attachments/Headers - Attachment/Header cutting mechanism

Disc cutterbar - Replace - Quick-change knife system - Knife bolt and knife nut In the QuickMax™ quick-change system, each knife attaches with two pieces of hardware: • Knife bolt – A self-locking bolt (See the NOTICE that follows).

• Knife nut – The knife nut has a special eccentric shape to support the quick-change knife feature.

NOTE: Both the knife bolt and the knife nut are available from your authorized NEW HOLLAND dealer.

NOTICE: When you install the knives, always use the special self-locking bolt (also known as a “patch bolt”, because of the non-metallic plastic patch bonded to a specific portion of the threads to provide a self-locking feature). The manufacturer assembles the quick-change knives with Nylok® Blue® Nylon Torq-Patch® adhesive. You can reuse these bolts 4–5 times before you need to replace them. Replacement bolts are available from your NEW HOLLAND dealer.

1. Remove the existing knife bolt (1) and the disc knife.

2. Dispose of the worn knife nut (2).

NOTE: Make a note of the orientation of the knife when you remove it to ensure that you orient it correctly when you install it again.

NHIL16HT00897AA

1

NHIL15HT00843AA

2

NHIL16HT00896AA

3

3. Orient the new knife nut so that the flange (1) faces inward, toward the center of the disc module.

NOTE: Make sure that you center the knife nut in the spring plate hole (2) during assembly.

4. Install the knife (1) between the disc and the spring plate (2).

5. Install the new knife nut (3) through the spring plate and the knife. Seat the knife nut into the oval hole (4) the disc.

6. Install the knife bolt (5) downward through the disc and into the seated knife nut. If the disc module does not have a crop lifter, install the additional knife bolt shield (6) that was previously taken off.

7. Torque the knife bolt to 137 N·m (101 lb ft).

8. Use the quick-change knife tool to install the knife.

48049004 14/11/2016

58.1 [58.110] / 15

Attachments/Headers - Attachment/Header cutting mechanism

Disc cutterbar - Replace - Quick-change knife system - Spring plate Change the spring plates to a disc that rotates in the opposite direction when either side of the spring plate has worn back to the notch in the side as indicated in Figure 1.

Replace the plate when the thickness of the material around the large hole is thinner than 3 mm (0.12 in), or if the quick-change knife tool will no longer open the plate.

NOTE: On disc assemblies without lifters, you can swap the entire disc to an oppositely-rotating module with the quick-change hardware still attached. See the section “Swapping discs” that follows in this chapter.

NHIL15HT00040AA

1

NHIL15HT00844BA

2

Spring plate replacement (without lifters) 1. Remove the carriage bolts (1), the flange nuts (6), and the knife bolt (2).

2. Remove the mud scraper (5), the spring plate (4), and the knife nut (3).

3. Install the knife bolt (2), the knife bolt shield (7), and the knife nut (3).

4. Install new carriage bolts (1), the new spring plate (4), the mud scraper (5), and new flange nuts (6).

5. Torque the knife bolt (2) to 137 N·m (101 lb ft) 6. Torque the flange nuts (6) to 180 N·m (133 lb ft)

48049004 14/11/2016

58.1 [58.110] / 16

Attachments/Headers - Attachment/Header cutting mechanism

Spring plate replacement (with lifters) NOTE: Lifters are only installed standard on the outside discs.

NOTICE: Replace both lifters on a disc to maintain balance. Do not make weld repairs to the lifters, as this will affect lifter strength and balance.

1. Remove the carriage bolts (1), the flange nuts (6), and the knife bolt (2).

2. Remove the crop lifter (7), the mud scraper (5), the spring plate (4), and the knife nut (3).

3. Install the knife bolt (2), the crop lifter (7), and the knife nut (3).

4. Install new carriage bolts (1), the new spring plate (4), the mud scraper (5), and new flange nuts (6).

5. Torque the knife bolt (2) to 137 N·m (101 lb ft).

6. Torque the flange nuts (6) to 180 N·m (133 lb ft).

NHIL15HT00845BA

48049004 14/11/2016

58.1 [58.110] / 17

3

Attachments/Headers - Attachment/Header cutting mechanism

Swapping discs: To remove disc assemblies (with the quick-change knife hardware still installed) at the drive tower locations: 1.

Remove the nuts and bolts (2) to detach the shield halves.

2.

Remove the drive tower (1).

NHIL13HT00410AA

4

NHIL13HT00415AA

5

NHIL13HT00415AA

6

When the leading edge (1) of the disc wears thin, you can use the disc on an oppositely-rotating module to utilize the second face.

3. Remove the bolts (2) to remove the disc assemblies.

4. Install the disc assemblies (1) at right angles to each other, as shown.

5. Make sure that you install the correct hardware at the disc assemblies with the drive tower.

NOTICE: Use of the incorrect disc-retaining hardware may cause potential damage, may lock the cutterbar up, or may prevent proper retention of the discs.

6. Torque the disc cover bolts (2) to 113 N·m (83 lb ft).

NOTICE: Do not overtighten the cover bolts; failure of the retaining hardware may result.

48049004 14/11/2016

58.1 [58.110] / 18

Attachments/Headers - Attachment/Header cutting mechanism

Disc cutterbar - Replace - Crop lifter 1. To replace the lifter (3) by removing the knife bolt (2) and the lifter bolt (1). To remove the flange nut on the lifter bolt you need to slide a wrench under the disc cover to access the nut for removal.

NOTE: You may find that hardware access is easier if you remove the four bolts that secure the disc cover on the all disc modules other than the drive disc module for which you will need to remove the drum shield, drum, and drive shaft.

2. Install the new crop lifter and secure with existing hardware.

NOTICE: Replace both lifters on a disc to maintain balance. Do not make weld repairs to the lifters, as this will affect lifter strength and balance.

3. Torque the lifter bolt (1) to 180 N·m (133 lb ft).

4. Torque the knife bolt (2) to 137 N·m (101 lb ft).

48049004 14/11/2016

58.1 [58.110] / 19

NHIL13HT00425AA

1

Attachments/Headers - Attachment/Header cutting mechanism

Disc cutterbar - Remove - Rock guards NOTICE: Immediately replace rock guards that are worn thin or broken.

1. Remove the two 1/2–13 x 1-1/2 inch hex head locking bolts (3) along with the Belleville lock washers, and then slide the rock guard (1) off the front lip of the skid shoe (2).

2. Discard the 1/2–13 x 1-1/2 inch locking bolts.

NHIL13HT00421AA

1

NOTICE: The rock guard locking bolts are manufactured with a special chemical coating locking feature, and are often referred to as a “patch” bolt. Unlike the knife bolts that are reusable, you must replace the rock guard locking bolts with new locking bolts. Replacement bolts and washers are available from your NEW HOLLAND dealer.

Next operation: See Disc cutterbar - Install - Rock guards (58.110).

48049004 14/11/2016

58.1 [58.110] / 20

Attachments/Headers - Attachment/Header cutting mechanism

Disc cutterbar - Install - Rock guards NOTICE: The rock guard locking bolts are manufactured with a special chemical coating locking feature, and are often referred to as a “patch” bolt. Unlike the knife bolts that are reusable, you must replace the rock guard locking bolts with new locking bolts. Replacement bolts and washers are available from your NEW HOLLAND dealer.

1. Position the rock guard (1) over the front lip of the skid shoe (2), and then align the bolt holes to the disc module.

2. Install two new 1/2–13 x 1-1/2 hex head locking bolts and lock washers (3).

3. Torque the locking bolts to 140 - 188 N·m (103 - 139 lb ft).

NHIL13HT00421AA

48049004 14/11/2016

58.1 [58.110] / 21

1

Attachments/Headers - Attachment/Header cutting mechanism

Disc cutterbar Cutter module skid shoe - Remove DANGER Crushing hazard!

Make sure that you engage the header lift lock channels whenever you raise the header for maintenance or road transport.

Failure to comply will result in death or serious injury.

D0198A

NOTICE: Immediately replace any broken or worn thin skid shoes.

Remove the individual skid shoes as follows: 1.

With the header parked on a level surface, raise the header.

2.

Comply with the above safety message; make sure that you engage the header lift lock channel (1) on both sides of the header.

NHIL16HT00024AA

1

NHIL13HT00512AA

2

3. Remove the two 1/2 x 1-1/4 inch hex head bolts along with the heat treated flat washers to remove the skid shoe.

4. Lower the rear of the skid shoe, and then remove the front lip of the skid shoe from the insert location in the rock guard.

48049004 14/11/2016

58.1 [58.110] / 22

Attachments/Headers - Attachment/Header cutting mechanism

Disc cutterbar Cutter module skid shoe - Install DANGER Crushing hazard!

Make sure that you engage the header lift lock channels whenever you raise the header for maintenance or road transport.

Failure to comply will result in death or serious injury.

D0198A

Install the skid shoes as follows: 1.

Insert the front lip of the skid shoe into the insert location in the rock guard, and then raise the rear of the skid shoe to align the bolt holes on the cutterbar.

2.

Install the two 1/2 x 1-1/4 inch hex head bolts along with the heat treated flat washers.

3.

Torque the hex head bolts to 115 N·m (85 lb ft).

4.

When all work around the raise header is complete you can disengage the header lift lock channels and lower the header.

NHIL13HT00512AA

48049004 14/11/2016

58.1 [58.110] / 23

1

Attachments/Headers - Attachment/Header cutting mechanism

Disc cutterbar - Replace - ShockPro™ hub The shock hubs are intended to provide shock protection to the individual cutter bar modules upon contact with large obstacles or jamming of bent knives. The shock hub has a reduced number of splines, which will shear prior to failing gear teeth.

NOTE: Power Take-Off (PTO) - driven discs do not use shock hubs.

Detecting a sheared shock hub It should be obvious if a hub has sheared because the disc will be mistimed, causing knives to tick or the cut quality may become worse. Excess wobble or 'rocking' of a disc may indicate that the hub has sheared and/or that the center bolt is loose. It could also indicate a failed top cap bearing.

76106813

1

93107687

2

1. Remove four bolts (2) from disc.

2. Remove disc (3) and bolt cover (1).

48049004 14/11/2016

58.1 [58.110] / 24

Attachments/Headers - Attachment/Header cutting mechanism

3. Remove the hex head bolt (1), hardened washer (3), and conical washer (2).

93107688

3

56064436

4

76106813

5

4. Remove splined washer (1) and shock hub (2) together from disc module.

5. Clean metal spline fragments from gear shaft.

6. Wipe entire area clean of metal fines.

NOTICE: Metal fragments and fines must be cleaned off the top of the top cap bearing and lower splined washer to get even clamping on mating surfaces. Uneven clamping could crack the splined washer.

7. Reinstall bottom splined washer, (6) (if removed).

8. Install new shock hub (5) on disc module (7).

9. Time the shock hub with the rest of the cutter bar such that the discs will be 90 ° apart.

10. Reinstall splined washer (4).

NOTE: Inspect splined washer. If it is damaged, replace.

11. Install new top center bolt (1) new conical washer (2) and new hardened washer (3). Apply oil to the threads and under the head of the new top cap center bolt and torque bolt to 244 N·m (180 lb ft).

NOTE: When installing conical washer, be sure to have the cupped side facing down.

NOTICE: DO NOT over-torque or under-torque top center bolt.

48049004 14/11/2016

58.1 [58.110] / 25

Attachments/Headers - Attachment/Header cutting mechanism

12. Install the disc (3) and bolt cover (1) with the four retaining bolts (2).

13. Torque the retaining bolts to 115 N·m (85 lb ft).

93107687

48049004 14/11/2016

58.1 [58.110] / 26

6

Attachments/Headers - Attachment/Header cutting mechanism

Disc cutterbar - Remove - Cutterbar assembly 1. Raise the header to maximum height and engage the lift lock channels (1).

NHIL13HT00305AA

1

NHVM14HT00053AA

2

NHVM14HT00163AA

3

NHVM14HT00168AA

4

2. Remove the four bolts (1) that secure the vertical header drive Power Take-Off (PTO) shield (2), and then remove the shield.

3. Remove the skid shoes (1) from each disc module.

4. Remove and retain the bolts and washers (2) that connect the tabs on the front of the cutterbar beam to the spacers on the cutterbar.

48049004 14/11/2016

58.1 [58.110] / 27

Attachments/Headers - Attachment/Header cutting mechanism

5. Use two floor jacks to support the ends of the cutterbar.

6. Remove and retain the two bolts and rectangular washers from the rear of each disc module that secure the cutterbar to the header frame.

7. Lower and remove the cutterbar from the trail frame.

NHVM14HT00165AA

5

NHVM14HT00055AA

6

8. Remove the four bolts and washers (3) to remove the drum (1) and PTO (2) from the cutterbar.

48049004 14/11/2016

58.1 [58.110] / 28

Attachments/Headers - Attachment/Header cutting mechanism

Disc cutterbar - Install - Cutterbar assembly 1. Line the cutterbar up with the trail frame using floor jacks at each end.

2. Secure the cutterbar to the trail frame using two long bolts and two rectangular washers (1) at the rear of each disc module.

• Torque the bolts to 115 N·m (85 lb ft).

NOTE: On the second disc module from each end, install the rectangular washers sideway for clearance to the welds at those locations.

NHVM14HT00165AA

1

NHVM14HT00163AA

2

NHVM14HT00292EA

3

NHVM14HT00055AA

4

3. Install the skid shoes (1) on each disc module.

4. Install the bolts and washers (2) that mount the cutterbar spacers to the tabs on the front of the cutterbar beam.

• Torque the bolts to 115 N·m (85 lb ft).

5. Use the previously removed hardware to install the drum (1) and Power Take-Off (PTO) shaft (2) (3).

• Torque the bolts to 115 N·m (85 lb ft).

48049004 14/11/2016

58.1 [58.110] / 29

Attachments/Headers - Attachment/Header cutting mechanism

6. Install the vertical header drive Power Take-Off (PTO) shield (2) and secure using four bolts (1).

NHVM14HT00053AA

48049004 14/11/2016

58.1 [58.110] / 30

5

Attachments/Headers - Attachment/Header cutting mechanism

Disc cutterbar - Check - Oil level - Cutterbar module Specification Use TUTELA HYPOIDE EP GEAR LUBE SAE 80W-90 gear oil or CNH HYPOIDE SSL SYNTHETIC GEAR LUBE 75W-90 (synthetic) gear oil to maintain the required volume of 310 mL (10 US fl oz) of gear oil.

You must check each of the cutterbar modules oil every 50 hours.

1.

Position the machine on a level surface.

2.

Retract the tilt cylinder to position the cutterbar at minimum tilt.

3.

Remove the dipstick (1), and then wipe the dipstick clean.

4.

Finger-tighten the dipstick into the module.

5.

Remove the dipstick and observe the oil level.

NOTE: The oil level is correct when the oil level is anywhere within the marked area at the end (2) of the dipstick.

48049004 14/11/2016

58.1 [58.110] / 31

A3662-19N

1

A3662-20N

2

Attachments/Headers - Attachment/Header cutting mechanism

Disc cutterbar - Change fluid - Cutterbar module DANGER Crushing hazard!

Safety locks built into the header lift system lock the header in the raised position. Engage the safety locks on both sides before working under a raised header.

Failure to comply will result in death or serious injury.

D0029A

Change the oil in each of the cutterbar modules after the first 50 hours of usage.

• Subsequent oil changes are done every 300 hours or once a year, whichever comes first.

• Use TUTELA HYPOIDE EP GEAR LUBE SAE 80W-90, CNH HYPOIDE SSL SYNTHETIC GEAR LUBE 75W-90, or equivalent gear oil.

1. Prepare the machine as follows: A. Position the machine on a level surface.

B. Raise the header, and then make sure that you engage both of the header lift lock channels.

C. Retract the header tilt cylinder to position the cutterbar at the minimum tilt position.

2. Position a pan to capture the oil under the cutterbar module.

3. Remove the drain plug (1) on the bottom of the module.

4. Allow the oil to drain into the pan until the module is empty.

5. Drain the oil from all of the modules on the cutterbar.

6. After the oil has drained, flush the lower module with LOCTITE® ODC-FREE CLEANER AND DEGREASER cleaning solvent to help remove residual metallic fines within the interior of the module.

7. Use a telescopic magnet tool to check for and extract any large pieces of metallic debris from inside the module.

93107633

1

NOTICE: An excessive amount of metal fines or larger pieces of metal require immediate removal, disassembly, and inspection of the module. Replacement of the module components or the complete module may be required. Do not continue to operate the cutterbar until the module is thoroughly inspected.

8. Clean all residual oil and sealant from each of the oil drain plugs.

9. Apply LOCTITE® 592™ PST sealant to the threads of the oil drain plug, and then install and tighten the oil drain plug.

10. Install and tighten an oil drain plug into each module.

48049004 14/11/2016

58.1 [58.110] / 32

Attachments/Headers - Attachment/Header cutting mechanism

11. Remove the dipstick (1) from each module.

12. Fill each module with 310 mL (10 US fl oz) of gear oil.

13. Wipe the dipstick clean with a rag.

93107670

2

93107671

3

14. Check the condition of the O-ring on the dipstick and replace if necessary. Turn the dipstick (1) one thread into the dipstick hole, and then remove the dipstick to check the oil level.

• If the oil level is within the marked area at the end of the dipstick, the gearbox oil level is correct.

15. When the oil level is at the correct level, install and tighten the dipstick.

NOTE: Dispose of all fluids, filters, and containers in an environmentally safe manner according to local laws and regulations. Check with local environmental and recycling centers or your dealer for correct disposal information.

48049004 14/11/2016

58.1 [58.110] / 33

Attachments/Headers - Attachment/Header cutting mechanism

Disc cutterbar - Remove - Cutter bar module DANGER Crushing hazard!

Safety locks built into the header lift system lock the header in the raised position. Engage the safety locks on both sides before working under a raised header.

Failure to comply will result in death or serious injury.

D0029A

The header must be level front to back and side to side. Position the machine on a level surface, with the lift cylinder locks engaged. Header tilt cylinder should be in minimum tilt position.

1. For removing a failed module on the left-hand side of the cutterbar, remove the shield (1) by removing hardware (2).

2. Remove the hardware (3) securing the drum (4) and the drive shaft to the drive hub.

3. Remove the drive shaft, drum and disc from cutter bar.

4. For removing a failed module on the right-hand side of the cutterbar, remove the drum and disc.

NHVM14HT00053AA

1

93107687

2

NHIL13HT00512AA

3

5. Remove four bolts and lock washers (1) from each disc outboard of the failed module.

6. Remove disc (2) and bolt cover (3) from all modules outboard of the failed module.

7. Remove the rock guard (4) from the failed module.

8. Remove the skid shoe (1) from the failed module and all of the skid shoes outboard of that module (the side that is closest to the failed module) by removing the two bolts (2) securing it to the module.

48049004 14/11/2016

58.1 [58.110] / 34

Attachments/Headers - Attachment/Header cutting mechanism

9. Remove hardware (1) that fastens the adjacent spacers from the failed module (2).

20110111

4

NHVM14HT00165AA

5

93110135

6

10. Remove the hardware (1) from the module to be removed and all of the modules outboard of that module on one side (the side that is closest to the failed module).

11. Loosen but do not remove the vertical bolts (1) that go through the slots in the spacers that are outboard of the failed module and the failed module.

12. Slide the modules that have been loosened from the beam outboard as far as the spacer slots allow.

• The spacers that are adjacent to the failed module (2) are now far enough apart to allow the connecting drive shafts to be disengaged and allow the failed module to be removed.

48049004 14/11/2016

58.1 [58.110] / 35

Attachments/Headers - Attachment/Header cutting mechanism

Disc cutterbar - Disassemble - Cutter bar module 1. If disassembling a standard drive hub, remove the hex head bolt (1), the hardened washer (2), and the drive hub (3) from the top cap assembly.

• Clean off any material built up on the top of the module and the top cap assembly.

761002893

1

93107688

2

56064436

3

2. If disassembling a shock hub, remove the hex head bolt (1), the hardened washer (2), and the conical washer (3).

• Clean off any material built up on the top of the module and the top cap assembly.

3. Remove splined washer (4) and the shock hub (5) together from disc module.

48049004 14/11/2016

58.1 [58.110] / 36

Attachments/Headers - Attachment/Header cutting mechanism

4. Remove the four 1/2 x 1-1/4 inch, grade 5 bolts and Belleville lock washers (1).

• Pry the top cap assembly (2) from the cutterbar module housing (3).

93110117

4

93110113

5

5. Carefully pry the pinion shaft seal (1) from the module housing on each side of the each end of the pinion shaft, taking care to not damage the pinion shaft surface.

NOTE: The component identified as a “slinger” in Step 6 is similar to a retaining ring with fan blade projections that rotates with the pinion shaft and serves to sling or swirl the module gear oil over the pinion shaft bearings.

NOTICE: Use caution when you extract each slinger to prevent the tips of the slinger from contacting and scratching the sealing surfaces on the ends of the pinion shaft and the sealing surfaces of the module housing. Failure to comply may result in seal failure and an gear oil leakage from the cutterbar module.

6. Use a pair of retaining ring pliers to carefully remove a slinger (1) from each end of the pinion shaft.

93110118

48049004 14/11/2016

58.1 [58.110] / 37

6

Attachments/Headers - Attachment/Header cutting mechanism

7. Using a pair of retaining ring pliers, remove the retaining rings (1) from each side of the module.

93110119

7

NOTE: Before removing the pinion shaft in Step 8, make a note of which side of the module that the pinion gear is assembled. The orientation of the pinion gear affects the direction of rotation of the disc when you assemble the cutterbar module.

8. Slide the pinion gear shaft (1) out of the module housing (2).

9. Inspect the top cap assembly and lower cutterbar module components for bearing damage and gear tooth damage.

• Top cap assembly – See Disc cutterbar - Inspect Cutterbar module top cap assembly (58.110).

• Lower cutterbar module components – See Disc cutterbar - Inspect - Lower cutterbar module components (58.110).

761002953

48049004 14/11/2016

58.1 [58.110] / 38

8

Attachments/Headers - Attachment/Header cutting mechanism

Disc cutterbar - Inspect - Lower cutterbar module components

761002953

1

Exploded view – Lower cutterbar module with the top cap assembly removed Illustration 1 • Driven cutterbar driven module shown.

NOTE: Internal O-rings (1) installed at each end of the pinion shaft are only on the driven cutterbar module.

Inspect the lower cutterbar module components for bearing damage and gear tooth damage.

• Check the pinion shaft for damage, and replace components as needed, or install a new pinion shaft kit.

NOTE: If you reuse the pinion gear shaft, you can also reuse the compression washer or install a new compression washer. Use a non-metallic abrasive pad to clean dirt and corrosion from the sealing surface areas on the shaft.

NOTE: If the cutterbar module has been previously serviced and a pinion shaft kit was installed, the compression washer will have been replaced by a set of shim washers (3) that are equivalent in thickness of the original compressed washer. Retain the shim washer stack for the assembly of the cutterbar module NOTE: If you install a new pinion shaft kit, you must measure the thickness of the compression washer with a caliper, and then assemble a set of shims from the kit to equal the thickness of the compression washer. The included kit shim washers are as follows: (A) – Quantity of 2 ( 0.003 mm), (B) – Quantity of 2 ( 0.005 mm), (C) – Quantity of 5 ( 0.007 mm).

48049004 14/11/2016

58.1 [58.110] / 39

Attachments/Headers - Attachment/Header cutting mechanism

Disc cutterbar - Assemble - Cutterbar module Before you assemble a cutterbar module, you must know how to identify the type of cutterbar module (driven or non-driven) and directional rotation in relation to the mounting position of the cutterbar module onto the cutterbar.

• See Disc cutterbar - Component identification - Cutterbar modules (58.110) for a functional overview of the cutterbar modules.

NOTICE: Each bearing for the pinion shaft is manufactured to provide a specific thickness. Do not mix old and new bearing components and do not substitute aftermarket bearings.

NOTE: Precision machining of the cutterbar module and top cap housings, the use of precision forged gears and tight tolerance bearings, control the backlash in the assembled module. The parts are manufactured to provide a specific combined thickness.

NOTE: The backlash in the pinion gear set should be between 0.13 - 0.28 mm (0.005 - 0.011 in) after you fully assemble the lower module. Backlash is not adjustable. If you find that the backlash is not within the specified range, you will have to check the module for correct assembly of the internal components.

NOTE: In Step 1,the side of the cutterbar module on which you start the assembly will affect the direction of rotation of module. Direction of rotation will always be toward the pinion gear. For example; install the retaining ring into the left-hand side of the housing for counterclockwise rotation and on the right-hand side for clockwise rotation.

1. Install a retaining ring (1) on the pinion gear side of the module casting.

2. Slide the bearing cup for the pinion bearing into the housing bore against the retaining ring.

3. Install a retaining ring (1) in the side opposite of the pinion side of module.

93110122

1

93110123

2

4. Position the module housing with the second installed retaining ring facing downward.

5. Install one hardened washer (1) onto the retaining ring.

6. From the pinion kit selection of shim washers, assemble a stack of shim washers (2) that are approximately the same thickness 3.43 mm (0.14 in) as the compressed shim washer originally installed.

NOTE: The use of the shim washers is required when installing the pinion shaft kit. If only individual components are being replaced, the original compression washer can be installed. Do not use the compression washer in place of the shim washers when installing the pinion shaft kit.

7. Install a second hardened washer (1).

NOTE: The second hardened washer is required when installing the pinion shaft kit and a shim washer stack is created. The second hardened washer is not used when the compression washer is installed.

8. Install the bearing cup (3) into the module housing opposite the pinion.

9. Support the module housing on blocks, a large piece of pipe or in an open vise, approximately 12.7 mm (1/2 in) above the work surface.

48049004 14/11/2016

58.1 [58.110] / 40

Attachments/Headers - Attachment/Header cutting mechanism

10. Using a bearing cup installation tool (1), seat the bearing cup into the housing.

93110124

3

93110126

4

93110125

5

93110119

6

11. Using a press, assemble the module pinion shaft bearings (1) and (2) onto the shaft.

12. Slide the assembled lower module shaft (1) into the housing with the pinion side opposite the side with the shims installed.

13. Support the module assembly on blocks, a large piece of pipe or in an open vise; Make sure that the pinion bearing cup is seated against the bearing cone and install retaining ring (1) into groove in housing.

48049004 14/11/2016

58.1 [58.110] / 41

Attachments/Headers - Attachment/Header cutting mechanism

14. Check the end play of the pinion shaft with the pinion side facing up to ensure an accurate measurement.

Rotate the shaft two complete revolutions to seat all the components (bearing rollers in cage), and install a dial indicator (1) to measure shaft end play. End play should be between 0.05 - 0.23 mm (0.002 - 0.009 in).

93110120

7

761002953

8

15. Remove the retaining ring (1) and hardened washer (2) to add or remove shims (3) to achieve the correct end play.

NOTICE: The shims must be sandwiched between two hardened washers to protect them from the bearing and retaining ring groove.

NOTE: The component identified as a “slinger” in Step 16 is similar to a retaining ring with fan blade projections that rotates with the pinion shaft and serves to sling or swirl the module gear oil over the pinion shaft bearings. You may install a slinger may in either direction onto the pinion shaft.

NOTICE: Use caution when you install each slinger to prevent the tips of the slinger from contacting and scratching the sealing surfaces on the ends of the pinion shaft and the sealing surfaces of the module housing. Failure to comply may result in seal failure and an gear oil leakage from the cutterbar module.

16. Install an oil slinger (1) into the groove on each end of the pinion shaft.

93110118

9

NOTE: Step 17 is only applicable when assembling the driven cutterbar module that attaches to the cutterbar drive tower

48049004 14/11/2016

58.1 [58.110] / 42

Attachments/Headers - Attachment/Header cutting mechanism

17. Apply TUTELA HYPOIDE EP GEAR LUBE SAE 80W-90 or CNH HYPOIDE SSL SYNTHETIC GEAR LUBE 75W-90 gear oil to the O-rings, and then install the two new O-rings (1) into each end of the pinion shaft.

93110121

10

93110113

11

93110117

12

18. Apply grease to the sealing lip on the shaft seals (1) and press them into place on each side of the housing.

NOTE: The seal must be pressed into place with a seal installing tool or suitable substitute. The seals must be flush with the side of the housing and square to the shaft.

If the seal is driven with a hammer, it will be distorted and leak causing module failure.

19. Apply LOCTITE® 592™ PST sealant to the threads of the drain plug (1) and check plug (2) and install them in the housing. Pour 310 ml (12 US fl oz) of TUTELA HYPOIDE EP GEAR LUBE SAE 80W-90 or CNH HYPOIDE SSL SYNTHETIC GEAR LUBE 75W-90 through the top opening into the lower module.

20. Assemble the top cap to the lower module assembly as follows: A. Apply a thin bead of LOCTITE® SI 598™ BLACK sealant to the sealing flange of the top cap assembly (3) and position the cap assembly onto the lower module assembly and position the breather (4) opposite of the pinion gear.

B. Apply LOCTITE® SI 598™ BLACK sealant to the ends of the threads of the top cap retaining bolts.

C. Install the bolts and washers (5).

D. Torque the hardware to 113 N·m (83 lb ft).

NOTE: When assembling top cap assembly to the module, always install the breather (4) opposite the pinion gear.

21. Do not install the standard drive hub or shock hub onto the top cap at this time unless you want to check the backlash. To check backlash, the disc/shock hub must be installed and torqued to 244 N·m (180 lb ft) to seat the bevel shaft against the bearings and housing. ○ Check the backlash as follows: A. Install the standard drive hub or shock hub onto the top cap and torque the center .

■ See Disc cutterbar - Install - Cutterbar module (58.110).

B. Measure the backlash.

■ Acceptable backlash is between 0.127 - 0.279 mm (0.005 - 0.011 in).

■ Check the assembly of the cutterbar module, if the measured backlash is not within the specified range.

48049004 14/11/2016

58.1 [58.110] / 43

Attachments/Headers - Attachment/Header cutting mechanism

Disc cutterbar - Disassemble - Cutterbar module top cap assembly 1. Slide the bevel gear (4) out of the bearing housing (3).

2. With a retaining ring pliers, remove the internal retaining ring (1) from the bearing housing.

3. Remove the bearing (2) outward from the top bearing housing.

NHIL16HT00986

48049004 14/11/2016

58.1 [58.110] / 44

1

Attachments/Headers - Attachment/Header cutting mechanism

Disc cutterbar - Inspect - Cutterbar module top cap assembly Inspect the top cap assembly as follows: • Inspect the integrity of ball-type bearing (1).

• Inspect the integrity of the top cap bearing housing (2).

• Inspect the splines and gear teeth of the bevel gear (3).

• Inspect that the breather (4) is clear of debris and functional.

NHIL16HT00986

48049004 14/11/2016

58.1 [58.110] / 45

1

Attachments/Headers - Attachment/Header cutting mechanism

Disc cutterbar - Assemble - Cutterbar module top cap assembly NOTE: Make sure that the surrounding surfaces inside the bearing housing are clean and free from dirt to prevent premature bearing failure.

1. Insert the bearing (2) into the top of bearing housing (3).

2. With a retaining ring pliers, install the internal retaining ring (1) into the top of the bearing housing.

3. From the underside of the bearing housing, press and seat the bearing against the retaining ring.

4. From the top side of the bearing housing visually make sure that there is no gap between the bearing and the retaining ring.

5. Slide the bevel gear (4) into the bearing (2).

NHIL16HT00986

48049004 14/11/2016

58.1 [58.110] / 46

1

Attachments/Headers - Attachment/Header cutting mechanism

Disc cutterbar - Install - Cutterbar module NOTE: Make sure that you install the rubber washers inside the splined pinion shaft cavities. Make sure that you grease the splines on the connecting shafts.

NOTE: Make sure that the wave washers are installed on the pilot ends of the connecting shafts. A coating of general purpose grease on the wave washer will help keep the wave washer on the shaft during installation.

1. Install the new module (1) and engage the connecting drive shaft from the inboard spacer into the repaired module.

2. Slide the loosened modules from the beam inboard towards the repaired module, and engage the connecting drive shaft into the repaired module.

3. Install and torque the hardware (2) that fastens the adjacent spacers to the new module.

• Torque hardware to 115 N·m (85 lb ft).

4. Install the rock guard (3).

• Torque the hardware to 164 N·m (121 lb ft).

93110135

1

NHVM14HT00165AA

2

93110135

3

5. Install the hardware (1) that secures the backside of each module to the header frame.

• Torque the hardware to 115 N·m (85 lb ft).

6. Torque the vertical bolts (1) that go through the slots in the spacers to 115 N·m (85 lb ft).

48049004 14/11/2016

58.1 [58.110] / 47

Attachments/Headers - Attachment/Header cutting mechanism

7. Install each module skid shoe (1).

• Torque the hardware (2) to 115 N·m (85 lb ft).

NHIL13HT00512AA

4

93110117

5

8. If you replace a failed lower module with a new lower module, remove the shipping cover, not shown, from the top opening on the new lower module, and then discard that cover. Pour 310 ml (12 US fl oz) of TUTELA HYPOIDE EP GEAR LUBE SAE 80W-90 or CNH HYPOIDE SSL SYNTHETIC GEAR LUBE 75W-90 through the top opening into the module.

NOTE: Oil can be added through the dipstick hole if the top cap assembly is installed and sealed.

9. Install the top cap assembly as follows: A. Prior to the installation of the top cap assembly, clean the mating surface on the disc module and the threads of the top cap bolts.

B. Apply a thin bead of LOCTITE® SI 598™ BLACK oil resistant sealant to the sealing flange of the top cap assembly (1).

C. Position the top cap assembly onto the lower module assembly with the breather (2) opposite the pinion gear.

D. Apply LOCTITE® SI 598™ BLACK oil resistant sealant to the ends of the threads of the top cap retaining bolts.

E. Install the four 1/2 x 1-1/4 inch, grade 5 bolts and Belleville lock washers (3).

F.

Torque the hardware to 115 N·m (85 lb ft).

48049004 14/11/2016

58.1 [58.110] / 48

Attachments/Headers - Attachment/Header cutting mechanism

10. For a shock hub installation, follow Step 11 through Step 15 .

11. Install the lower positioned splined washer (4A) onto the spine shaft (7).

12. Install shock hub (5) onto the disc module (6).

13. Time the shock hub with the rest of the cutterbar such that the discs will be 90 ° apart.

14. Install the upper splined washer (4B) onto the spline shaft and onto the shock hub.

15. Install the top cap center bolt as follows: A. Apply a sufficient amount of gear oil to cover the threads and under the head of the new top cap center bolt.

B. Install the top cap center bolt (1), the conical washer (2) with the cupped side facing downward, and the hardened washer (3).

C. Torque bolt to 244 N·m (180 lb ft).

NOTE: When installing conical washer, make sure that the cupped side of the washer is facing downward.

76106813

6

93107687

7

NOTICE: Be precise with the torque application. Do not over-torque or under-torque top center bolt.

16. Install the disc (1) and bolt cover (2) with the four retaining bolts and lock washers (3). Torque retaining bolts to 113 N·m (83 lb ft).

48049004 14/11/2016

58.1 [58.110] / 49

Attachments/Headers - Attachment/Header cutting mechanism

Standard drive hub – Install 17. For a standard drive hub installation follow Step 18 through Step 20.

18. Install drive hub (1) on top cap (2).

19. Time the drive hub with the rest of the cutter bar such that the discs will be 90 ° apart.

20. Install top cap center bolt (3) and hardened washer (4) as follows: A. Apply a sufficient amount of gear oil to cover the threads and under the head of the new top cap center bolt.

B. Install top cap center bolt (3) and hardened washer (4).

761002893

8

NHVM14HT00053AA

9

C. Torque the center bolt to 244 N·m (180 lb ft).

NOTICE: Be precise with the torque application. Do not over-torque or under-torque top center bolt.

21. Install the disc (1) drum (2) and drive shaft (if removed), and then secure the assembly with the removed hardware.

22. Torque the hardware to 115 N·m (85 lb ft).

23. Install the shield (3), and then secure the shield with the removed hardware (4).

48049004 14/11/2016

58.1 [58.110] / 50

Index Attachments/Headers - 58 Attachment/Header cutting mechanism - 110 Attachment/Header cutting mechanism - Static description Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3

Disc cutterbar - Assemble - Cutterbar module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

40

Disc cutterbar - Assemble - Cutterbar module top cap assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

46

Disc cutterbar - Change fluid - Cutterbar module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

32

Disc cutterbar - Check - Oil level - Cutterbar module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

31

Disc cutterbar - Component identification - Cutterbar modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7

Disc cutterbar - Disassemble - Cutter bar module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

36

Disc cutterbar - Disassemble - Cutterbar module top cap assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

44

Disc cutterbar - Inspect - Cutterbar module top cap assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

45

Disc cutterbar - Inspect - Lower cutterbar module components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

39

Disc cutterbar - Install - Cutterbar assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

29

Disc cutterbar - Install - Cutterbar module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

47

Disc cutterbar - Install - Rock guards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

21

Disc cutterbar - Remove - Cutter bar module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

34

Disc cutterbar - Remove - Cutterbar assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

27

Disc cutterbar - Remove - Rock guards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

20

Disc cutterbar - Replace - Bolt-on knives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10

Disc cutterbar - Replace - Crop lifter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

19

Disc cutterbar - Replace - Quick change knife system - Knives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

12

Disc cutterbar - Replace - Quick-change knife system - Knife bolt and knife nut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

15

Disc cutterbar - Replace - Quick-change knife system - Spring plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

16

Disc cutterbar - Replace - ShockPro™ hub . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

24

Disc cutterbar - Static description - Disc knives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5

Disc cutterbar Cutter module skid shoe - Install . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

23

Disc cutterbar Cutter module skid shoe - Remove . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

22

Quick-change knife kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6

48049004 14/11/2016

58.1 [58.110] / 51

48049004 14/11/2016

58.1 [58.110] / 52

Attachments/Headers - 58 Attachment/Header frame - 130

Discbine® 313 Discbine® 316

48049004 14/11/2016

58.2 [58.130] / 1

Contents Attachments/Headers - 58 Attachment/Header frame - 130

FUNCTIONAL DATA Flotation system Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

SERVICE Header shields Remove - Flail curtain support frame (*) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Install - Flail curtain support frame (*) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Remove - Windrow forming shields - Flail conditioner (*) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Install - Windrow forming shields - Flail conditioner (*) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Remove - Windrow forming shields - Roll conditioner (*) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Install - Windrow forming shields - Roll conditioner (*) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

Crop deflector Remove - Push bar (*) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Install - Push bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

Flotation system Remove - Flotation springs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Install - Flotation springs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Adjust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

(*) See content for specific models 48049004 14/11/2016

58.2 [58.130] / 2

Attachments/Headers - Attachment/Header frame

Flotation system - Overview DANGER Crushing hazard! The header will fall rapidly if the hydraulic lift system fails.

ALWAYS engage the header lift lock channels when you work around a raised header.

Failure to comply will result in death or serious injury.

D0189A

Header flotation – Overview The flotation springs (1) at each end of the header control the header flotation.

Header operation with incorrect header flotation settings can result in the following: • Header side-drift and excessive component wear, if the header flotation weight is too heavy • Long or irregular crop stubble height, if the header flotation weight is too light

NHIL13HT00485AA

1

Follow the guidelines below to check and adjust the header flotation: • Check and adjust the cutterbar flotation when you use the machine on a tractor with a different drawbar height, or when you install or remove the high stubble kit or the cane and biomass harvesting kit.

• Check the header flotation frequently, because crop and dirt buildup can cause the flotation force to change.

• Check the header flotation with the header set in the field operating position after performing the following actions: ○ Center the tongue and the header behind the tractor ○ Fully lower the header to the ground ○ Tilt the header to the desired cutting height that you operate at in the field.

NOTE: If you change the header tilt during operation, you will affect the header flotation. Check the header flotation if you change the header tilt.

• The flotation adjustment must allow the header cutterbar to maintain contact with the ground.

Header flotation specification • For smooth field operation at standard ground speeds of 11 - 14 km/h (7 - 9 mph), set the header flotation weight to 59 - 68 kg (130 - 150 lb) weight on both ends of the header to prevent excessive header bounce.

• For rocky field operation at lower ground speeds of 8 - 11 km/h (5 - 7 mph), set the header flotation weight to 45 54 kg (99 - 119 lb).

48049004 14/11/2016

58.2 [58.130] / 3

Attachments/Headers - Attachment/Header frame

Header shields - Remove - Flail curtain support frame Discbine® 313 Flail conditioner Discbine® 316 Flail conditioner

Overview You can remove the curtain assembly and support arms in two groups as follows: A. Remove the curtain assembly consisting of the disassembly of the curtain with mounting tube (1) from the support arms (2) and curtain brackets (3).

B. Remove the left-hand side and right-hand side support arms (2) from the support arm mounting brackets.

NHIL14HT00180AA

1

NOTE: The curtain assembly support arms are left-hand side and right-hand side specific. Label the supports arms for correct installation assembly.

Curtain assembly – Remove 1. At both ends of the curtain assembly, remove the 5/16 inch serrated flange nut, flat washer, and carriage bolt (1) that secures the curtain end to the curtain bracket (5).

2. Remove the 3/8 inch flange locknuts and 3/8 x 2 inch flange head bolts that secure the curtain mounting tube (2) to each support arm (4).

3. With the aid of an assistant to support the curtain assembly, pull and slide the curved end of the support arm outward from the mounting tube to remove the curtain assembly.

NHIL16HT00825AA

2

NOTE: If there is not enough flexibility for you to pull the support arm outward, you may need to loosen the two bolts that are described in the removal of the curtain assembly support arms that follows.

Curtain assembly support arms – Remove The removal procedure of the curtain assembly support arms is the same for both the left-hand side and right-hand side support arms.

NOTE: The curtain assembly support arms are left-hand side and right-hand side specific. Label the supports arms for correct installation assembly.

48049004 14/11/2016

58.2 [58.130] / 4

Attachments/Headers - Attachment/Header frame

1. With the aid of an assistant to support each support arm, remove the two sets of 5/8 inch hex nuts and Belleville lock washers (3).

2. Support the weight of the support arm (1).

3. Remove the two 5/8 x 3-1/2 inch bolts that secure the support arm to the mounting brackets (2).

NHIL13HT00517AA

48049004 14/11/2016

58.2 [58.130] / 5

3

Attachments/Headers - Attachment/Header frame

Header shields - Install - Flail curtain support frame Discbine® 313 Flail conditioner Discbine® 316 Flail conditioner

Install the curtain assembly and support arms in two groups as follows: A. Install the left-hand side and right-hand side support arms (2) onto the support arm mounting brackets.

B. Install the curtain assembly consisting of the curtain with mounting tube (3) and the curtain brackets (1) onto the support arms (2).

NHIL14HT00180AA

1

Curtain assembly support arms – Install The installation procedure of the curtain assembly support arms is the same for both the left-hand side and right-hand side support arms.

NOTE: The curtain assembly support arms are left-hand side and right-hand side specific. The correct orientation of the support arm is with the longest support at the top of arm assembly and the curved end curves inward.

1. Select and properly orient the support arm (1) for the relevant left-hand side or right-hand side installation.

2. Lift the support arm, and then position the support arm between the mounting brackets (2).

3. Align the bolt holes, and then install the two 5/8 x 3-1/2 inch bolts outward through the mounting bracket and support arm to secure the support arm to the mounting brackets 4. Install the lock washers, and then install 5/8 inch nuts onto the bolts.

NHIL13HT00517AA

2

NOTE: With both supports installed, before you fully tighten and torque the hardware, consider to install the curtain assembly onto the ends of the support arms, and then torque the support arm 5/8 inch nuts. Next, complete the hardware installation of the curtain assembly.

5. Torque the nuts (3) to nominal torque specifications.

48049004 14/11/2016

58.2 [58.130] / 6

Attachments/Headers - Attachment/Header frame

Curtain assembly – Install 1. With both support arms installed and the full face of the curtain facing rearward, slide one end of curtain assembly mounting tube (2) onto the end of the support arm (4).

2. At the opposite side support arm and with the aid of an assistant to support the curtain assembly, pull outward on the support arm to allow clearance for you to insert the end of the support arm into mounting tube.

3. Install the two 3/8 x 2 inch flange bolts (3), and then install the 3/8 inch flange locknuts.

4. Torque the locknuts to the nominal torque specification.

5. Install the 5/16 inch serrated flange nut, the flat washer, and the carriage bolt (1) that secures the curtain end to the curtain bracket (5).

6. Torque the locknuts to nominal torque specifications.

48049004 14/11/2016

58.2 [58.130] / 7

NHIL16HT00825AA

3

Attachments/Headers - Attachment/Header frame

Header shields - Remove - Windrow forming shields - Flail conditioner Discbine® 313 Flail conditioner Discbine® 316 Flail conditioner

The removal procedure for both the left-hand side and right-hand side windrow forming shields is the same.

1. Remove the hairpin cotter (1) from the adjustment rod (2).

2. Pull the adjustment rod downward and away from the adjustment hole support.

NHIL16HT00823AA

1

NHIL16HT00824AA

2

3. With the aid of an assistant to support the weight of the shield (1), remove the two 1/2 inch flange locknuts (2).

4. Remove the 1/2 x 4 inch hex head bolts (3) along with the Belleville lock washers.

5. Remove the shield from the hinge assembly.

48049004 14/11/2016

58.2 [58.130] / 8

Attachments/Headers - Attachment/Header frame

Header shields - Install - Windrow forming shields - Flail conditioner Discbine® 313 Flail conditioner Discbine® 316 Flail conditioner

The installation procedure for both the left-hand side and right-hand side windrow forming shields is the same.

1. With the aid of an assistant to support the weight of the shield (1), position and align the shield hinges into the frame hinge assembly.

2. With a Belleville lock washer installed onto each of the 1/2 x 4 inch hex head bolts (3), first, install the bolt for the lower hinge downward through the lower hinge and then install a 1/2 flange locknut onto the lower bolt.

3. Install the bolt for the upper hinge upward through the upper hinge, and then install a 1/2 flange locknut onto the upper bolt.

4. Tighten each locknut so that there is no end play of the bolt and so that you can freely rotate the shield by hand.

NHIL16HT00824AA

1

NHIL16HT00823AA

2

5. Position the windrow forming shield for the desired opening, and then install the adjustment rod (2) into the related hole on the adjustment hole support.

6. Install the hairpin cotter (1) into adjustment rod.

48049004 14/11/2016

58.2 [58.130] / 9

Attachments/Headers - Attachment/Header frame

Header shields - Remove - Windrow forming shields - Roll conditioner Discbine® Discbine® Discbine® Discbine®

313 313 316 316

Rubber conditioning rolls Steel conditioning rolls Rubber conditioning rolls Steel conditioning rolls

The removal procedure for both the left-hand side and right-hand side windrow forming shields is the same.

1. Remove the hairpin cotter (2) from the adjustment rod (1).

2. Pull the adjustment rod upward and away from the adjustment hole strip on the shield.

NHIL16HT00821AA

1

NHIL16HT00826AA

2

3. With the aid of an assistant to support the weight of the shield (4), remove the 3/8 inch flange locknut (1), and then remove the 3/8 x 3-1/2 inch hex head bolt from the collar (2) and hinge pipe on the shield assembly.

4. Remove the collar.

5. Lower the shield to extract the hinge pipe from hinge tube (3).

48049004 14/11/2016

58.2 [58.130] / 10

Attachments/Headers - Attachment/Header frame

Header shields - Install - Windrow forming shields - Roll conditioner Discbine® Discbine® Discbine® Discbine®

313 313 316 316

Rubber conditioning rolls Steel conditioning rolls Rubber conditioning rolls Steel conditioning rolls

The installation procedure for both the left-hand side and right-hand side windrow forming shields is the same.

1. With the aid of an assistant to support the weight of the shield (4), align and insert the hinge pipe into the hinge tube (3), and then lift the shield to fully insert the hinge pipe.

2. Install the collar (2) over the hinge pipe, and then align the bolt holes.

3. Install the 3/8 x 3-1/2 inch hex head bolt through the collar and hinge pipe.

4. Install the 3/8 inch flange locknut (1).

5. Torque the flange locknut to the nominal torque specification.

NHIL16HT00826AA

1

NHIL16HT00821AA

2

6. Position the windrow forming shield for the desired opening, and then install the adjustment rod (1) into the related hole on the adjustment hole strip.

7. Install the hairpin cotter (2) into adjustment rod.

48049004 14/11/2016

58.2 [58.130] / 11

Attachments/Headers - Attachment/Header frame

Crop deflector - Remove - Push bar Discbine® 313 Discbine® 316

NOTE: This instruction covers the complete removal of all the push bar kit assembly components with the exception of the push bar tube clamping hardware, assuming there is a necessity to remove all of the components from the machine. The instructions are applicable to both the Discbine® 313 and the Discbine® 316 disc mower-conditioner.

Push bar tubes – Remove Left-hand 1. Remove the left-hand tube (1), as follows: A. Loosen only, the outside end clamping hardware (2) of the left-hand tube.

B. Slide the left-hand tube outward from the center tube left-hand end clamp.

NHVM13HT00652AA

1

NHIL16HT00810AA

2

NHIL16HT00811AA

3

Right-hand 2. Remove the right-hand tube (1), as follows: A. Loosen only, the outside end clamping hardware (2) of the left-hand tube.

B. Slide the left-hand tube outward from the center tube right-hand end clamp.

Center 3. Remove the center tube (1), as follows: A. Loosen only, the both sets of the clamping hardware (2).

B. Slide the center tube outward from the clamping hardware.

48049004 14/11/2016

58.2 [58.130] / 12

Attachments/Headers - Attachment/Header frame

Push bar channels – Remove 4. Remove the three 3/8 in x 1-1/4 in bolts (2) and flat washers per channel to remove the four push bar channels (1) from each push bar mounting bracket (3).

NHIL13HT00707AA

4

NHIL13HT00708AA

5

NHIL13HT00711AA

6

Channel mounting brackets – Remove 5. Remove the four push bar brackets (1) from the machine.

6. Remove the mounting bracket (2) from each of the two middle frame mounting locations by removing the four 3/8 x 1-1/4 inch bolts (1) and flat washers per bracket.

7. Remove the mounting bracket from each end frame mounting locations by removing the two 3/8 x 1-1/4 inch bolts and flat washers per bracket.

48049004 14/11/2016

58.2 [58.130] / 13

Attachments/Headers - Attachment/Header frame

Crop deflector - Install - Push bar NOTE: This instruction covers the complete installation of all the push bar kit assembly components assuming that all the components were removed from the machine. The instructions are applicable to both the Discbine® 313 and the Discbine® 316 disc mower-conditioner.

Channel mounting brackets – Install 1. Install the four push bar brackets (1) onto the machine.

NHIL13HT00708AA

1

NHIL13HT00711AA

2

NHIL13HT00707AA

3

2. Install a mounting bracket (2) onto each of the two middle frame mounting locations with four 3/8 x 1-1/4 inch bolts (1) and flat washers per bracket.

• Torque the hardware to the nominal torque specification.

3. Position and install the outer two brackets to the outer frame mounting locations so that the only the inner set of two holes of the mounting bracket align with the two holes in the frame.

• Use two 3/8 x 1-1/4 inch bolts and flat washers per bracket.

• Torque the hardware to the nominal torque specification.

Push bar channels – Install 4. Use three 3/8 in x 1-1/4 in bolts (2) and flat washers per channel to install the four push bar channels (1) onto each push bar mounting bracket (3).

48049004 14/11/2016

58.2 [58.130] / 14

Attachments/Headers - Attachment/Header frame

Push bar tubes – Install NOTE: The push bar tube are of different lengths, and the center tube is of a different outer diameter to all ow for the left-hand tube and the right-hand tube to insert into the center tube. You must install the center tube first.

• Center tube: ○ Length – 1014 mm (40 in), ○ Outer diameter – 57.15 mm (2.25 in) • Left-hand tube: ○ Length – 2265 mm (89 in) • Right-hand tube: ○ Length – 1810 mm (71 in) The installation of the push bar tubes onto the push bar channels uses the following order of hardware assembly as shown: (1) – 3/8 x 4 inch long bolts (2) – Flat washers (3) – C-clamp (4) – Push bar (5) – Upper and lower bar clamps (6) – Flat washers (7) – 3/8 inch flanged locknuts

NHIL13HT00709AA

4

NHVM13HT00652AA

5

5. Install the center tube (2),as follows, with the described hardware shown in Figure 4: A. Loosely install the center tube onto the push bar channel onto the two middle push bar channels.

B. Center the center tube to the middle channels.

C. Torque the hardware to the nominal torque specification.

6. Install the left-hand tube (3), as follows: A. Slide one end of the left-hand tube into the center tube.

B. Position the outside end of the left-hand tube to align parallel with the ending width of the specific disc mower.

C. Torque the left-hand end installation hardware to the nominal torque specification.

7. Install the right-hand tube (1), as follows: A. Slide one end of the right-hand tube into the center tube.

B. Position the outside end of the right-hand tube to align with the ending width of the specific disc mower.

C. Torque the right-hand installation hardware to the nominal torque specification.

48049004 14/11/2016

58.2 [58.130] / 15

Attachments/Headers - Attachment/Header frame

Flotation system - Remove - Flotation springs

NHIL16HT00820FA

1

The flotation spring removal that follows is the same for both the left-hand side and right-hand side flotation springs.

1. Loosen the 5/8 inch jam nut (2).

2. With a permanent marker or tape, mark the thread rod of the bolt weld assembly at the location of the square nut at the top of the flotation spring to indicate the existing flotation setting.

3. Remove the tension on the flotation by turning the 5/8 inch bolt weld assembly (1) counterclockwise until space between the flotation spring coils fully collapses.

4. With the aid of an assistant supporting the collapsed flotation spring, continue to fully extract the bolt assembly from the flotation spring.

5. Remove the 5/8 inch flange locknut, and then remove the 5/8 inch flange bolt (3) that secures the flotation spring to the frame.

6. Remove the flotation spring from between the mounting links (4).

48049004 14/11/2016

58.2 [58.130] / 16

Attachments/Headers - Attachment/Header frame

Flotation system - Install - Flotation springs

NHIL16HT00820FA

1

The flotation spring installation that follows is the same for both the left-hand side and right-hand side flotation springs.

1. Install the base of the flotation spring from between the mounting links (4).

2. Install the 5/8 inch flange bolt (3) that secures the flotation spring to the frame, and then install the 5/8 inch flange locknut.

3. Torque the locknut to the nominal torques specification.

4. With the aid of an assistant supporting the collapsed flotation spring, and making sure that the flat washer is under the jam nut (2), begin to turn the 5/8 inch bolt weld assembly (1) clockwise into the flotation spring.

5. Continue tightening the bolt weld assembly into the flotation spring until the square nut of the flotation spring aligns with the tension setting indicator mark on the bolt threads.

6. Check and make any desired flotation adjustment only after you install both flotation springs. ○ See Flotation system - Adjust (58.130).

7. Tighten the 5/8 inch jam nut (2) when that desired flotation is set.

48049004 14/11/2016

58.2 [58.130] / 17

Attachments/Headers - Attachment/Header frame

Flotation system - Adjust NOTE: You will require a spring scale with a minimum capacity of 68 kg (150 lb).

1. Position the tongue and header centered behind the tractor, with the header fully lowered to the ground, and the header tilted for the desired cutting height.

NOTE: Figure 1 depicts a machine with a roll conditioner.

The process is the same for a machine with a flail conditioner.

2. Raise the cutterbar access shields (1).

NOTE: On a 4.9 m (16 ft) machine, you must additionally fold open the left-hand outer end access shield to access the outermost end support to lift on in Step 3.

3. Attach a spring scale onto one of the header end supports (2).

NHIL13HT00407AA

1

4. Lift upward on the scale, and then note the weight the scale indicate when the header begins to rise upward.

5. On the opposite end of the machine, repeat the weight measurement.

The header flotation weight should be within the specifications below, based on operating condition. If adjustment is required, see the section titled “Header flotation – Adjust”.

• For smooth field operation at standard ground speeds of 11 - 14 km/h (7 - 9 mph), set the header flotation weight to 59 - 68 kg (130 - 150 lb) weight on both ends of the header to prevent excessive header bounce.

• For rocky field operation at lower ground speeds of 8 - 11 km/h (5 - 7 mph), set the header flotation weight to 45 - 54 kg (99 - 119 lb).

Header flotation – Adjust NOTICE: Do not exceed 68 kg (150 lb) of flotation weight. Exceeding the flotation weight specification may result in damage to the header.

1. Loosen the jam nut (2) on the adjusting bolt (1) on each side of the machine.

2. Turn the adjusting bolts an equal amount of turns to increase or decrease the flotation weight to the desired setting.

3. Perform the steps described in “Header flotation – Check.”

4. When you achieve the desired header flotation, securely tighten the jam nut securely against the cast spring nut (3).

NHIL16HT00031AA

48049004 14/11/2016

58.2 [58.130] / 18

2

Index Attachments/Headers - 58 Attachment/Header frame - 130 Crop deflector - Install - Push bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

14

Crop deflector - Remove - Push bar (*) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

12

Flotation system - Adjust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

18

Flotation system - Install - Flotation springs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

17

Flotation system - Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3

Flotation system - Remove - Flotation springs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

16

Header shields - Install - Flail curtain support frame (*) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6

Header shields - Install - Windrow forming shields - Flail conditioner (*) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9

Header shields - Install - Windrow forming shields - Roll conditioner (*) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11

Header shields - Remove - Flail curtain support frame (*) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4

Header shields - Remove - Windrow forming shields - Flail conditioner (*) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8

Header shields - Remove - Windrow forming shields - Roll conditioner (*) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10

(*) See content for specific models 48049004 14/11/2016

58.2 [58.130] / 19

CNH Industrial America New Holland Site 100 Brubaker Avenue New Holland, Pennsylvania United States 17557 SERVICE - Technical Publications & Tools

PRINTED IN U.S.A. © 2016 CNH Industrial America LLC. All rights reserved. No part of the text or illustrations of this publication may be reproduced.

NEW HOLLAND policy is one of continuous improvement and the right to change prices, specification or equipment at any time without notices is reserved.

All data given in this publication is subject to production variations. Dimensions and weight are approximate only and the illustrations do not necessarily show products in standard condition. For exact information about any particular product, please consult your NEW HOLLAND Dealer.

48049004 14/11/2016 EN

SERVICE MANUAL Product feeding Discbine® 313 Discbine® 316

48049004 14/11/2016

60

Contents Product feeding - 60

[60.120] Header drive system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60.1 [60.620] Roll conditioning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60.2 [60.630] Flail conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60.3

48049004 14/11/2016

60

Product feeding - 60 Header drive system - 120

Discbine® 313 Discbine® 316

48049004 14/11/2016

60.1 [60.120] / 1

Contents Product feeding - 60 Header drive system - 120

FUNCTIONAL DATA Bevel gearbox Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

SERVICE Header drive belt Replace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

Driven gear Remove - Lower sheave . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Install - Lower sheave . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

Drive pulley Remove - Upper sheave . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Install - Upper sheave . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

Bevel gearbox Change fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Remove . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Disassemble . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Assemble . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Install . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

48049004 14/11/2016

60.1 [60.120] / 2

Product feeding - Header drive system

Bevel gearbox - Overview

NHIL16HT00883FA

1

The bevel gearbox is a fixed right-angle gearbox. The bevel gearbox transfers torque from the cross-header Power Take-Off (PTO) shaft at the input shaft (1) to the cutterbar drive PTO through a splined lower output shaft (2). The lower output shaft directly drives the cutterbar. The bevel gearbox also transfers power to the conditioner belt drive through a keyed upper output shaft (3).

A set of tapered roller bearings support each shaft. The large gear on the input shaft drives the lower output shaft for the cutterbar drive, and the small gear on the input shaft drives the upper input shaft for the conditioner belt drive.

48049004 14/11/2016

60.1 [60.120] / 3

Product feeding - Header drive system

Header drive belt - Replace 1. Remove the tension on the belt by loosening the jam nut and adjusting nut (1) on the spring tension rod until the belt can be removed from the upper sheave.

2. Slide the belt off between the sheaves.

NHIL13HT00414AA

1

NHIL13HT00414AA

2

3. Install the new belt onto the sheaves, and tighten nuts on spring tension rod to adjust spring (1) to a length of 209 mm (8.25 in) (A) from inside hook to inside hook.

NOTE: Roll conditioning unit shown. Flail conditioning drive belt replacement uses the same procedure.

48049004 14/11/2016

60.1 [60.120] / 4

Product feeding - Header drive system

Driven gear - Remove - Lower sheave 1. Open the left-hand shield to access the roll drive components.

2. Loosen the jam nut and the adjusting nut (1) on the eye bolt to relieve the tension on the conditioner drive belt (2).

3. Remove the drive belt.

NHIL16HT00003FA

1

NHIL16HT00294AA

2

4. Remove the six bolts and washers from the lower sheave (1).

5. Remove the sheave from the hub.

48049004 14/11/2016

60.1 [60.120] / 5

Product feeding - Header drive system

Driven gear - Install - Lower sheave 1. Install the lower sheave (2) onto the lower hub (1).

2. Install the six bolts (4) and washers (3) that secure the lower sheave.

3. Finger-tighten the six bolts and washers on the lower sheave.

4. Check to make sure that the sheaves are aligned to within 3 mm (0.12 in). If not, add or remove shims from the top sheave to achieve this alignment specification.

NHIL16HT00989AA

1

NHIL16HT00003FA

2

5. Install the conditioner drive belt (1) and adjust the tension spring (2) to a length of 209 mm (8.25 in) from inside hook to inside hook.

6. Make sure that the conditioner drive belt is centered on the idler to within 1.5 mm (0.06 in) and that it is not rubbing on the idler arm. Adjust the shims at the idler arm pivot, if required.

7. Torque the six bolts and washers on the sheave to 52 N·m (38 lb ft).

48049004 14/11/2016

60.1 [60.120] / 6

Product feeding - Header drive system

Drive pulley - Remove - Upper sheave 1. Open the left-hand shield to access the roll drive components.

2. Loosen the jam nut and the adjusting nut (1) on the eye bolt to relieve the tension on the conditioner drive belt (2).

3. Remove the drive belt.

NHIL16HT00003FA

1

NHIL16HT00294AA

2

4. Remove the six bolts and washers from the upper sheave (1).

5. Remove the sheave and the shims from the hub. Keep the shims with the same sheave for installation.

48049004 14/11/2016

60.1 [60.120] / 7

Product feeding - Header drive system

Drive pulley - Install - Upper sheave 1. Install the upper sheave (1) and the shims (2) onto the upper hub (5).

NOTE: If the sheave is moved to change conditioner roll speed, the adjustment shims must remain with this larger diameter sheave.

2. Install the six bolts (3) and washers (4) that secure the upper sheave.

3. Finger-tighten the six bolts and washers on the upper sheave.

4. Check to make sure that the upper and lower sheaves are aligned to within 3 mm (0.12 in). If not, add or remove shims from the top sheave to achieve this alignment specification.

NHIL16HT00470AA

1

NHIL16HT00003FA

2

5. Install the conditioner drive belt (1) and adjust the tension spring (2) to a length of 209 mm (8.25 in) from inside hook to inside hook.

6. Make sure that the conditioner drive belt is centered on the idler to within 1.5 mm (0.06 in) and that it is not rubbing on the idler arm. Adjust the shims at the idler arm pivot, if required.

7. Torque the six bolts and washers on the sheave to 52 N·m (38 lb ft).

48049004 14/11/2016

60.1 [60.120] / 8

Product feeding - Header drive system

Bevel gearbox - Change fluid Specification Use 800 mL (27 US fl oz) of TUTELA HYPOIDE EP GEAR LUBE SAE 80W-90 or CNH HYPOIDE SSL SYNTHETIC GEAR LUBE 75W-90 (synthetic).

The bevel gearbox oil should be changed every 300 hours or yearly, whichever comes first.

1.

Access the drain plug by removing the cutterbar Power Take-Off (PTO) shield.

2.

Drain oil by removing the plug (2) on the bottom of the bevel gearbox.

3.

Apply LOCTITE® SI 598™ BLACK sealant to the threads of the drain plug before reinstalling in the bevel gearbox.

4.

Insert a funnel into the fill hole (1) on the top of the bevel gearbox, and then add 800 mL (27 US fl oz) of gear oil.

48049004 14/11/2016

60.1 [60.120] / 9

NHIL13HT00509AA

1

Product feeding - Header drive system

Bevel gearbox - Remove 1. Squeeze the trumpet shield (2) and slide the trumpet shield backwards over the Power Take-Off (PTO) shaft (1).

2. Disconnect the cross-header PTO drive shaft from the bevel gearbox (3).

NHVM14HT00052AA

1

NHVM14HT00053AA

2

NHVM14HT00054AA

3

NHVM14HT00055AA

4

3. Remove the four bolts (1) that secure the vertical header-drive PTO shield (2), and then remove the front half of the shield.

4. Open the header side shield, and then loosen the nut (3) on the end of the tensioner eye bolt (4) to release tension on the conditioner drive belt.

5. Remove the drive sheave (2) from the output shaft of the bevel gearbox (1).

6. Remove the four bolts (1) that secure the bevel gearbox to the header.

NOTICE: The cutterbar drive PTO (2) is not bolted to the output shaft of the bevel gearbox. When you lift the gearbox off of the header, make sure that the shaft does not drop.

NOTE: The dry weight (without oil weight) of the bevel gearbox is 33 kg (73 lb).

48049004 14/11/2016

60.1 [60.120] / 10

Product feeding - Header drive system

7. With the assistance of another person or a hoisting device, slowly lift the bevel gearbox up and off of the cutterbar drive PTO yoke.

NHVM14HT00047AA

48049004 14/11/2016

60.1 [60.120] / 11

5

Product feeding - Header drive system

Bevel gearbox - Disassemble 1. Prior to disassembly, drain the oil from the bevel gearbox, as follows: A. Prepare a method for capturing and disposal of the drain oil from the gearbox.

B. Remove the combination breather/dipstick (1) from the gearbox to prevent damage during disassembly.

C. Remove the oil drain plug (2).

D. Capture and completely drain the oil from both gearboxes.

E. Dispose of the captured oil in accordance with shop practice and/or local oil recycling requirements.

NHIL14HT00280AA

1

NHIL14HT00281AA

2

NHIL14HT00282AA

3

NHIL14HT00283AA

4

2. Remove the oil seals (1) and (2) from the input shaft and the upper output shaft.

3. Remove the caps (3) and (4).

4. Remove the four bolts (5) that secure the lower output shaft cover (6) to the gearbox.

5. Remove the cover.

6. Remove the eight bolts (1) that secure the input shaft cover cover (2) to the gearbox.

7. Remove the snap ring (3) and the shim (4).

8. Remove the bearing cup (5).

9. Use a brass hammer to drive the input shaft (1) out in the indicated direction.

10. Remove the snap ring (2) and the shim (3).

11. Remove the bearing cup (4) from the gearbox housing.

48049004 14/11/2016

60.1 [60.120] / 12

Product feeding - Header drive system

12. Use a bearing puller to remove the bearing cones (1) from the input shaft.

13. Remove the bevel gear (2).

14. Remove the key (3) from the key seat in the shaft.

15. Remove the shim (4).

16. Remove the spacer (5).

17. Remove the snap ring (6).

NHIL14HT00284AA

5

NHIL14HT00285AA

6

NHIL14HT00287AA

7

NHIL14HT00286AA

8

18. Remove the locknut (1) from the upper output shaft.

19. Remove the shim (2).

20. Remove the pinion gear (3).

21. Remove the shim (4).

22. Use a brass hammer to drive the upper output shaft (5) out in the indicated direction in order to extract it from the housing.

23. Retrieve the bearing cone (6) from inside of the gearbox housing.

24. Use a bearing puller to remove the bearing cone (7) from the upper output shaft.

25. Remove the oil seal (1) from the lower output shaft.

26. Remove the snap ring (2).

27. Remove the shim (3).

28. Use a brass hammer to drive the lower output shaft (1) out of the housing in the indicated direction.

29. Use a bearing puller to remove the bearing (2).

30. Use a bearing puller to remove the bearing cones (3) from the lower output shaft.

31. Remove the shim (4).

48049004 14/11/2016

60.1 [60.120] / 13

Product feeding - Header drive system

32. Remove the bearing cups (1) and (2) from the gearbox housing.

NHIL14HT00288AA

48049004 14/11/2016

60.1 [60.120] / 14

9

Product feeding - Header drive system

Bevel gearbox - Assemble 1. Insert the bearing cups (1) and (2) into the housing.

NHIL14HT00288AA

1

NHIL14HT00286AA

2

NHIL14HT00290AA

3

2. Install the shim (2) and the bearing cone (3) onto the pinion shaft (1).

3. Install the shaft assembly into the housing.

4. Install the bearing cone (4) onto the shaft.

5. Install the snap ring (1).

6. Use an inch-pound rated torque wrench to check the bearing preload and record the value.

7. Hit the shaft from both sides with a brass hammer to set the shaft place.

8. Check the shaft preload again with a torque wrench.

The difference between the two values must be 1.2 4.5 kg·cm (1.04 - 3.91 lb·in). If the value is not correct, change the number of shims (2).

48049004 14/11/2016

60.1 [60.120] / 15

Product feeding - Header drive system

9. Install the bearing cone (1) onto the shaft (2).

10. Install the shaft assembly into the gearbox housing.

11. Install the bearing cone (3) onto the shaft.

12. Install the shim (4) onto the shaft.

13. Install the gear (5) onto the shaft.

14. Install the shim (6) onto the shaft.

15. Apply LOCTITE® 270 thread-locking sealant to the locknut threads (7).

16. Torque the locknut to a minimum of 10 kg·cm (8.68 lb·in).

NHIL14HT00285AA

4

NHIL14HT00284AA

5

NHIL14HT00283AA

6

17. Hit the shaft from both sides (2) with a brass hammer to set the shaft place.

18. Use an inch-pound rated torque wrench to check the bearing preload.

• If the value is not between 6 - 10 kg·cm (5.21 8.68 lb·in), tighten or loosen the locknut until the bearing preload is within the specification.

19. Install the bearing cone (1) onto the shaft (2).

20. Install the snap ring (4).

21. Install the spacer (5).

22. Install a shim (6).

23. Install the square key (3) into the key seat in the shaft.

24. Install the bevel gear (7) onto the shaft.

25. Install the bearing cone (8).

26. Install the bearing cup (3) into the housing.

27. Install a shim (2).

28. Install a snap ring (1).

29. Install the shaft assembly (4).

48049004 14/11/2016

60.1 [60.120] / 16

Product feeding - Header drive system

30. Press the bearing cup (1) into the inside of the cover (2).

31. Install the cover (2) with eight bolts (3). Snug the bolts following the 8-bolt tightening pattern without applying a final torque.

32. Install a shim (4) over the shaft and against the bearing.

33. Install the snap ring (5) to secure the shim.

34. Use an inch-pound rated torque wrench to check the bearing preload.

35. Remove the snap ring (5).

NHIL14HT00282AA

7

NHIL16HT00890AA

8

NHIL16HT00902AA

9

36. Hit the shaft from both sides with a brass hammer to set the shaft place.

37. Check the shaft preload again with a torque wrench.

• If the value is not between 6 - 10 kg·cm (5.21 8.68 lb·in), tighten or loosen the locknut until the proper value is achieved.

• The difference between the two values must be 5 9 kg·cm (4.34 - 7.81 lb·in).

• If the value is not within this range, change the number of shims. If the number of shims is changed, the preload will also need to be reset.

38. Check the backlash between the bevel gear and the splined output shaft gear.

A. Install a dial indicator (1) on the splined output shaft and zero it out.

B. Hold the splined output shaft steady and turn the splined input shaft.

C. The measured backlash should be 0.16 0.42 mm (0.006 - 0.017 in). Adjust the shims (2) (Figures 2 and 4) or the shim (4) (Figure 7) to achieve the specification.

39. Check the backlash between the splined input shaft gear and the keyed output shaft gear.

A. Install a dial indicator (1) on the splined input shaft and zero it out.

B. Hold the splined output shaft steady and turn the splined input shaft back and forth.

C. The measured backlash should be 0.15 0.40 mm (0.006 - 0.016 in). Adjust the shims (4) and (6) (Figures 4), the shim (2) (Figure 6), or the shim (4) (Figure 7) to achieve the specification.

NOTE: If you changed the shim positions to correct the backlash setting, you must set the bearing preload again.

48049004 14/11/2016

60.1 [60.120] / 17

NHIL16HT00903AA

10

Product feeding - Header drive system

40. Apply PERMATEX ® NON-DRYING PRUSSIAN BLUE gear marking compound to the teeth of both sets of gears, and then check the gear tooth contact pattern (1).

NOTE: Figure 11 is for reference only.

The gear tooth contact pattern should be centered on each tooth and there should be clearance between the contact pattern and the top of the tooth.

• See Gearbox - Shimming - Gear tooth contact pattern (31.220) for more information.

NHIL16HT00830AA

11

NHIL14HT00281AA

12

NHIL14HT00280AA

13

41. Remove the eight bolts (7) that secure the cover (8), and then remove the cover.

42. Apply a thin bead of LOCTITE® SI 598™ BLACK sealant or DOW CORNING® 7091 ADHESIVE SEALANT BLACK sealant between the gearbox housing and the cover.

43. Install the cover and the bolts.

• Torque the bolts to 49 - 62.8 N·m (36.1 - 46.3 lb ft).

44. Install the oil seals (1) and (2).

45. Install the caps (3) and (4).

46. Install the cover (5) and the four bolts (6).

• Torque the bolts to 24.5 - 31.4 N·m (18.1 - 23.2 lb ft).

47. Apply LOCTITE® SI 598™ BLACK sealant or DOW CORNING® 7091 ADHESIVE SEALANT BLACK to the threads of the drain plug (1), and install the drain plug into the housing.

• Torque the drain plug to 29.4 N·m (21.7 lb ft).

48. Fill the gearbox with 800 mL (27 US fl oz) of TUTELA HYPOIDE EP GEAR LUBE SAE 80W-90 or CNH HYPOIDE SSL SYNTHETIC GEAR LUBE 75W-90 (synthetic).

49. Install the breather plug/dipstick (2) and washer (3), and then confirm the proper oil fill level with dipstick.

48049004 14/11/2016

60.1 [60.120] / 18

Product feeding - Header drive system

Bevel gearbox - Install 1. Lower the bevel gearbox onto the cutterbar drive Power Take-Off (PTO) shaft (2).

NHVM14HT00055AA

1

NHVM14HT00054AA

2

NHVM14HT00053AA

3

2. Secure the gearbox to the header frame with the four bolts (1).

NOTE: The cutterbar drive PTO (2) is not bolted to the output shaft of the bevel gearbox. When lifting the gearbox off of the header, make sure that the shaft does not drop.

3. Install the drive sheave (2) on the output shaft of the bevel gearbox (1).

4. Tighten the nut (3) on the end of the tensioner eye bolt (4) to put tension on the conditioner drive belt.

5. Install four bolts (1) to secure the vertical header drive PTO shield (2).

48049004 14/11/2016

60.1 [60.120] / 19

Product feeding - Header drive system

6. Reconnect the cross-header PTO drive shaft (1) to the bevel gearbox (3).

7. Squeeze the trumpet shield (2) and slide the trumpet shield forward over the PTO shaft (1).

NHVM14HT00052AA

48049004 14/11/2016

60.1 [60.120] / 20

4

Index Product feeding - 60 Header drive system - 120 Bevel gearbox - Assemble . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

15

Bevel gearbox - Change fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9

Bevel gearbox - Disassemble . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

12

Bevel gearbox - Install . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

19

Bevel gearbox - Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3

Bevel gearbox - Remove . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10

Drive pulley - Install - Upper sheave . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8

Drive pulley - Remove - Upper sheave . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7

Driven gear - Install - Lower sheave . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6

Driven gear - Remove - Lower sheave . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5

Header drive belt - Replace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4

48049004 14/11/2016

60.1 [60.120] / 21

48049004 14/11/2016

60.1 [60.120] / 22

Product feeding - 60 Roll conditioning - 620

Discbine® 313 Discbine® 316

48049004 14/11/2016

60.2 [60.620] / 1

Contents Product feeding - 60 Roll conditioning - 620

FUNCTIONAL DATA Roll conditioning Static description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

SERVICE Lower conditioner roll Remove . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Install . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Remove - Left-hand bearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Install - Left-hand bearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Remove - Right-hand bearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Install - Right-hand bearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Remove - Drive shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Disassemble - Drive shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Assemble - Drive shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Install - Drive shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Adjust - Roll timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Adjust - Roll gap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

Tension arm and torsion bar Remove - Left-hand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Install - Left-hand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Remove - Right-hand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Install - Right-hand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Remove - Tension adjuster tube . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Install - Tension adjuster tube . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Remove - Torsion bar adjustment crank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Install - Torsion bar adjustment crank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Adjust - Roll pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

Upper conditioner roll Remove . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Install . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Remove - Right-hand bearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

48049004 14/11/2016

60.2 [60.620] / 2

Install - Right-hand bearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Remove - Drive shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Disassemble - Drive shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Assemble - Drive shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Install - Drive shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

Pivot arm Remove - Upper conditioner roll - Left-hand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 Install - Upper conditioner roll - Left-hand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Remove - Upper conditioner roll - Right-hand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 Install - Upper conditioner roll - Right-hand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

Conditioner roll gearbox Conditioner drive gearbox – Change fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Remove . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 Disassemble . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 Assemble . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 Install . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

Swathgate Remove . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 Install . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

48049004 14/11/2016

60.2 [60.620] / 3

Product feeding - Roll conditioning

Roll conditioning - Static description The machine is equipped with two chevron intermeshing conditioner rolls (1) to condition the crop thoroughly yet gently for fast drying without leaf loss or crop damage. Cut crop is fed directly from the cutterbar into the conditioner rolls. The conditioner rolls are adjustable for clearance, pressure and timing.

NHIL13HT00288AA

1

NHIL13HT00413AA

2

NHIL13HT00305AA

3

The lower conditioner roll is driven from the left-hand side conditioner belt drive (1). This belt drive is attached to the right-angle gearbox at the front left-hand side of the header.

The conditioner roll gearbox (2) on the right-hand side of the machine takes power from the lower conditioner roll and drives the upper conditioner roll.

48049004 14/11/2016

60.2 [60.620] / 4

Product feeding - Roll conditioning

Roll conditioning - Overview The roll conditioning system passes the cut crop through a set of closely-spaced intermeshing rolls with matching lands and valleys.

The rolls crush and crack the plant stem at several points along its length, which wears away the waxy coating and allows moisture to escape.

There are two conditioner rolls (1) and (2) in a roll conditioning system.

• The lower conditioning roll (2) is stationary in the machine.

• The upper conditioning roll (1) can pivot upward and downward to let the crop mat feed through the conditioning rolls without causing a blockage of crop.

19988033

1

• The roll gap and the roll tension affect crop conditioning.

Roll gap The roll gap is the clearance space between the land (high surface) of one conditioner roll and the valley (low surface) of the opposite conditioner roll.

To obtain peak machine performance and efficiency, check the roll gap before each cutting during the season, and also when cutting different forage crops because each crop will be different.

In high-volume crops like Sudan grass and other cane-type crops, increase the roll gap slightly to get better crop flow through the rolls without sacrificing good crop conditioning.

With the rubber conditioner rolls, you must make sure that you center the lands and valleys of the intermeshing conditioner rolls to maintain a uniform distance on all sides of the lands.

For best roll conditioning performance, maintain a roll gap clearance as follows: • For rubber conditioner rolls – 0.4 - 3 mm (1/64 - 1/8 in) • For steel conditioner rolls – 5 - 7 mm (0.20 - 0.28 in) Conditioner rolls – Roll gap configuration

NHIL16HT00026AA

2

NHIL15HT00904AA

Rubber conditioner rolls

3

Steel conditioner rolls

48049004 14/11/2016

60.2 [60.620] / 5

Product feeding - Roll conditioning

To check the roll gap easily and quickly in the field, use the 'one stem method' as follows: • Take one stem of the crop being cut prior to passing through the conditioning rolls.

• ○ Insert the single stem into the roll gap between the conditioner rolls at three or four points across the width of the conditioner rolls. ○ The stem should slide between the rolls, with some resistance.

■ If the stem passes through the gap with little or no resistance, set the gap closer.

If you cannot pass the stem between the rolls at all, increase the gap slightly.

Conditioner roll tension After you set the roll gap, adjust the roll tension. Roll tension is the amount of pressure added to restrict upper roll movement as the crop feeds through the rolls.

Hard-to-condition crops require more tension. Light and easily-conditioned crops require less tension.

Higher conditioner roll tensions increase the pressure exerted on the crop mat as the crop mat moves between the lands and valleys of the conditioner rolls, thereby increasing the ability of the conditioner rolls to crack and wear the stem away.

Higher conditioner roll tensions result in more aggressive crop conditioning because the rolls become more resistant to spreading apart as the crop is fed through.

Too large a roll gap or too little conditioner roll tension will under-condition the crop. resulting in extended dry down times and increased potential for weather-related damage.

Too close of a roll gap or too much conditioner roll tension can severely over-condition the crop. The over-conditioning of the crop breaks the crop tops away from the plants and causes excessive leaf loss.

Additionally, too close of a roll gap or too much conditioner roll tension will cause excessive wear of the conditioner rolls if the conditioner rolls contact each other during operation.

Torsion bar tensioning system The torsion bar tensioning system maintains uniform pressure throughout the range of the conditioner roll movement as the crop mat passes between the conditioner rolls.

The uniform conditioner roll pressure provides better control of the crop to reduce potential crop blockages.

For most crops and crop conditions, a good starting point for the application of torsion bar tension on intermeshing conditioner rolls is to increase the roll tension by turning the adjusting crank eight full turns after you start to feel resistance on the crank handle.

48049004 14/11/2016

60.2 [60.620] / 6

Product feeding - Roll conditioning

Properly conditioned crop Features of properly conditioned crop: • The conditioned crop shows a pattern of cracks at regular intervals along the plant stem.

• Each crack will be about 25 - 50 mm (1 - 2 in) in length.

• The stem is flat in the cracked areas.

• Dependent on crop height when cut, at least two or three cracks are along the plant length.

• The plant leaves should show only minimal bruising. ○ The character of leaf bruises is the appearance of dark green streaks or marks across the leaf surface with the following results: ○ While some leaf bruising is unavoidable, too much leaf bruising is not good because the bruises allow moisture to escape the leaf. ○ When the leaf moisture can escape, the leaf dries too quickly, resulting in loss of the plant leaf before or during packaging. ○ Leaf loss reduces the overall feed value of the crop.

Conditioned crop – Check DANGER Crushing hazard!

The safety lock built into the header lift system locks the header in the raised position. Engage the safety lock before working under a raised header.

Failure to comply will result in death or serious injury.

D0071B

WARNING Avoid injury! Always do the following before lubricating, maintaining, or servicing the machine.

1. Disengage all drives.

2. Engage parking brake.

3. Lower all attachments to the ground, or raise and engage all safety locks.

4. Shut off engine.

5. Remove key from key switch.

6. Wait for all machine movement to stop.

Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury.

W1299A

Check the condition crop as follows: 1. After fresh cut crop processes through the conditioner rolls, apply the above safety message rules.

2. Grab a handful of crop from the windrow directly behind the machine.

3. Examine the plant stems. ○ The plant stems should be fairly limp and just fold over your hand. ○ Nine out of 10 plant stems, in a random sample, should show stem cracks.

4. Inspect the leaves in the same random sample; no more than 5 % of the leaves should have significant bruising.

48049004 14/11/2016

60.2 [60.620] / 7

Product feeding - Roll conditioning

Upper conditioner roll positions: Upper conditioner roll – Home position at 0 ° The machine operation is idle prior to beginning to cut crop: • The upper conditioner roll (2) is in the home position at 0 ° at the preset conditioning pressure.

• The link (1) is straight.

• The home position allows the application of full downward pressure of the torsion bar (4) onto the upper roll arm assembly (3).

NHIL16HT00056AA

4

NHIL16HT00057AA

5

NHIL16HT00058AA

6

Upper conditioner roll – Partially open at 15 ° The machine is cutting crop in the field: • The upper conditioner roll (1) begins to move upward from the stationary roll (3) as the cut crop enters the conditioning system.

• The link (2) starts to move rearward while the torsion bar (4) maintains downward conditioning pressure.

Conditioner roll – Fully open at 27.3 ° The machine encounters a crop blockage or foreign object: • The upper conditioner roll (2) moves to fully open due to a crop blockage or a foreign object entering between the conditioner rolls.

• The link (1) no longer applies direct downward pressure to the roll arm assembly (3) from the torsion bar arm (4).

• Downward conditioner pressure stops when the conditioner roll arm upward movement stops. The conditioner roll arm contacts the torsion bar arm at point (A) where the link lower end connects to the roll arm and stops the upward movement.

• The upper conditioner roll will return downward to home position and apply the preset conditioning pressure after the foreign object or crop blockage passes through the conditioner rolls.

48049004 14/11/2016

60.2 [60.620] / 8

Product feeding - Roll conditioning

Lower conditioner roll - Remove 1. Raise the header fully, and then engage the header lift locks by pivoting both the right-hand and left-hand lock levers (1) forward.

NHIL13HT00304AA

1

NHVM13HT00588AA

2

NHIL14HT00092AA

3

NHIL14HT00093AA

4

2. Install the header tilt pin (1) through the channel slot and the rear hole of the cylinder rod to lock the header in the level position.

3. Lower the header onto the transport locks.

4. On the right-hand side of the header, remove the upper conditioner roll drive shield (1). It is secured with five flange bolts and nuts at (A) and (B).

5. Loosen and remove the hardware (1), and then disconnect the flange yoke (2) from the conditioner roll gearbox (3). The flange yoke is secured with four 1/2 x 1 inch bolts with two flat washers per bolt.

48049004 14/11/2016

60.2 [60.620] / 9

Product feeding - Roll conditioning

6. Slide the yoke (1) off of the lower conditioner roll shaft (2), and then remove the drive shaft from the machine.

NHIL14HT00094AA

5

NHIL13HT00490AA

6

NHIL14HT00095AA

7

NHIL14HT00096AA

8

7. On the left-hand side of the header, open the side shield (1).

8. Loosen the jam nut (1), and then loosen the nut (2) to relieve tension from the lower conditioner roll drive belt (3).

9. Loosen and remove the 3/4 inch nut (1). and washer (2).

10. Use a puller to remove the lower conditioner roll drive sheave and hub.

NOTE: The sheave is secured to the hub, which is keyed and sits on a tapered shaft.

48049004 14/11/2016

60.2 [60.620] / 10

Product feeding - Roll conditioning

11. Retain the square key (1) from the keyseat in the shaft (2).

NHIL14HT00097AA

9

12. On both sides of the lower conditioner roll: A. Loosen the set screw on the lock collar.

B. Loosen and remove the lock collar (1) by placing a punch in the drift hole and striking it sharply with a hammer in the opposite direction of shaft rotation, as indicated by the arrow in Figures 10 and 11.

48049004 14/11/2016

60.2 [60.620] / 11

NHIL14HT00098AA

10

NHIL14HT00099AA

11

Product feeding - Roll conditioning

C. Loosen and remove the four 1/2 x 1-1/4 inch flange bolts and nuts (1).

D. Remove the strap (2) and roll shield (3) from the header frame.

NHIL14HT00100AA

12

NHIL14HT00101AA

13

NHIL14HT00190AA

14

NHIL14HT00191AA

15

13. Place a lifting device (1) under the lower conditioner roll (2) for support as it is removed from the header frame.

14. Loosen and remove the four 1/2 inch flange nuts from each flange bearing, and then use the lifting device to slide the lower conditioner roll out through the slots in the header frame.

NOTE: If the flange bearings are tight and prevent the lower conditioner roll from moving in the slots, then use a pry bar to move them away from the header frame.

NOTE: A longer stub shaft protrudes from the left-hand side of the lower conditioner roll. Pivot the right-hand side of the lower conditioner roll out first, and then slide the lefthand side out.

48049004 14/11/2016

60.2 [60.620] / 12

Product feeding - Roll conditioning

Lower conditioner roll - Install 1. With the lower conditioner roll on a lifting device, install the conditioner roll through the slots in the header frame.

NOTE: A longer stub shaft protrudes from the left-hand side of the lower conditioning roll. Pivot the right-hand side of the lower conditioning roll in first, and then slide the lefthand side in.

2. Secure the flange bearings to the header frame with four 1/2 x 1-1/2 inch carriage bolts and 1/2 inch flange nuts.

NHIL14HT00191AA

1

NHIL14HT00098AA

2

NHIL14HT00099AA

3

3. On both sides of the lower conditioner roll: A. Center the lower conditioner roll between the header frame side sheets.

B. Install and tighten the lock collar (1) by placing a punch in the drift hole and striking it sharply with a hammer in the direction of shaft rotation, as indicated by the arrow in Figures 2 and 3.

C. Tighten the set screw on the lock collar.

48049004 14/11/2016

60.2 [60.620] / 13

Product feeding - Roll conditioning

D. Install the roll shield (3).

E. Install the strap (2).

F. Secure the roll shield and strap with four 1/2 x 1-1/4 inch flange bolts and nuts (1).

• Torque the four nuts to 113 N·m (83 lb ft)

NHIL14HT00100AA

4

NHIL14HT00101AA

5

NHIL14HT00097AA

6

NHIL14HT00096AA

7

4. Install the previously removed square key (1) from the keyseat in the shaft (2).

5. Install the lower conditioner roll drive sheave (1), and then secure the sheave with the flat washer (2) and 3/4 inch nut (3).

NOTE: The sheave installs with the narrow side of the web toward the outside of the header.

6. Torque the 3/4 inch nut to 235 - 265 N·m (173 - 195 lb ft).

7. Tap the hub with a hammer, and then torque the nut to the specification in Step 6.

8. Repeat Step 7 until the tapers are fully seated and the torque stabilizes.

48049004 14/11/2016

60.2 [60.620] / 14

Product feeding - Roll conditioning

9. Install the lower conditioner roll drive belt (3).

10. Sheaves and idler must align within 3 mm (1/8 in). .

• Remove or add shims between hub and sheave as required 11. Tension the belt by adjusting the nut (2) until a spring length of 210 mm (8.25 in) from inside hook to inside hook is achieved.

NHIL14HT00095AA

8

NHIL13HT00490AA

9

12. Close the left-hand side shield (1).

13. On the right-hand side of the header, slide the yoke (1) onto the lower conditioner roll shaft (2).

NOTE: Install the drive shafts so that the lubrication fittings can be greased from one position. When the lubrication fittings are facing up on the upper conditioner roll drive shaft, the lubrication fittings on the lower conditioner roll shaft should be facing toward the rear of the machine.

NHIL14HT00094AA

10

NHIL14HT00093AA

11

14. Connect the flange yoke (2) to the conditioner roll gearbox (3), and then secure the yoke flange with four 1/2 x 1 inch bolts (1) with two flat washers per bolt.

15. Adjust the timing of the upper and lower rolls by centering the lug of one roll in the groove of the mating roll to within 3 mm (0.12 in).

16. Tighten the 1/2 x 1 inch bolts.

48049004 14/11/2016

60.2 [60.620] / 15

Product feeding - Roll conditioning

17. Install the upper conditioner roll drive shield (1), and then secure the drive shield with five 5/16 x 3/4 inch flange bolts and 5/16 inch flange nuts (2).

NHIL14HT00092AA

12

NHVM13HT00588AA

13

NHIL13HT00304AA

14

18. Adjust the position of the header tilt pin (1) for the desired header tilt.

19. Raise the header fully, and then disengage the header lift locks by pivoting both the right-hand and left-hand lock levers (1) rearward.

48049004 14/11/2016

60.2 [60.620] / 16

Product feeding - Roll conditioning

Lower conditioner roll - Remove - Left-hand bearing 1. Raise the header fully, and then engage the header lift lock channels by pivoting both the right-hand and left-hand lock levers (1) forward.

NHIL13HT00304AA

1

NHVM13HT00588AA

2

NHIL13HT00490AA

3

NHIL14HT00095AA

4

2. Install the header tilt pin (1) through the channel slot and the rear hole of the cylinder rod to lock the header in the level position.

3. Lower the header onto the lift lock channels.

4. On the left-hand side of the header, open the side shield (1).

5. Loosen the jam nut (1), and then loosen the nut (2) to relieve tension from the lower conditioner roll drive belt (3).

48049004 14/11/2016

60.2 [60.620] / 17

Product feeding - Roll conditioning

6. Loosen and remove the 3/4 inch nut (1). and washer (2).

7. Use a puller to remove the lower conditioner roll drive sheave and hub.

NOTE: The sheave is secured to the hub, which is keyed and sits on a tapered shaft.

NHIL14HT00096AA

5

NHIL14HT00097AA

6

NHIL14HT00098AA

7

8. Retain the square key (1) from the keyseat in the shaft (2).

9. On the left-hand bearing: A. Loosen the set screw on the lock collar.

B. Loosen and remove the lock collar (1) by placing a punch in the drift hole and striking it sharply with a hammer in the opposite direction of shaft rotation, as indicated by the arrow.

C. Loosen and remove the four 1/2 inch flange nuts (3) from the bearing (2).

D. Use a puller to remove the bearing from the shaft.

48049004 14/11/2016

60.2 [60.620] / 18

Product feeding - Roll conditioning

Lower conditioner roll - Install - Left-hand bearing 1. On the left-hand side of the lower conditioner roll: A. Install the left-hand bearing (2) and secure with the four 1/2 x 1-1/2 inch carriage bolts and 1/2 inch flange nuts (3).

B. Make sure that you center the lower conditioner roll between the header frame side sheets.

C. Install and tighten the lock collar (1) by placing a punch into the drift hole and striking the punch sharply with a hammer in the direction of shaft rotation, as indicated by the arrow.

D. Tighten the set screw on the lock collar.

NHIL14HT00098AA

1

NHIL14HT00097AA

2

NHIL14HT00096AA

3

NHIL14HT00095AA

4

2. Install the previously removed square key (1) from the keyseat in the shaft (2).

3. Install the lower conditioner roll drive sheave (1), and then secure it with the flat washer (2) and 3/4 inch nut (3).

NOTE: The sheave installs with the narrow side of the web toward the outside of the header.

4. Torque the 3/4 inch nut to 235 - 265 N·m (173 - 195 lb ft).

5. Tap the hub with a hammer, and then torque the nut to the specification in Step 4 .

6. Repeat Step 5 until the tapers are fully seated and the torque stabilizes.

7. Install the lower conditioner roll drive belt (3).

8. Sheaves and idler must align within 3 mm (1/8 in).

• Remove or add shims between hub and sheave as required.

9. Tension the belt by adjusting the nut (2) until a spring length of 210 mm (8.25 in) from inside hook to inside hook is achieved.

48049004 14/11/2016

60.2 [60.620] / 19

Product feeding - Roll conditioning

10. Close the left-hand side shield (1).

NHIL13HT00490AA

5

NHVM13HT00588AA

6

NHIL13HT00304AA

7

11. Adjust the position of the header tilt pin (1) for the desired header tilt.

12. Raise the header fully, and then disengage the header lift lock channels by pivoting both the right-hand and left-hand lock levers (1) rearward.

48049004 14/11/2016

60.2 [60.620] / 20

Product feeding - Roll conditioning

Lower conditioner roll - Remove - Right-hand bearing 1. Raise the header fully, and then engage the header lift lock channels by pivoting both the right-hand and left-hand lock levers (1) forward.

NHIL13HT00304AA

1

NHVM13HT00588AA

2

NHIL14HT00092AA

3

NHIL14HT00093AA

4

2. Install the header tilt pin (1) through the channel slot and the rear hole of the cylinder rod to lock the header in the level position.

3. Lower the header onto the transport locks.

4. On the right-hand side of the header, remove the upper conditioner roll drive shield (1). Five flange bolts and nuts at (A) and (B) secure the shield..

5. Loosen and remove the hardware (1), and then disconnect the flange yoke (2) from the conditioner roll gearbox (3).

• Four 1/2 x 1 inch bolts with two flat washers per bolt secure the flange yoke.

48049004 14/11/2016

60.2 [60.620] / 21

Product feeding - Roll conditioning

6. Slide the yoke (1) off of the lower conditioner roll shaft (2), and then remove the drive shaft from the machine.

NHIL14HT00094AA

5

NHIL14HT00099AA

6

7. On the right-hand bearing: A. Loosen the set screw on the lock collar.

B. Loosen and remove the lock collar (1) by placing a punch in the drift hole and striking it sharply with a hammer in the opposite direction of shaft rotation, as indicated by the arrow.

C. Loosen and remove the four 1/2 inch flange nuts from the bearing.

D. Use a puller to remove the bearing from the shaft.

48049004 14/11/2016

60.2 [60.620] / 22

Product feeding - Roll conditioning

Lower conditioner roll - Install - Right-hand bearing 1. On the right-hand side of the lower conditioner roll: A. Install the right-hand bearing (2) and secure with the four 1/2 x 1-1/2 inch carriage bolts and 1/2 inch flange nuts (3).

B. Make sure that you center the lower conditioner roll between the header frame side sheets.

C. Install and tighten the lock collar (1) by placing a punch into the drift hole and striking the punch sharply with a hammer in the direction of shaft rotation, as indicated by the arrow.

D. Tighten the set screw on the lock collar.

NHIL14HT00099AA

1

NHIL14HT00094AA

2

NHIL14HT00093AA

3

NHIL14HT00092AA

4

2. Slide the yoke (1) onto the lower conditioner roll shaft (2).

NOTE: Install the drive shafts so that the lubrication fittings can be greased from one position. When the lubrication fittings are facing up on the upper conditioner roll drive shaft, the lubrication fittings on the lower conditioner roll shaft should be facing toward the rear of the machine.

3. Connect the flange yoke (2) to the conditioner roll gearbox (3), and then secure the flange yoke with four 1/2 x 1 inch bolts (1) along with two flat washers per bolt.

4. Adjust the timing of the upper and lower rolls by centering the lug of one roll in the groove of the mating roll to within 3 mm (0.12 in).

5. Tighten the 1/2 x 1 inch bolts.

6. Install the upper conditioner roll drive shield (1), and then secure it with five 5/16 x 3/4 inch flange bolts and 5/16 inch flange nuts (2).

48049004 14/11/2016

60.2 [60.620] / 23

Product feeding - Roll conditioning

7. Adjust the position of the header tilt pin (1) for the desired header tilt.

NHVM13HT00588AA

5

NHIL13HT00304AA

6

8. Raise the header fully, and then disengage the header lift locks channels by pivoting both the right-hand and left-hand lock levers (1) rearward.

48049004 14/11/2016

60.2 [60.620] / 24

Product feeding - Roll conditioning

Lower conditioner roll - Remove - Drive shaft 1. On the right-hand side of the header, remove the upper conditioner roll drive shield (1).

• Five flange bolts and nuts at (2) secure the drive shield.

NHIL14HT00092AA

1

NHIL14HT00093AA

2

NHIL14HT00094AA

3

2. Loosen and remove the hardware (1), and then disconnect the flange yoke (2) from the conditioner roll gearbox (3).

• Four 1/2 x 1 inch bolts with two flat washers per bolt secure the flange yoke.

3. Slide the yoke (1) off of the lower conditioner roll shaft (2), and then remove the drive shaft from the machine.

48049004 14/11/2016

60.2 [60.620] / 25

Product feeding - Roll conditioning

Lower conditioner roll - Disassemble - Drive shaft 1. The lower drive shaft does not slide apart, but each Universal joint (U-joint) is serviced separately.

2. The U-joint bearing cups are retained with externaltype retaining rings (1) positioned on the inner side of the yoke ears. Remove the retaining rings by positioning a screwdriver against the open end of the retaining ring, and then give a light blow to the screwdriver to pop the retaining ring off the bearing cup.

1441-6-7

1

1411-8-7

2

1411-8-8

3

3. Remove the lubrication fitting (1) from the one bearing cup.

NOTE: The lubrication fitting is oriented to line up with the other lubrication fittings on the drive shaft. Take note of the position of the lubrication fitting prior to removal.

4. Position the U-joint in an open vise, with each ear of one yoke supported by a vise jaw.

5. With a soft hammer or mallet, strike the top ear of the unsupported yoke at (1). This will drive the top bearing outward approximately 8 mm (1/4 in).

NOTICE: Do not use a hard faced hammer, as this may damage the edge of the bearing cup bore in the yoke, causing the bearing cup to hang up or seize in the yoke.

6. Pull the bearing out of the yoke ear. If necessary, grip the loosened bearing in a vise, and drive the yoke off the bearing by striking the yoke ear with the soft faced hammer or mallet.

7. This same procedure should be followed to remove the bearing directly opposite the one just removed, after which the yoke itself may be removed.

8. To remove the remaining two bearings, support the cross in the vise, making certain the vise jaws are covered with brass protectors or the previously removed bearings are reinstalled on the cross.

• By striking the yoke ear, you can then remove the bearings as per Steps 4 through 6.

48049004 14/11/2016

60.2 [60.620] / 26

Product feeding - Roll conditioning

Lower conditioner roll - Assemble - Drive shaft 1. To assemble the Universal joint (U-joint), position the cross (1) in the yoke so that the bearing caps are positioned in each yoke ear.

2. Insert the bearings in the outside of the yoke ears, and then position the assembly in a vise.

3. Press the bearings in until they are flush with the edge of the yoke.

4. Using a socket of the same diameter as the bearing, press the bearing into the yoke ear until the retaining ring groove is exposed on the inside of the yoke ear.

5. Install the retaining ring over the bearing cup.

1411-8-9

1

1441-7-8

2

6. Reposition the yoke and cross in the vise, and then use the socket to press the opposite bearing fully into the yoke ear while rotating the cross to make sure that it does not bind up.

7. Continue to press the bearing into the yoke ear until you can install the retaining ring.

A. Push the bearing in as far as possible with the vise.

B. Remove the yoke assembly and strike the yoke ears with a sharp blow from a hammer to spring the yoke enough to install the retaining ring.

8. Assemble the second yoke to the cross, repeating Steps 1 through 7.

NOTE: The lubrication fitting (1) should be oriented to line up with the other lubrication fittings (2) on the drive shaft for ease of lubrication. Make note of the positioning of the bearing up for the lubrication fitting during assembly to make sure that it aligns with the other lubrication fittings.

9. After completing the assembly of the U-joint, strike the forged surfaces of all yoke ears with a sharp blow from a hammer.

• Striking the forged surfaces will make sure that all bearings seat properly, and eliminates any possible tightness for a free flexing joint.

NOTICE: Use caution not to strike the bearing bore area of the yoke, as this will damage the bore and may cause premature cross bearing failure.

48049004 14/11/2016

60.2 [60.620] / 27

Product feeding - Roll conditioning

Lower conditioner roll - Install - Drive shaft NOTE: This procedure is for the lower conditioner roll drive shaft.

1. On the right-hand side of the header, slide the yoke (1) onto the lower conditioner roll shaft (2).

NOTE: Install the drive shafts so that you can grease the lubrication fittings from one position. When the lubrication fittings are facing upward on the upper conditioner roll drive shaft, the lubrication fittings on the lower conditioner roll shaft should be facing toward the rear of the machine.

NHIL14HT00094AA

1

NHIL14HT00093AA

2

NHIL14HT00092AA

3

2. Connect the flange yoke (2) to the conditioner roll gearbox (3), and then secure the flange yoke with four 1/2 x 1 inch bolts (1) with two flat washers per bolt.

3. Adjust the timing of the upper and lower rolls by centering the lug of one roll in the groove of the mating roll to within 3 mm (0.12 in).

4. Tighten the 1/2 x 1 inch bolts.

5. Install the upper conditioner roll drive shield (1), and then secure the drive shield with five 5/16 x 3/4 inch flange bolts and 5/16 inch flange nuts (2).

48049004 14/11/2016

60.2 [60.620] / 28

Product feeding - Roll conditioning

Lower conditioner roll - Adjust - Roll timing The lug of one roll should be centered between the two lugs of the opposite roll. The lugs must not touch.

1431-11-8-12N

1

NHIL14HT00093AA

2

To reset the timing: 1.

Removing shielding to expose the lower conditioner roll drive shaft.

2.

Loosen the 1/2 inch bolts (1) on the flange yoke.

3.

Center the lower roll lug in the top roll lug gap and hold the drive shaft in place.

4.

Tighten the bolts.

5.

Check the timing by applying reverse rotational force on both rolls.

6.

Install all shielding.

48049004 14/11/2016

60.2 [60.620] / 29

Product feeding - Roll conditioning

Lower conditioner roll - Adjust - Roll gap NOTICE: Check and adjust the roll gap after you cut and condition the first 20 ha (50 ac) of crop. Check and adjust the roll gap again after you cut and condition every additional 40 ha (100 ac) of crop.

NOTE: In certain cane type crops like Sorghum, Sudex, and Sudan grass, an increase of the roll gap, may be necessary in order to feed the crop through the rolls and to prevent over-conditioning of the stalks.

In Figure 1 and Figure 2 the roll gap is the space between intermeshing high surfaces (1) and low surfaces (2) of the conditioner rolls. The high surface on a conditioner roll is commonly referred to as the land, and the low surface is referred to as the valley.

• Operate the machine with the roll gap as close as possible for best performance.

• The conditioner rolls must never touch each other at any point in the rotation of the rolls.

• Always check the clearance with roll pressure applied.

• Always rotate the rolls for one complete revolution to determine the minimum clearance point.

Roll gap – Rubber conditioner rolls The roll gap (A) specifications for best performance: • (A) = 0.4 - 3 mm (1/64 - 1/8 in)

NHIL16HT00026AA

1

NHIL15HT00904AA

2

Roll gap – Steel conditioner rolls The roll gap (A) specifications for best performance: • (A) = 5 - 7 mm (0.20 - 0.28 in)

48049004 14/11/2016

60.2 [60.620] / 30

Product feeding - Roll conditioning

Adjust the roll gap follows: 1.

Rotate the lock plate (1) off of the adjustment nut (2).

2.

In small increments, turn the adjustment nut located on each end of the header. ○ The roll clearance will change approximately 2 mm (0.079 in) per revolution of the nut. ○ See Roll conditioning - Overview (60.620) “Roll gap” for additional roll gap adjustment information using crop material.

3.

Measure the roll gap.

NHIL13HT00316AA

5. After you make the adjustment, rotate the lock plate onto the adjustment nut.

6. Manually and slowly rotate the conditioner rolls to visibly make sure that there is no contact along the full width of the conditioner roll.

48049004 14/11/2016

60.2 [60.620] / 31

3

Product feeding - Roll conditioning

Tension arm and torsion bar - Remove - Left-hand 1. Completely loosen the roll pressure tension by rotating the roll pressure handle (1) counterclockwise until loose.

NOTICE: Failure to loosen the roll pressure may result in sudden movement of the roll tension system components or the upper conditioner roll, causing injury or component damage.

NHIL13HT00396AA

1

NHIL14HT00132AA

2

NHIL13HT00397AA

3

NHIL16HT00472AA

4

Remove the swathgate: A. Loosen the tension on the swathgate springs (1) (right-hand side shown) by loosening the hex nut (2).

B. Disconnect the swathgate springs from the swathgate.

C. Remove the cotter pin and linchpin that secures the swathgate adjustment handle (2) to the header frame.

D. Remove the cotter pin and washer that secures each end of the swathgate (1) to the header frame.

2. Remove each clamp (1), each set of hardware (2) (carriage bolt, lock washer, locking flange nut), and plate (3) that secures the curtain to the torsion bar (4).

3. Remove the curtain (5).

48049004 14/11/2016

60.2 [60.620] / 32

Product feeding - Roll conditioning

4. Loosen and remove the bolt (1) and spacer from the left-hand tension arm straps to the pivot arm.

5. Lower the tension arm (2) down onto the roll pivot arm.

NHIL14HT00125AA

5

NHIL14HT00126AA

6

NHIL14HT00127AA

7

NHIL14HT00129AA

8

6. Loosen the bolt (1), and then pivot the plate (2) downward.

7. Grip the left-hand torsion rod (1) tightly using a pair of locking pliers, and then tap the pliers to shift the torsion rod toward the left-hand side of the machine and out of the center adjusting tube and tension arm.

NOTE: It may be necessary to apply penetrating fluid to loosen the hex ends of the torsion arms.

8. Remove the left-hand torsion arm: A. Remove the retaining ring (1) and washer (2).

B. Slide the tension arm out of the header frame.

NOTE: If the bushing (3) in the header frame is worn or galled, use a hammer and punch to drive the bushing out.

48049004 14/11/2016

60.2 [60.620] / 33

Product feeding - Roll conditioning

Tension arm and torsion bar - Install - Left-hand 1. Install a new bushing (3) into the header frame by driving it in flush with the tube.

2. Apply LOCTITE® 767 or an equivalent anti-seize compound to the inner surface of the bushing and the tension arm shaft.

3. Insert the tension arm through the frame, and then secure it with the washer (2) and retaining ring (1).

NHIL14HT00129AA

1

NHIL14HT00127AA

2

NHIL14HT00126AA

3

NHIL16HT00472AA

4

4. Apply LOCTITE® 767 or an equivalent anti-seize compound to the hex bores of the adjusting tube and tension arm and to the ends of the torsion bar.

5. Slide the torsion bar (1) through the tension arm until the inner end engages in the adjusting tube (2).

6. Continue to slide the torsion bar in until it is fully seated in the tension arm.

7. Swing the plate (3) up over the end of the torsion bar, and then tighten the bolt (4).

8. Lift the tension arm (1) upward until the tension straps (2) align with the bushing in the pivot arm (3).

9. Install and tighten the previously removed bolt and spacer.

10. Secure the curtain to the torsion bar (4) (right-hand side) or adjusting tube (center) at each location with a clamp (1), a set of hardware (2) (carriage bolt, lock washer, locking flange nut), and a plate (3).

48049004 14/11/2016

60.2 [60.620] / 34

Product feeding - Roll conditioning

11.

Install the swathgate onto the header frame: A. Insert the right-hand side of the swathgate through the header frame.

B. Lift the left-hand side up to align with the hole in the header frame, and then slide the swathgate toward the left-hand side of the machine until the adjusting handle clip engages a notch in the quadrant bracket.

C. Install washers (1) on the left-hand side of the swathgate so that the swathgate cannot disengage from the quadrant bracket when the cotter pin is installed.

NHIL14HT00134AA

5

NHIL14HT00132AA

6

NHIL13HT00396AA

7

D. Install the cotter pin to secure the left-hand side of the swathgate.

E. Install washers to take up the clearance on the right-hand side of the swathgate.

F.

Install the cotter pin to secure the right-hand side of the swathgate.

G. Connect the swathgate springs (1) to the swathgate, and then adjust the tension by tightening the hex nut (2).

H. Thread the hex nut on the full length of the eyebolt.

12. Adjust the roll tension to a starting point by rotating the adjusting handle (1) clockwise until all slack is taken up.

13. Apply eight additional turns, and then engage the retaining clip in the notch (2) in the header frame.

48049004 14/11/2016

60.2 [60.620] / 35

Product feeding - Roll conditioning

Tension arm and torsion bar - Remove - Right-hand 1. Completely loosen the roll pressure tension by rotating the roll pressure handle (1) counterclockwise until loose.

NOTICE: Failure to loosen the roll pressure may result in sudden movement of the roll tension system components or the upper conditioner roll, causing injury or component damage.

NHIL13HT00396AA

1

NHIL14HT00132AA

2

NHIL13HT00397AA

3

NHIL16HT00471AA

4

Remove the swathgate: A. Loosen the tension on the swathgate springs (1) (right-hand side shown) by loosening the hex nut (2).

B. Disconnect the swathgate springs from the swathgate.

C. Remove the cotter pin and linchpin that secures the swathgate adjustment handle (2) to the header frame.

D. Remove the cotter pin and washer that secures each end of the swathgate (1) to the header frame.

2. Remove each clamp (1), each set of hardware (2) (carriage bolt, lock washer, locking flange nut), and plate (3) that secures the curtain to the torsion bar (4).

3. Remove the curtain (5).

48049004 14/11/2016

60.2 [60.620] / 36

Product feeding - Roll conditioning

4. Loosen and remove the bolt (1) and spacer from the right-hand tension arm straps to the pivot arm.

5. Lower the tension arm down onto the pivot arm.

NHIL14HT00116AA

5

NHIL16HT00475AA

6

NHIL16HT00474AA

7

NHIL14HT00137AA

8

6. Loosen the bolt (1), and then pivot the plate (2) downward.

7. Grip the right-hand torsion rod (1) tightly using a pair of locking pliers, and then tap the pliers to shift the torsion rod toward the left-hand side of the machine and out of the center adjusting tube and tension arm.

NOTE: It may be necessary to apply penetrating fluid to loosen the hex ends of the torsion arms.

8. Remove the right-hand torsion arm: A. Remove the retaining ring (1) and washer (2).

B. Slide the tension arm out of the header frame.

NOTE: If the bushing (3) in the header frame is worn or galled, use a hammer and punch to drive the bushing out.

48049004 14/11/2016

60.2 [60.620] / 37

Product feeding - Roll conditioning

Tension arm and torsion bar - Install - Right-hand 1. Install a new bushing (3) into the header frame by driving it in flush with the tube.

2. Apply LOCTITE® 767 or an equivalent anti-seize compound to the inner surface of the bushing, the outer surface of the tension arm shaft, and the hex bore of the tension arm shaft.

3. Apply LOCTITE® 767 or an equivalent anti-seize compound to the torsion bar, and then slide it into the adjusting tube and the bushing on the right-hand side of the header frame.

NHIL14HT00137AA

1

NHIL16HT00475AA

2

NHIL14HT00116AA

3

NHIL16HT00471AA

4

4. Pivot the plate (2) upward and tighten the bolt (1).

5. Lift the tension arm upward until the tension straps (1) align with the bushing in the pivot arm.

6. Install and secure the bolt (2) and spacer.

7. Install the curtain (5).

8. Secure the curtain to the torsion bar (4) (right-hand side) or adjusting tube (center) at each location with a clamp (1), a set of hardware (2) (carriage bolt, lock washer, locking flange nut), and a plate (3).

48049004 14/11/2016

60.2 [60.620] / 38

Product feeding - Roll conditioning

9. Install the swathgate onto the header frame: A. Insert the right-hand side of the swathgate through the header frame.

B. Lift the left-hand side up to align with the hole in the header frame, and then slide the swathgate toward the left-hand side of the machine until the adjusting handle clip engages a notch in the quadrant bracket.

C. Install washers (1) on the left-hand side of the swathgate so that the swathgate cannot disengage from the quadrant bracket when the cotter pin is installed.

NHIL14HT00134AA

5

NHIL14HT00132AA

6

NHIL13HT00396AA

7

D. Install the cotter pin to secure the left-hand side of the swathgate.

E. Install washers to take up the clearance on the right-hand side of the swathgate.

F.

Install the cotter pin to secure the right-hand side of the swathgate.

G. Connect the swathgate springs (1) to the swathgate, and then adjust the tension by tightening the hex nut (2).

H. Thread the hex nut on the full length of the eyebolt.

10. Adjust the roll tension to a starting point by rotating the adjusting handle (1) clockwise until all slack is taken up.

11. Apply eight additional turns, and then engage the retaining clip in the notch (2) in the header frame.

48049004 14/11/2016

60.2 [60.620] / 39

Product feeding - Roll conditioning

Tension arm and torsion bar - Remove - Tension adjuster tube 1. Remove the left-hand torsion bar. ○ See Tension arm and torsion bar - Remove - Left-hand (60.620).

2. Remove the right-hand torsion bar. ○ See Tension arm and torsion bar - Remove - Right-hand (60.620).

3. Loosen the bolt and the locknut (1) that pinches the two mount straps against the trunnion (3).

4. Un-thread the adjusting handle assembly (2) from the trunnion and remove the adjusting handle assembly from the machine.

NHIL14HT00130AA

1

NHVM14HT00294AA

2

1441-7-34

3

5. Remove the crescent shaped support (1) from torsion bar.

6. Pivot the right-hand end of the adjuster tube down and remove it from the machine.

48049004 14/11/2016

60.2 [60.620] / 40

Product feeding - Roll conditioning

Tension arm and torsion bar - Install - Tension adjuster tube 1. Make sure that the 1/4 x 2-3/4 inch roll pins (1) and (2) are present before you install the adjuster tube onto the machine. These roll pins act as stops for the torsion bars in the hex bore of the adjuster tube.

NHIL16HT00476AA

1

NHIL14HT00136AA

2

NHVM14HT00294AA

3

NHIL14HT00130AA

4

2. Install the washers (2) over the left-hand end of the adjuster tube (1).

3. Insert the adjuster tube through the swathgate quadrant bracket (3) in the header frame.

4. Install the crescent-shaped support (1).

5. If removed, install the trunnion (3).

6. Thread the adjusting handle assembly (2) into the trunnion.

7. Install and tighten the bolt and locknut (1).

8. Install the right-hand torsion bar.

• See Tension arm and torsion bar - Install - Righthand (60.620).

9. Install the left-hand torsion bar.

• See Tension arm and torsion bar - Install - Lefthand (60.620).

48049004 14/11/2016

60.2 [60.620] / 41

Product feeding - Roll conditioning

Tension arm and torsion bar - Remove - Torsion bar adjustment crank 1. Loosen the bolt and the locknut (1) that pinches the two mount straps against the trunnion (3).

2. Un-thread the adjusting handle assembly (2) from the trunnion and remove the adjusting handle assembly from the machine.

NHIL14HT00130AA

48049004 14/11/2016

60.2 [60.620] / 42

1

Product feeding - Roll conditioning

Tension arm and torsion bar - Install - Torsion bar adjustment crank 1. If removed, install the trunnion (3).

2. Thread the adjusting handle assembly (2) into the trunnion.

3. Install and tighten the bolt and locknut (1).

NHIL14HT00130AA

48049004 14/11/2016

60.2 [60.620] / 43

1

Product feeding - Roll conditioning

Tension arm and torsion bar - Adjust - Roll pressure Adjust the roll pressure with the adjustment crank handle (1).

1.

Lift the adjustment crank handle from the storage position on the top shield.

2.

(A) – Turn the crank handle clockwise to increase the roll pressure. ○ Apply only sufficient pressure to crack the stems, with minimal damage to the leaves. ○ Over-conditioning will result in leaves over-drying and shattering, increased power requirements, and increased drive line wear.

3.

(B) – Turn the crank handle counterclockwise to decrease the roll pressure.

4.

Return the crank handle to the storage position and make sure that you push the handle spring clip into the retainer notch in the top shield.

48049004 14/11/2016

60.2 [60.620] / 44

NHIL13HT00396AA

1

Product feeding - Roll conditioning

Upper conditioner roll - Remove 1. Remove the right-hand header flotation spring (1).

A. Loosen the jam nut (1) a sufficient distance to fully relieve the spring tension.

B. Loosen the rod (2) until the rod and the flotation spring (3) detach.

C. Remove the flotation spring from the machine.

NHIL16HT00468AA

1

NHIL16HT00469AA

2

NHIL14HT00116AA

3

NHIL14HT00117AA

4

2. On 5.8 m (19 ft) wide headers, remove the support (1).

3. Remove the upper conditioner roll drive shaft. See Upper conditioner roll - Remove - Drive shaft (60.620).

4. The right-hand bearing arm (1) must be removed in order to remove the upper conditioner roll. Remove the roll gap rod (2) by removing the nut (3).

5. Raise the lock plate (1) and swing it to the side.

6. Lift the adjusting nut (2) and bolt out of the header.

48049004 14/11/2016

60.2 [60.620] / 45

Product feeding - Roll conditioning

7. Completely loosen the roll pressure tension by rotating the roll pressure handle (1) counterclockwise until it is loose.

NHIL13HT00396AA

5

NHIL14HT00118AA

6

NHIL14HT00119AA

7

NHIL14HT00120AA

8

8. Remove the bolt (1) and spacer that connects the roll tension arm straps (2) to the bearing arm.

9. Loosen the spring tension, and then remove the lefthand header flotation spring (1).

10. The left-hand pivot plate (1) must be removed in order to remove the upper conditioner roll. Remove the roll gap rod (2) by removing the nut (3).

11. Remove the bolt (4) and spacer that connects the roll tension arm straps (5) to the left-hand pivot plate.

48049004 14/11/2016

60.2 [60.620] / 46

Product feeding - Roll conditioning

12. Raise the lock plate (1) and swing it to the side.

13. Lift the adjusting nut (2) and bolt out of the header.

NHIL14HT00121AA

9

14. Loosen the set screw on the lock collar (1).

15. Loosen and remove the lock collar by inserting a punch into the drift hole and striking it sharply with a hammer in the opposite direction of shaft rotation.

NHIL14HT00124AA

10

NHIL14HT00122AA

11

NHIL14HT00123AA

12

16. Remove the pivot nut and bolt (1) at the rear of the left-hand pivot plate (2).

17. Support the upper conditioner roll using a floor jack and appropriate blocking.

18. Remove the pivot nut and bolt (1) at the rear of the right-hand bearing arm (2).

19. Swing the right-hand bearing arm downward so that it is clear of the pivot mount.

20. Slide the bearing arm and bearing off of the end of the upper conditioner roll.

21. Lower the left-hand side of the roll through the slot in the header frame, and then pivot the right-hand side of the roll out to remove it from the machine.

48049004 14/11/2016

60.2 [60.620] / 47

Product feeding - Roll conditioning

Upper conditioner roll - Install 1. With the upper conditioner roll supported with a floor jack and appropriate blocking, install the right-hand side of the roll into the hole in the header frame, and then pivot the roll upward to install the shaft into the slot.

2. Install the bearing arm and bearing onto the end of the upper conditioner roll.

3. Swing the right-hand bearing arm upward so that it can be attached to the pivot mount.

4. Install the pivot nut and bolt (1) at the rear of the righthand bearing arm (2).

NHIL14HT00123AA

1

NHIL14HT00122AA

2

NHIL14HT00124AA

3

5. On the left-hand side, install the pivot nut and bolt (1) at the rear of the left-hand pivot plate (2).

6. Install the lock collar (1) onto the shaft, and then tighten it by inserting a punch into the drift hole and striking it sharply with a hammer in the direction of shaft rotation.

7. Tighten the set screw on the lock collar.

48049004 14/11/2016

60.2 [60.620] / 48

Product feeding - Roll conditioning

8. Install the adjusting nut (2) and bolt to the header, and then raise the lock plate (1).

NHIL14HT00121AA

4

NHIL14HT00120AA

5

NHIL14HT00119AA

6

NHIL14HT00118AA

7

9. Install the bolt (4) and spacer that connects the roll tension arm straps (3) to the left-hand pivot plate.

10. Secure the roll gap rod (1) to the left-hand pivot plate with the previously removed nut (2).

11. Install the left-hand pickup flotation spring (1), and then set the header flotation weight.

12. On the right-hand side, install the bolt (1) and spacer that connects the roll tension arm straps (2) to the bearing arm.

48049004 14/11/2016

60.2 [60.620] / 49

Product feeding - Roll conditioning

13. Install the adjusting nut (2) and bolt to the header, and then raise the lock plate (1).

NHIL14HT00117AA

8

NHIL14HT00116AA

9

14. Secure the roll gap rod (2) to the right-hand bearing arm (1) with the previously removed nut (3).

15. Install the upper conditioner roll drive shaft. See Lower conditioner roll - Install - Drive shaft (60.620).

16. Install the lower conditioner roll. See Lower conditioner roll - Install (60.620).

48049004 14/11/2016

60.2 [60.620] / 50

Product feeding - Roll conditioning

Upper conditioner roll - Remove - Right-hand bearing 1. Remove the right-hand header flotation spring (1).

A. Loosen the jam nut (1) a sufficient distance to fully relieve the spring tension.

B. Loosen the rod (2) until the rod and the flotation spring (3) detach.

C. Remove the flotation spring from the machine.

NHIL16HT00468AA

1

NHIL16HT00469AA

2

NHIL14HT00116AA

3

NHIL14HT00117AA

4

2. On 4.9 m (16 ft) wide headers, remove the support (1).

3. Remove the upper conditioner roll drive shaft. See Upper conditioner roll - Remove - Drive shaft (60.620).

4. Remove the roll gap rod (1) by removing the nut (2).

5. Raise the lock plate (1) and swing it to the side.

6. Lift the adjusting nut (2) and bolt out of the header.

48049004 14/11/2016

60.2 [60.620] / 51

Product feeding - Roll conditioning

7. Completely loosen the roll pressure tension by rotating the roll pressure handle (1) counterclockwise until it is loose.

NHIL13HT00396AA

5

NHIL14HT00118AA

6

NHIL14HT00123AA

7

8. Remove the bolt (1) and spacer that connects the roll tension arm straps (2) to the bearing assembly.

9. Support the upper conditioner roll using a floor jack and appropriate blocking.

10. Remove the pivot nut and bolt (1) at the rear of the right-hand bearing arm (2).

11. Pull the bearing arm off of the shaft.

48049004 14/11/2016

60.2 [60.620] / 52

Product feeding - Roll conditioning

Upper conditioner roll - Install - Right-hand bearing 1. With the upper conditioner roll supported with a floor jack and appropriate blocking, install the bearing arm and bearing onto the end of the upper conditioner roll.

2. Install the pivot nut and bolt (1) at the rear of the righthand bearing arm (2).

NHIL14HT00123AA

1

NHIL14HT00122AA

2

NHIL14HT00118AA

3

NHIL14HT00117AA

4

3. On the left-hand side, install the pivot nut and bolt (1) at the rear of the left-hand pivot plate (2).

4. On the right-hand side, install the bolt (1) and spacer that connects the roll tension arm straps (2) to the bearing arm.

5. Install the adjusting nut (2) and bolt to the header, and then raise the lock plate (1).

48049004 14/11/2016

60.2 [60.620] / 53

Product feeding - Roll conditioning

6. Secure the roll gap rod (2) to the right-hand bearing arm (1) with the previously removed nut (3).

NHIL14HT00116AA

5

NHIL16HT00469AA

6

7. Install the upper conditioner roll drive shaft. See Conditioner roll gearbox - Install (60.620) .

8. Install the flotation spring and set header flotation. See Flotation system - Adjust (58.130).

9. On 4.9 m (16 ft) wide headers, install the support (1).

48049004 14/11/2016

60.2 [60.620] / 54

Product feeding - Roll conditioning

Upper conditioner roll - Remove - Drive shaft 1. On the right-hand side of the header, remove the upper conditioner roll drive shield (1).

• Five flange bolts and nuts at (2) secure the shield.

NHIL14HT00092AA

1

NHIL16HT00468AA

2

NHIL14HT00093AA

3

2. Remove the right-hand header flotation spring (1).

A. Loosen the jam nut (1) a sufficient distance to fully relieve the spring tension.

B. Loosen the rod (2) until the rod and the flotation spring (3) detach.

C. Remove the flotation spring from the machine.

3. Loosen and remove the hardware (1) that secures the upper conditioner roll drive shaft (2) to the conditioner roll gearbox (3).

• Four 1/2 x 1 inch bolts with two flat washers per bolt secure the flange yoke.

4. Remove the two 3/8 x 2-1/2 inch bolts and 3/8 inch locknuts that clamp the upper conditioner roll drive shaft to the roll shaft.

5. Slide the drive shaft yoke off of the roll shaft.

6. Remove the upper conditioner roll drive shaft from the machine.

48049004 14/11/2016

60.2 [60.620] / 55

Product feeding - Roll conditioning

Upper conditioner roll - Disassemble - Drive shaft 1. The upper drive shaft slides apart, and each Universal joint (U-joint) serviced separately.

1441-7-8

1

NOTE: The U-joint bearing cups are retained with external-type retaining rings (1) positioned on the inner side of the yoke ears.

2. Remove the retaining rings as follows: A. Position a screwdriver against the open end of the retaining ring.

B. Strike the screwdriver lightly to pop the retaining ring off the bearing cup.

3. Remove the lubrication fitting (1) from the one bearing cup.

1441-6-7

2

NOTE: The lubrication fitting is oriented to line up with the other lubrication fittings on the drive shaft. Make a note of the position of the lubrication fitting prior to removal.

NOTICE: Do not use a hard faced hammer, as this may damage the edge of the bearing cup bore in the yoke, causing the bearing cup to hang up or seize in the yoke.

4. Position the joint in an open vise, with each ear of one yoke supported by a vise jaw.

5. With a soft hammer or mallet, strike the top ear of the unsupported yoke at (1).

• Striking the ear of the yoke will drive the top bearing outward approximately 8 mm (1/4 in) so that you can then pull the bearing out of the yoke ear in Step 6.

1411-8-7

48049004 14/11/2016

60.2 [60.620] / 56

3

Product feeding - Roll conditioning

6. Pull the bearing out of the yoke ear.

• If necessary, grip the loosened bearing in a vise, and drive the yoke off the bearing by striking the yoke ear with the soft faced hammer or mallet.

7. Repeat Step 6 to remove the directly opposite bearing.

• You can then remove the yoke.

8. Remove the remaining two bearings as follows: A. Support the cross in the vise, making certain that you cover the jaws of the vise with brass protectors or that you install the previously removed bearings onto the cross as protection.

B. Striking the yoke ears, you can then remove the bearings as per Steps 4 through 6.

48049004 14/11/2016

60.2 [60.620] / 57

1411-8-8

4

Product feeding - Roll conditioning

Upper conditioner roll - Assemble - Drive shaft 1. To assemble the Universal joint (U-joint), position the cross (1) in the yoke so that the bearing journals are positioned in each yoke ear.

2. Insert the bearings in the outside of the yoke ears, and then position the assembly in a vise.

3. Press the bearings in until they are flush with the edge of the yoke.

4. Using a socket of the same diameter as the bearing, press the bearing into the yoke ear until the retaining ring groove is exposed on the inside of the yoke ear.

5. Install the retaining ring over the bearing cup.

1411-8-9

1

1441-7-8

2

6. Reposition the yoke and cross in the vise.

• Use the socket to press the opposite bearing fully into the yoke ear while rotating the cross to make sure that it does not bind up 7. Continue to press the bearing into the yoke ear until you can install the retaining ring.

A. Push the bearing in as far as possible with the vise.

B. Remove the yoke assembly and strike the yoke ears with a sharp blow from a hammer to spring the yoke enough to install the retaining ring.

8. Assemble the second yoke to the cross, repeating Steps 1 through 7.

NOTE: The lubrication fitting (1) should be oriented to line up with the other lubrication fittings (2) on the drive shaft for ease of lubrication. Make note of the positioning of the bearing up for the lubrication fitting during assembly to make sure that it aligns with the other lubrication fittings.

9. After completing the assembly of the U-joint, strike the forged surfaces of all yoke ears with a sharp blow from a hammer.

• Striking the yoke ears with a hammer will make sure that all of the bearings seat properly, and eliminates any possible tightness for a free flexing joint.

NOTICE: Use caution not to strike the bearing bore area of the yoke, as this will damage the bore and may cause premature cross bearing failure.

48049004 14/11/2016

60.2 [60.620] / 58

Product feeding - Roll conditioning

Upper conditioner roll - Install - Drive shaft 1. Slide the yoke of the upper conditioner roll drive shaft onto the roll shaft.

2. Secure the yoke to the splined shaft with the two 3/8 x 2-1/2 inch clamp bolts and 3/8 inch locknuts.

3. Tighten the 3/8 inch locknuts.

4. Connect the flange yoke (2) to the conditioner roll gearbox (3).

• Four 1/2 x 1 inch bolts (1) with two flat washers per bolt secure the flange yoke.

5. Adjust the timing of the upper and lower rolls by centering the lug of one roll in the groove of the mating roll to within 3 mm (0.12 in).

NHIL14HT00093AA

1

NHIL14HT00092AA

2

6. Tighten the 1/2 x 1 inch bolts.

7. Install the upper conditioner roll drive shield (1).

• Five 5/16 x 3/4 inch flange bolts and 5/16 inch flange nuts (2) secure the shield.

48049004 14/11/2016

60.2 [60.620] / 59

Product feeding - Roll conditioning

Pivot arm - Remove - Upper conditioner roll - Left-hand 1. Completely loosen the roll pressure tension by rotating the roll pressure handle (1) counterclockwise until it is loose.

NHIL13HT00396AA

1

NHIL14HT00119AA

2

NHIL14HT00120AA

3

NHIL14HT00121AA

4

2. Loosen the spring tension, and then remove the lefthand header flotation spring (1).

3. Remove the roll gap rod (1) by removing the nut (2).

4. Remove the bolt (3) and spacer that connects the roll tension arm straps (4) to the left-hand pivot plate.

5. Raise the lock plate (1) and swing it to the side.

6. Lift the adjusting nut (2) and bolt out of the header.

48049004 14/11/2016

60.2 [60.620] / 60

Product feeding - Roll conditioning

7. Loosen the set screw on the lock collar (1).

8. Loosen and remove the lock collar by inserting a punch into the drift hole and striking it sharply with a hammer in the opposite direction of shaft rotation.

NHIL14HT00124AA

5

NHIL14HT00122AA

6

9. Remove the pivot nut and bolt (1) at the rear of the left-hand pivot plate (2).

10. Support the upper conditioner roll using a floor jack and appropriate blocking.

11. Slide the bearing arm and bearing off of the end of the upper conditioner roll.

48049004 14/11/2016

60.2 [60.620] / 61

Product feeding - Roll conditioning

Pivot arm - Install - Upper conditioner roll - Left-hand 1. Install the bearing arm and bearing onto the end of the upper conditioner roll.

2. On the left-hand side, install the pivot nut and bolt (1) at the rear of the left-hand pivot plate (2).

NHIL14HT00122AA

1

NHIL14HT00124AA

2

NHIL14HT00121AA

3

NHIL14HT00120AA

4

3. Install the lock collar (1) onto the shaft, and then tighten it by inserting a punch into the drift hole and striking it sharply with a hammer in the direction of shaft rotation.

4. Tighten the set screw on the lock collar.

5. Install the adjusting nut (2) and bolt to the header, and then raise the lock plate (1).

6. Install the bolt (4) and spacer that connects the roll tension arm straps (3) to the left-hand pivot plate.

7. Secure the roll gap rod (1) to the left-hand pivot plate with the previously removed nut (2).

48049004 14/11/2016

60.2 [60.620] / 62

Product feeding - Roll conditioning

8. Install the left-hand pickup flotation spring (1), and then set the header flotation weight.

NHIL14HT00119AA

5

NHIL13HT00396AA

6

9. Adjust the roll tension to a starting point by rotating the adjusting handle (1) clockwise until all slack is taken up.

10. Apply eight additional turns, and then engage the retaining clip in the notch (2) in the header frame.

48049004 14/11/2016

60.2 [60.620] / 63

Product feeding - Roll conditioning

Pivot arm - Remove - Upper conditioner roll - Right-hand 1. Completely loosen the roll pressure tension by rotating the roll pressure handle (1) counterclockwise until it is loose.

NHIL13HT00396AA

1

NHIL16HT00468AA

2

NHIL16HT00469AA

3

NHIL14HT00116AA

4

2. Remove the right-hand header flotation spring (1).

A. Loosen the jam nut (1) a sufficient distance to fully relieve the spring tension.

B. Loosen the rod (2) until the rod and the flotation spring (3) detach.

C. Remove the flotation spring from the machine.

3. On 4.9 m (16 ft) wide headers, remove the support (1).

4. Remove the upper conditioner roll drive shaft. See Upper conditioner roll - Remove - Drive shaft (60.620).

5. Remove the roll gap rod (1) by removing the nut (2).

48049004 14/11/2016

60.2 [60.620] / 64

Product feeding - Roll conditioning

6. Raise the lock plate (1) and swing it to the side.

7. Lift the adjusting nut (2) and bolt out of the header.

NHIL14HT00117AA

5

NHIL14HT00118AA

6

NHIL14HT00123AA

7

8. Remove the bolt (1) and spacer that connects the roll tension arm straps (2) to the bearing arm.

9. Support the upper conditioner roll using a floor jack and appropriate blocking.

10. Remove the pivot nut and bolt (1) at the rear of the right-hand bearing arm (2).

11. Swing the right-hand bearing arm downward so that it is clear of the pivot mount.

12. Slide the bearing arm and bearing off of the end of the upper conditioner roll.

48049004 14/11/2016

60.2 [60.620] / 65

Product feeding - Roll conditioning

Pivot arm - Install - Upper conditioner roll - Right-hand 1. Install the bearing arm and bearing onto the end of the upper conditioner roll.

2. Swing the right-hand bearing arm upward so that it can be attached to the pivot mount.

3. Install the pivot nut and bolt (1) at the rear of the righthand bearing arm (2).

NHIL14HT00123AA

1

NHIL14HT00118AA

2

NHIL14HT00117AA

3

4. On the right-hand side, install the bolt (1) and spacer that connects the roll tension arm straps (2) to the bearing arm.

5. Install the adjusting nut (2) and bolt to the header, and then raise the lock plate (1).

48049004 14/11/2016

60.2 [60.620] / 66

Product feeding - Roll conditioning

6. Secure the roll gap rod (2) to the right-hand bearing arm (1) with the previously removed nut (3).

NHIL14HT00116AA

4

NHIL16HT00469AA

5

NHIL14HT00119AA

6

NHIL13HT00396AA

7

7. On 4.9 m (16 ft) wide headers, install the support (1).

8. Install the upper conditioner roll drive shaft. See Conditioner roll gearbox - Install (60.620) .

9. Install the left-hand pickup flotation spring (1), and then set the header flotation weight.

10. Adjust the roll tension to a starting point by rotating the adjusting handle (1) clockwise until all slack is taken up.

11. Apply eight additional turns, and then engage the retaining clip in the notch (2) in the header frame.

48049004 14/11/2016

60.2 [60.620] / 67

Product feeding - Roll conditioning

Conditioner drive gearbox – Change fluid Specification – Gear oil Use 200 mL (7 US fl oz) of TUTELA HYPOIDE EP GEAR LUBE SAE 80W-90 gear oil or CNH HYPOIDE SSL SYNTHETIC GEAR LUBE 75W-90 (synthetic).

Change fluid Change the conditioning roll drive gearbox oil every 300 hours or yearly, whichever comes first.

1.

Remove the plug (2) on the bottom of the gearbox to drain the gear oil.

2.

Apply LOCTITE® SI 598™ BLACK oil resistant sealant or an equivalent sealant to the threads of the drain plug before you install the drain plug into the gearbox.

3.

Inserting a funnel into the hole (1) at the top of the gearbox, and then add 200 mL (7 US fl oz) of gear oil.

NHIL13HT00510AA

48049004 14/11/2016

60.2 [60.620] / 68

1

Product feeding - Roll conditioning

Conditioner roll gearbox - Remove 1. Remove the upper conditioner roll drive shaft.

• See Upper conditioner roll - Remove - Drive shaft (60.620).

2. Remove the lower conditioner roll drive shaft.

• See Lower conditioner roll - Remove - Drive shaft (60.620).

3. Attach a lifting device to the conditioner roll gearbox (1). Tension the lifting device to support the weight of the conditioner roll gearbox when you remove the hardware.

NOTE: The approximate weight of the conditioner roll gearbox is 41 kg (90 lb).

4. Remove the four 1/2 x 1-1/4 inch carriage bolts, lock washers, and flange nuts (2).

5. Remove the conditioner roll gearbox from the machine.

48049004 14/11/2016

60.2 [60.620] / 69

NHIL16HT00873AA

1

Product feeding - Roll conditioning

Conditioner roll gearbox - Disassemble 1. Clean the conditioner roll gearbox with LOCTITE® ODCFREE CLEANER AND DEGREASERor a suitable solvent prior to disassembly.

2. Place the gearbox assembly on a large flat surface with the support plate (2) side upwards.

3. Remove the 16 flange bolts (1).

4. Remove the support plate (2), and then pry off the gearbox cover (3) from the gearbox housing (4).

NHIL16HT00869AA

1

NHIL16HT00872AA

2

NHIL16HT00871AA

3

5. Remove the cotter pin , the castellated nut (1), and the hardened washer from each shaft.

6. Lift the gear (2) off of each shaft.

7. Install the castellated nuts back onto the ends of the shaft to protect the threads.

8. Position the gearbox housing in a press, and then push the gearbox shafts out of the bearing cones.

9. Remove the shaft seals (1).

48049004 14/11/2016

60.2 [60.620] / 70

Product feeding - Roll conditioning

10. Remove the bearing cups (1) from the gearbox housing.

NHIL16HT00870AA

4

1411-8-3

5

11. Use a split bearing puller to capture the bearing cones (1) on the shafts, and then press the shafts out of the bearing cones.

12. Inspect the bearing cups and cones for damage. Inspect sealing surfaces on the shafts for damage; repair any nicks or scratches with emery cloth.

13. Replace the shaft if you cannot polish out the damage on the shaft. Inspect the shaft splines for evidence of wear or damage; replace the shaft if necessary.

48049004 14/11/2016

60.2 [60.620] / 71

Product feeding - Roll conditioning

Conditioner roll gearbox - Assemble 1. Thoroughly clean the internal and external area of the gearbox housing with LOCTITE® ODC-FREE CLEANER AND DEGREASER or a suitable solvent.

• Make sure that you remove all of the old sealant on the cover mounting flange.

2. Install the new bearing cups (1) into housing with the cups facing outwards from the bore.

• Firmly seat the bearing cups against the shoulders in housing.

NHIL16HT00870AA

1

NHIL16HT00871AA

2

1411-8-3

3

3. Install the shaft seals (1) into the housing so that the outer face of each seal is flush with the outer face of the housing.

4. Hand-pack the new bearing cones with NEW HOLLAND AMBRA HI TEMP EP GREASE, and then press a new bearing (1) onto each shaft to seat the bearing against the shoulder.

5. Apply NEW HOLLAND AMBRA HI TEMP EP GREASE onto the lip of the shaft seal, and then install the shaft assembly through seal. Make sure that you do not damage the shaft seal.

6. Hand-pack a new bearing cone with NEW HOLLAND AMBRA HI TEMP EP GREASE, and then install the bearing onto the shaft.

7. Press the bearing cone downward into the bearing cup until the bearing cone is almost fully seated.

48049004 14/11/2016

60.2 [60.620] / 72

Product feeding - Roll conditioning

8. Onto one shaft only, install a gear onto the shaft splines.

NOTE: This shaft will be referred to as the “first” shaft in the following instructions.

9. Secure the first shaft-and-gear assembly (1) as follows: A. Install a hardened washer (2), and then loosely turn the castellated nut (3) onto the shaft.

B. Incrementally tighten the castellated nut to seat the bearing cone into the bearing cup.

C. Measure the shaft rolling torque with a torque wrench. ○ The required rolling torque specification is 0.5 1.0 N·m (4 - 10 lb in).

NHIL16HT00874AA

4

NHIL16HT00875AA

5

NOTE: Make note of the measured rolling torque value. You must use the shaft rolling torque value to add- to and to calculate the shaft rolling torque range specification when you install the remaining gear.

D. Tighten or loosen the castellated nut on the first shaft to adjust the rolling torque.

E. Align the closest notch on the castellated nut with the cotter hole in the shaft.

F.

Install the cotter pin (4) and bend the legs of the cotter pin open.

10. Install the second gear onto the shaft splines onto the second shaft.

NOTE: This shaft will be referred to as the “second” shaft in the following instructions.

11.

Secure the second shaft-and-gear assembly (1) as follows: A. Install a hardened washer (2), and then loosely turn the castellated nut (3) onto the shaft.

B. Incrementally tighten the castellated nut to seat the bearing cone into the bearing cup.

C. Measure the shaft rolling torque with a torque wrench. ○ The required rolling torque specification is 0.5 - 1.0 N·m (4 - 10 lb in) plus the rolling torque value for the first shaft. ○ See the “Shaft rolling torque specifications – First shaft and second shaft” table that follows for examples of the specifications.

D. Tighten or loosen the castellated nut on the second shaft to adjust the rolling torque.

E. Align the closest notch on the castellated nut with the cotter hole in the shaft.

F.

Install the cotter pin (4) and bend the legs of the cotter pin open.

48049004 14/11/2016

60.2 [60.620] / 73

Product feeding - Roll conditioning

Shaft rolling torque specifications – First shaft and second shaft First shaft – Rolling torque range 0.5 - 1.0 N·m (4 - 10 lb in)– 0.5 N·m (4 lb in) 0.6 N·m (5 lb in) 0.7 N·m (6 lb in) 0.8 N·m (7 lb in) 0.9 N·m (8 lb in) 1.0 N·m (9 lb in)

Second shaft – Rolling torque range equals the first shaft torque plus the second shaft torque 1.0 - 1.50 N·m (8 - 13 lb in) 1.1 - 1.6 N·m (9 - 14 lb in) 1.2 - 1.7 N·m (10 - 15 lb in) 1.3 - 1.8 N·m (11 - 16 lb in) 1.4 - 1.9 N·m (12 - 17 lb in) 1.5 - 2.0 N·m (13 - 18 lb in)

12. Clean the mating surfaces of the gearbox housing and the cover with LOCTITE® ODC-FREE CLEANER AND DEGREASER or a suitable solvent to provide proper sealant adhesion.

13. Apply a continuous thin bead (1) of LOCTITE® SI 598™ BLACK silicone sealant to the gearbox housing. Make sure that the sealant bead follows a path to the inside of the bolt pattern.

NOTE: Do not apply an excessive amount of sealant.

NHIL16HT00876AA

6

NHIL16HT00869AA

7

14. Align the cover hardware holes to the gearbox housing hardware holes, and then press the cover (1) into the sealant on the housing (2).

15. Align the support plate (3) to the cover and gearbox housing hardware holes, and then install the sixteen 5/8 inch x 1 inch flange bolts (4).

16. Torque the 5/8 inch x 1 inch flange bolts to 29 N·m (257 lb in).

17. Wipe off any excess sealant.

48049004 14/11/2016

60.2 [60.620] / 74

Product feeding - Roll conditioning

Conditioner roll gearbox - Install 1. Use a lifting device to raise the conditioner roll gearbox (1) into position on the right-hand side of the machine.

NOTE: The approximate weight of the conditioner roll gearbox is 41 kg (90 lb).

2. Secure the conditioner roll gearbox to the machine with four 1/2 x 1-1/4 inch carriage bolts, lock washers, and flange nuts (2).

3. Remove the lifting device.

4. Install the lower conditioner roll drive shaft.

• See Lower conditioner roll - Install - Drive shaft (60.620).

5. Install the upper conditioner roll drive shaft.

• See Upper conditioner roll - Install - Drive shaft (60.620).

48049004 14/11/2016

60.2 [60.620] / 75

NHIL16HT00873AA

1

Product feeding - Roll conditioning

Swathgate - Remove 1. Loosen the tension on the swathgate springs (1) (righthand side shown) by loosening the hex nut (2).

2. Disconnect the swathgate springs from the swathgate.

NHIL14HT00132AA

1

NHIL13HT00397AA

2

3. Remove the cotter pin and linchpin that secures the swathgate adjustment handle (2) to the header frame.

4. Remove the cotter pin and washer that secures each end of the swathgate (1) to the header frame.

48049004 14/11/2016

60.2 [60.620] / 76

Product feeding - Roll conditioning

Swathgate - Install 1. Insert the right-hand side of the swathgate through the header frame.

2. Lift the left-hand side up to align with the hole in the header frame, and then slide the swathgate toward the left-hand side of the machine until the adjusting handle clip engages a notch in the quadrant bracket.

3. Install washers (1) on the left-hand side of the swathgate so that the swathgate cannot disengage from the quadrant bracket when the cotter pin is installed.

4. Install the cotter pin to secure the left-hand side of the swathgate.

5. Install washers to take up the clearance on the righthand side of the swathgate.

NHIL14HT00134AA

1

NHIL14HT00132AA

2

6. Install the cotter pin to secure the right-hand side of the swathgate.

7. Connect the swathgate springs (1) to the swathgate, and then adjust the tension by tightening the hex nut (2).

8. Thread the hex nut on the full length of the eyebolt.

48049004 14/11/2016

60.2 [60.620] / 77

Index Product feeding - 60 Roll conditioning - 620 Conditioner drive gearbox – Change fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

68

Conditioner roll gearbox - Assemble . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

72

Conditioner roll gearbox - Disassemble . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

70

Conditioner roll gearbox - Install . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

75

Conditioner roll gearbox - Remove . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

69

Lower conditioner roll - Adjust - Roll gap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

30

Lower conditioner roll - Adjust - Roll timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

29

Lower conditioner roll - Assemble - Drive shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

27

Lower conditioner roll - Disassemble - Drive shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

26

Lower conditioner roll - Install . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

13

Lower conditioner roll - Install - Drive shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

28

Lower conditioner roll - Install - Left-hand bearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

19

Lower conditioner roll - Install - Right-hand bearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

23

Lower conditioner roll - Remove . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9

Lower conditioner roll - Remove - Drive shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

25

Lower conditioner roll - Remove - Left-hand bearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

17

Lower conditioner roll - Remove - Right-hand bearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

21

Pivot arm - Install - Upper conditioner roll - Left-hand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

62

Pivot arm - Install - Upper conditioner roll - Right-hand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

66

Pivot arm - Remove - Upper conditioner roll - Left-hand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

60

Pivot arm - Remove - Upper conditioner roll - Right-hand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

64

Roll conditioning - Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5

Roll conditioning - Static description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4

Swathgate - Install . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

77

Swathgate - Remove . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

76

Tension arm and torsion bar - Adjust - Roll pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

44

Tension arm and torsion bar - Install - Left-hand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

34

Tension arm and torsion bar - Install - Right-hand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

38

Tension arm and torsion bar - Install - Tension adjuster tube . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

41

Tension arm and torsion bar - Install - Torsion bar adjustment crank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

43

Tension arm and torsion bar - Remove - Left-hand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

32

Tension arm and torsion bar - Remove - Right-hand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

36

Tension arm and torsion bar - Remove - Tension adjuster tube . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

40

Tension arm and torsion bar - Remove - Torsion bar adjustment crank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

42

48049004 14/11/2016

60.2 [60.620] / 78

Upper conditioner roll - Assemble - Drive shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

58

Upper conditioner roll - Disassemble - Drive shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

56

Upper conditioner roll - Install . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

48

Upper conditioner roll - Install - Drive shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

59

Upper conditioner roll - Install - Right-hand bearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

53

Upper conditioner roll - Remove . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

45

Upper conditioner roll - Remove - Drive shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

55

Upper conditioner roll - Remove - Right-hand bearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

51

48049004 14/11/2016

60.2 [60.620] / 79

48049004 14/11/2016

60.2 [60.620] / 80

Product feeding - 60 Flail conditioning - 630

Discbine® 313 Discbine® 316

48049004 14/11/2016

60.3 [60.630] / 1

Contents Product feeding - 60 Flail conditioning - 630

SERVICE Flail system Remove - Flails . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Inspect - Flails . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Install - Flails . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Remove . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Install . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

Conditioning hood Replace - Hood liner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Remove . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Inspect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Install . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

48049004 14/11/2016

60.3 [60.630] / 2

Product feeding - Flail conditioning

Flail system - Remove - Flails 1. Drive the roll pin (1) out of the flail shaft (2).

2. Slide the flails (3) off of the shaft as it is removed from the rotor.

NHIL14HT00141AA

48049004 14/11/2016

60.3 [60.630] / 3

1

Product feeding - Flail conditioning

Flail system - Inspect - Flails 1. Inspect the shaft (1) and flails (2). Replace any damaged or worn parts.

• Replace any flails (3) in which the edge of the mounting hole is less than 3 mm (1/8 in) from the edge of the flail.

• Replace the flail shaft if a 3 mm (1/8 in) or greater groove is worn into the shaft.

NHIL14HT00138AA

1

NHIL14HT00140AA

2

• (A) = 3 mm (1/8 in)

48049004 14/11/2016

60.3 [60.630] / 4

Product feeding - Flail conditioning

Flail system - Install - Flails NOTE: Install the flails onto the shaft with the rounded edge (1) oriented as shown in the direction of rotor rotation. The arrow indicates the machines direction of travel.

NHIL14HT00142AA

1

NHIL14HT00143AA

2

NHIL14HT00141AA

3

1. Install the shaft through the circular hole (1) on the rotor.

NOTE: The roll pin should secure the shaft on the opposite side of the slotted hole (2).

2. Install the flails (1) onto the shaft (2).

3. Secure the shaft with a 5/16 x 1-1/2 inch roll pin (3).

48049004 14/11/2016

60.3 [60.630] / 5

Product feeding - Flail conditioning

Flail system - Remove 1. Raise the header fully, and then engage the header lift lock channels by pivoting both the right-hand and left-hand lock levers (1) forward.

NHIL13HT00304AA

1

NHVM13HT00588AA

2

NHIL14HT00180AA

3

NHIL14HT00181AA

4

2. Install the header tilt pin (1) through the channel slot and the rear hole of the cylinder rod to lock the header in the level position.

3. Lower the header onto the lift lock channels.

4. Raise or remove the rear curtain (1) and frame.

5. Remove the rear shield (1): A. Disconnect the windrow shield rods by removing the hairpin cotters (2).

48049004 14/11/2016

60.3 [60.630] / 6

Product feeding - Flail conditioning

B. On both sides, loosen and remove the hardware at (3) and (4).

C. Remove the rear shield from the machine.

NHIL14HT00182AA

5

NHIL14HT00135AA

6

NHIL14HT00132AA

7

NHIL14HT00134AA

8

6. Remove the swathgate as follows: A. Remove the right-hand deflector (1), wedge (2), and plate (3) by removing the four carriage bolts, lock washers, and flange nuts (4).

B. Loosen the tension on the swathgate springs (1) (right-hand side shown) by loosening the hex nut (2).

C. Disconnect the swathgate springs from the swathgate.

D. Remove the cotter pin (1) and washers (2) at each end of the swathgate where the swathgate mounting tube fits through the header frame.

E. Slide the swathgate toward the right-hand side of the machine so that the swathgate handle disengages from the adjusting quadrant, and the lefthand side slips out of the header frame.

F. Lower the left-hand side of the swathgate down, and then slide it toward the left-hand side of the machine.

G. Remove the right-hand side of the swathgate from the machine.

48049004 14/11/2016

60.3 [60.630] / 7

Product feeding - Flail conditioning

7. Remove the windrow shields (1) and mounting brackets (2) to expose the rotor removal slots in the header frame.

NOTE: There is a mounting plate between the mounting brackets and the header frame on each side of the machine. Remove the mounting plate and retain for installation.

NHIL14HT00184AA

9

8. Loosen the jam nut (1), and then loosen the nut (2) to relieve tension from the rotor drive belt (3).

NHIL14HT00095AA

10

NHIL14HT00096AA

11

NHIL14HT00097AA

12

9. Loosen and remove the 3/4 inch nut (1) and washer (2).

10. Use a puller to remove the rotor drive sheave.

NOTE: The sheave is secured to the hub, which is keyed and sits on a tapered shaft.

11. Retain the square key (1) from the keyseat in the shaft (2).

48049004 14/11/2016

60.3 [60.630] / 8

Product feeding - Flail conditioning

12. Support the weight of the rotor (1) with a lifting device (2) for removal.

NHIL14HT00188AA

13

NHIL14HT00185AA

14

NHIL14HT00186AA

15

NHIL14HT00187AA

16

13. Using an additional lifting device, raise the trail frame, and then support the trail frame with adequate jack stands.

14. Remove the wheels from the machine.

15. On both sides of the rotor: A. Loosen and remove the hardware securing the bearing shields to the bearings. Remove the lefthand (1) and right-hand (2) bearing shields.

B. Loosen the set screw on the lock collar.

C. Loosen and remove the lock collar by placing a punch in the drift hole and striking it sharply with a hammer in the opposite direction of shaft rotation, as indicated by the arrow in Figures 14 and 15.

D. Loosen and remove the remaining hardware securing the bearings to the header frame.

16. Pry the bearings (1) slightly away from the header frame (2) so that the rotor and bearings can be removed as an assembly.

48049004 14/11/2016

60.3 [60.630] / 9

Product feeding - Flail conditioning

17. Pivot the right-hand end of the rotor out, and then remove the rotor from the machine.

NHIL14HT00189AA

48049004 14/11/2016

60.3 [60.630] / 10

17

Product feeding - Flail conditioning

Flail system - Install 1. Install the left-hand end of the rotor into the left-hand slot on the header frame, and then pivot the right-hand end of the rotor into the right-hand slot.

NHIL14HT00189AA

1

NHIL14HT00185AA

2

NHIL14HT00186AA

3

NHIL14HT00097AA

4

2. Tap the bearings so that they are fully seated on the header frame.

3. Secure the bearings to the header frame with the previously removed hardware.

4. Center the rotor within the header frame, and then install and tighten the lock collars on each bearing: A. Tighten the lock collar by placing a punch in the drift hole and striking it sharply with a hammer in the direction of shaft rotation, as indicated by the arrow in Figures 2 and 3.

B. Tighten the set screw on the lock collar.

5. Install and tighten the hardware securing the left-hand (1) and right-hand (2) bearing shields to the bearings.

6. With the machine adequately supported by jack stands, install the wheels, and then tighten the wheel hardware.

Torque to 203 N·m (150 lb ft) 7. Raise the machine.

8. Remove the jack stands.

9. Lower the machine.

10. Install the previously removed square key (1) from the keyseat in the shaft (2).

48049004 14/11/2016

60.3 [60.630] / 11

Product feeding - Flail conditioning

11. Install the rotor drive sheave (1), and then secure it with the flat washer (2) and 3/4 inch nut (3).

NOTE: The sheave installs with the narrow side of the web toward the outside of the header.

12. Torque the 3/4 inch nut to 235 - 265 N·m (173 - 195 lb ft).

13. Tap the hub with a hammer, and then torque the nut to the specification in Step 12.

14. Repeat Step 13 until the tapers are fully seated and the torque stabilizes.

15. Sheaves and idler must align within 3 mm (1/8 in).

NHIL14HT00096AA

5

NHIL14HT00095AA

6

NHIL14HT00144AA

7

NHIL14HT00184AA

8

• Adjust shims between the sheave and hub if required.

16. Install the rotor drive belt (3).

17. Tension the belt by adjusting the hex nut (2) until you achieve a spring length (A).

• (A) = 210 mm (8.25 in) 18. Tighten the jam nut (1).

19. Install the mounting brackets (2) and windrow shields (1) onto the header frame.

NOTE: There is a mounting plate between the mounting brackets and the header frame on each side of the machine. Install the mounting plate first, and then install the mounting bracket. Torque hardware to 113 N·m (83 lb ft)

48049004 14/11/2016

60.3 [60.630] / 12

Product feeding - Flail conditioning

20. Install the swathgate onto the header frame: A. Insert the right-hand side of the swathgate through the header frame.

B. Lift the left-hand side up to align with the hole in the header frame, and then slide the swathgate toward the left-hand side of the machine until the adjusting handle clip engages a notch in the quadrant bracket.

C. Install washers (1) on the left-hand side of the swathgate so that the swathgate cannot disengage from the quadrant bracket when the cotter pin is installed.

NHIL14HT00134AA

9

D. Install the cotter pin to secure the left-hand side of the swathgate.

E. Install washers to take up the clearance on the right-hand side of the swathgate.

F.

Install the cotter pin to secure the right-hand side of the swathgate.

• Bend the legs of the cotter pin open.

G. Install the right-hand deflector (1), wedge (2), and plate (3) by installing and securing the four carriage bolts, lock washers, and flange nuts (4).

NHIL14HT00135AA

10

NHIL14HT00132AA

11

H. Connect the swathgate springs (1) to the swathgate, and then adjust the tension by tightening the hex nut (2).

I. Thread the hex nut on the full length of the eyebolt.

48049004 14/11/2016

60.3 [60.630] / 13

Product feeding - Flail conditioning

21. Install the rear shield (1): A. On both sides, install and tighten the hardware at (2) and (3).

NHIL14HT00182AA

12

NHIL14HT00181AA

13

NHIL14HT00180AA

14

NHVM13HT00588AA

15

B. Connect the windrow shield rods (1), and then secure them with the previously removed hairpin cotters (2).

22. Lower the rear curtain (1) or install the curtain.

23. Adjust the position of the header tilt pin (1) for the desired header tilt.

48049004 14/11/2016

60.3 [60.630] / 14

Product feeding - Flail conditioning

24. Raise the header fully, and then disengage the header lift lock channels by pivoting both the right-hand and left-hand lock levers (1) rearward.

NHIL13HT00304AA

48049004 14/11/2016

60.3 [60.630] / 15

16

Product feeding - Flail conditioning

Conditioning hood - Replace - Hood liner A bolt-in replaceable hood liner is standard on the disc mower-conditioner to provide extended life and prevent wear to the hood. If the hood liner becomes worn or damaged, replace the hood liner with a new liner.

1. To remove the hood liner, turn the hood crank (1) clockwise to lower the hood to its lowest position.

NHIL13HT00502AA

1

19985251NNN

2

NOTE: It may be necessary to remove the down stop spacer and bolt (2) at the end of the rotor hood to gain access to the mounting hardware (1).

2. Loosen the hardware, remove the hood liner sections, and replace each liner section.

3. Secure the front and rear of each hood liner section to the hood using 3/8 x 3/4 inch carriage bolts (1), washers, and flange nuts.

• Tighten the nuts to the nominal torque specification.

4. Install the down stop spacer and bolt (2) at the ends of the rotor hood, if these were removed to gain access to the mounting hardware.

48049004 14/11/2016

60.3 [60.630] / 16

Product feeding - Flail conditioning

Conditioning hood - Remove WARNING Crushing hazard!

The hood is extremely heavy. When manually raising the hood, use suitable blocking equipment and watch for sharp edges on machine.

Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury.

W0049B

1. Remove or raise the rear curtain (1).

2. Remove the side windrow shields (2).

3. Remove the rear shielding (3).

NHIL13HT00516AA

1

NHIL14HT00145AA

2

NHIL13HT00502AA

3

4. Remove the upper half of the rotor shields (1) from both ends of the rotor.

5. Raise the conditioning hood by turning the crank (1) clockwise.

48049004 14/11/2016

60.3 [60.630] / 17

Product feeding - Flail conditioning

6. Use wood blocks (1) to hold the conditioning hood above the rotor.

7. Take pressure off of the hood retaining hardware by lowing the hood until it is resting on the wood blocks.

19990089N

4

NHIL14HT00146AA

5

NHIL14HT00147AA

6

19990085N

7

8. Remove the down stop bolt and spacer (1) at either end of the hood.

9. Remove the bolts (1) that secure the hood to the adjustment shaft (2).

10. Attach a lifting device (1) to the hood using available hardware.

11. Raise the lifting device until it is snug to prevent the hood from sliding out of the front of the machine.

12. Remove the previously installed wood blocks.

48049004 14/11/2016

60.3 [60.630] / 18

Product feeding - Flail conditioning

13. Remove the pivot bolt, washer, and nut (1) from both ends of the hood.

14. Using the lifting device and additional manpower, slide the hood over the flail rotor and out the rear of the machine.

NHIL14HT00148AA

48049004 14/11/2016

60.3 [60.630] / 19

8

Product feeding - Flail conditioning

Conditioning hood - Inspect 1. Inspect the hood for wear or damage. Repair or replace it as required.

NHIL14HT00149AA

1

NHPH13HT00650FA

2

2. Inspect the hood liners for wear or damage. If necessary, replace the liners with the hood off of the machine for an easier installation.

48049004 14/11/2016

60.3 [60.630] / 20

Product feeding - Flail conditioning

Conditioning hood - Install WARNING Crushing hazard!

The hood is extremely heavy. When manually raising the hood, use suitable blocking equipment and watch for sharp edges on machine.

Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury.

W0049B

1. With the liners installed, use a lifting device (1) to lift the hood (2) into the machine from the rear. The pivot end of the hood goes toward the front of the header.

19990085N

1

NHIL14HT00148AA

2

19990089N

3

2. Align the pivot bolt holes in the hood and header frame.

3. Install the pivot bolts (1) with nuts and washers.

4. Install wood blocks (1) under the rear of the hood to align the down stop bolt holes.

48049004 14/11/2016

60.3 [60.630] / 21

Product feeding - Flail conditioning

5. Attach the hood to the adjustment shaft (2) with the previously removed hardware (1).

NHIL14HT00147AA

4

NHIL14HT00146AA

5

NHIL13HT00502AA

6

6. Install the down stop bolts and spacers (1).

7. Remove the wood blocks.

8. Raise the hood to the desired conditioning level by turning the crank (1) counterclockwise.

NOTICE: Do not allow the flails to strike the hood liner during operation. Adjust or repair the hood and/or liner if this occurs.

48049004 14/11/2016

60.3 [60.630] / 22

Index Product feeding - 60 Flail conditioning - 630 Conditioning hood - Inspect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

20

Conditioning hood - Install . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

21

Conditioning hood - Remove . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

17

Conditioning hood - Replace - Hood liner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

16

Flail system - Inspect - Flails . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4

Flail system - Install . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11

Flail system - Install - Flails . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5

Flail system - Remove . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6

Flail system - Remove - Flails . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3

48049004 14/11/2016

60.3 [60.630] / 23

CNH Industrial America New Holland Site 100 Brubaker Avenue New Holland, Pennsylvania United States 17557 SERVICE - Technical Publications & Tools

PRINTED IN U.S.A. © 2016 CNH Industrial America LLC. All rights reserved. No part of the text or illustrations of this publication may be reproduced.

NEW HOLLAND policy is one of continuous improvement and the right to change prices, specification or equipment at any time without notices is reserved.

All data given in this publication is subject to production variations. Dimensions and weight are approximate only and the illustrations do not necessarily show products in standard condition. For exact information about any particular product, please consult your NEW HOLLAND Dealer.

48049004 14/11/2016 EN

SPECIAL TOOL INDEX Genuine NH01386-1 [Special Gearbox Wrench ] NH01386-2 [Special Gearbox Wrench ] NH01386-2 [Special Gearbox Wrench ] NH01386-1 [Special Gearbox Wrench ] NH01386-1 [Special Gearbox Wrench ] NH01386-2 [Special Gearbox Wrench ] NH01386-1 [Special Gearbox Wrench ] NH01386-2 [Special Gearbox Wrench ] NH01386-2 [Special Gearbox Wrench ] NH01386-1 [Special Gearbox Wrench ] NH01386-2 [Special Gearbox Wrench ] NH01386-1 [Special Gearbox Wrench ] NH01386-1 [Special Gearbox Wrench ]

Kit NH01386 [Discbine Tool Kit] NH01386 [Discbine Tool Kit]

Reference

PAGE

Gearbox - Special tools

31.4 / 3

Gearbox - Special tools

31.4 / 3

Gearbox - Special tools

31.4 / 3

Gearbox - Special tools

31.4 / 3

Gearbox - Disassemble - Swivel hitch or reversing gearboxes Gearbox - Disassemble - Swivel hitch or reversing gearboxes Gearbox - Disassemble - Swivel hitch or reversing gearboxes Gearbox - Disassemble - Swivel hitch or reversing gearboxes Gearbox - Disassemble - Swivel hitch or reversing gearboxes Gearbox - Disassemble - Swivel hitch or reversing gearboxes Gearbox - Assemble - Swivel hitch gearboxes

swivel

31.4 / 23

swivel

31.4 / 23

swivel

31.4 / 24

swivel

31.4 / 24

swivel

31.4 / 24

swivel

31.4 / 24 31.4 / 41

Gearbox - Assemble - Swivel hitch gearboxes

31.4 / 41

Gearbox - Assemble - Swivel hitch gearboxes

31.4 / 42

Reference Gearbox - Special tools Gearbox - Disassemble - Swivel hitch or reversing swivel gearboxes

48049004 14/11/2016

PAGE 31.4 / 3 31.4 / 23

CNH Industrial America New Holland Site 100 Brubaker Avenue New Holland, Pennsylvania United States 17557 SERVICE - Technical Publications & Tools

PRINTED IN U.S.A. © 2016 CNH Industrial America LLC. All rights reserved. No part of the text or illustrations of this publication may be reproduced.

NEW HOLLAND policy is one of continuous improvement and the right to change prices, specification or equipment at any time without notices is reserved.

All data given in this publication is subject to production variations. Dimensions and weight are approximate only and the illustrations do not necessarily show products in standard condition. For exact information about any particular product, please consult your NEW HOLLAND Dealer.

48049004 14/11/2016 EN